Quick viewing(Text Mode)

City Plan Intend to Adopt March 2021.Pdf

Intend to Adopt version March 2021 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 FOREWORD CONTENTS

FOREWORD

City Plan 2019–2040, first and foremost, is a plan for literally. Soft landscaping and streets lined with trees, people. It sets out to deliver an ambitious strategy to bring natural beauty and mitigate against the harmful make one of the best places to live, work effects of CO2. A stunning city encourages walking and play. Not just in or the UK, but globally. and cycling, bringing further environmental benefits.

Although this plan projects us forward to 2040, the With higher rents and changing patterns of how transformation starts now. Being a city where people want people shop, bold action will ensure London’s West to live is at the forefront of our agenda. Whilst a quarter End remains the jewel in our commercial crown. This of all homes in Westminster are social rented – a statistic strategy sets out a game-changing Central Activities of which we are very proud – we have a pressing need for Zone (CAZ) to deliver a world-class leisure experience. new, affordable homes. Regeneration of key areas such as We remain committed to investing £150 million to secure Victoria and , and the north west of the city, will the future of as a global destination, invigorate both our residential and business capabilities. with an unrivalled experience and visitor offer.

It’s absolutely vital that development must never be As we set out to create our city of the future, there is one at the expense of our heritage. Our new approach to question that should be at the forefront of our minds in every managing development will make sure planning for development we undertake: Will this be an asset to people’s Westminster is about conservation not just preservation, lives? If we can answer this positively every time, the and building tomorrow’s heritage today. Our iconic Westminster of 2040 is one we will all want to be a part of. landmarks and outstanding heritage form a stunning backdrop where people build lives, forge careers, and make memories. We have identified ‘specialist clusters’ to be protected; places whose character adds significantly to London’s global appeal, such as , , Harley Street and Savile Row. Councillor Matthew Green Sustainability must drive everything we do. This Cabinet Member for Business, Licensing and Planning strategy defines what we need to achieve and how innovative planning and design will achieve it. Greener living must inform the choices we make – sometimes

3 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOW TO USE THIS PLAN CONTENTS CONTENTS

HOW TO USE THIS PLAN

This is the City Plan for Westminster to 2040. Step 3: Some policies in the Plan deal with Along with the ’s London Plan and different types of use. This helps to determine any neighbourhood plans which may be made in whether a use or change of use of a building is future, it is the statutory development plan setting appropriate or not. The contents pages and out our vision and strategy for the development of specific topic-based chapters should also help the city, and contains policies that will be used in you identify the relevant policies. determining planning applications.1 Step 4: Other policies set out requirements for If you are submitting, assessing or commenting the form that the development should take and on applications, or want to find out more about the any measures needed to mitigate its impacts. policies for your area: The City Plan should be read as a whole to Step 1: Start with the vision and spatial strategy. understand if a development will be acceptable. They show the main areas for growth and Policies are not cross-referenced throughout the change in the city. Plan, however there are many interrelated issues across the chapters which should be considered Step 2: Consult the ‘policies map’ that goes in tandem. with this plan. It shows where the policies apply. You can use this to find the policies that relate to Appendix 2 identifies our strategic policies and your site or area of interest. will be particularly helpful to anyone involved in creating, or commenting on, neighbourhood plans.

1 Under section 38(6) of the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004 planning decisions should be taken in accordance with the statutory development plan unless material planning considerations indicate otherwise.

4 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTENTS CONTENTS CONTENTS

CONTENTS

CONTEXT 8 Housing Policies 54 8. Housing delivery 56 OUR APPROACH FOR WESTMINSTER 22 9. Affordable housing 59 OBJECTIVES 24 10. Housing for specific groups 62 11. Innovative housing delivery 65 Spatial Strategy Policies 28 12. Housing quality 67 1. Westminster’s spatial strategy 30 2. Spatial Development Priorities: Economy and Employment Policies 70 West End Retail and Leisure Special Policy Area 13. Supporting economic growth 72 and Opportunity Area 34 14. Town centres, high streets and the CAZ 75 3. Spatial Development Priorities: Paddington Opportunity Area 38 15. Visitor Economy 82 4. Spatial Development Priorities: 16. Food, drink and entertainment 86 Victoria Opportunity Area 41 17. Community infrastructure and facilities 89 5. Spatial Development Priorities: 18. Education and skills 91 North West Economic Development Area 44 19. Digital infrastructure, information 6. Spatial Development Priorities: and communications technology 92 Church Street / Edgware Road and Ebury Bridge Estate Housing Renewal Areas 47 20. Soho Special Policy Area 93 7. Managing development for Westminster’s people 51 21. Mayfair and St. James’s Special Policy Areas 97 22. Harley Street Special Policy Area 99 23. Savile Row Special Policy Area 99

6 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTENTS CONTENTS

Connections Policies 102 Design and Heritage Policies 144 24. Sustainable transport 104 38. Design principles 146 25. Walking and cycling 106 39. Westminster’s heritage 148 26. Public transport and infrastructure 109 40. Townscape and architecture 155 27. Parking 112 41. Building height 160 28. Highway access and management 115 42. Building height in the housing renewal areas 162 29. Freight and servicing 116 43. Public realm 164 30. Technological innovation in transport 119 44. Security measures in the public realm 168 31. Waterways and waterbodies 120 45. Basement developments 169 Environment Policies 124 32. Air quality 126 IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING 172 33. Local environmental impacts 128 APPENDIX 1: WESTMINSTER’S HOUSING TRAJECTORY 181 34. Green infrastructure 130 35. Flood risk 134 APPENDIX 2: SCHEDULE OF STRATEGIC POLICIES 186 36. Energy 137 APPENDIX 3: SCHEDULE OF SUPERSEDED POLICIES 190 37. Waste management 141 GLOSSARY 206

7 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS CONTENTS

43AD 50AD 460 600

First London road network Founding of London The Roman army The Saxons CONTEXT Roads built in the first phase of Roman (Londinium) leaves Britain create a new occupation (43–68 AD) connected London The Roman Governor and London is town at Covent with the ports used in the invasion, and with of Britain (Ostorius abandoned Garden Westminster Timeline the earlier legionary bases at Colchester, Scapula) gives orders Lincoln, Wroxeter, Gloucester and Exeter. to build a permanent As Roman influence expanded, so did the base on the North network, until around 180 AD when the Bank of the Thames. known network was complete.

1928 1903 1876 1865 1863 1862

1928 Thames flood Westminster Parliament is Bazalgette’s sewer The first London The new The 1928 Thames flood was a is reconstructed system opened, leading Underground line Westminster disastrous flood of the River completed to the construction of opens between Bridge is opened Thames that affected much of Paddington and riverside London on 7 January Farringdon 1928. As a result 14 people died and thousands were made homeless.

1940 1947 1956 1965

Blitz Town and Country Planning Act Clean Air Act Westminster’s current boundary During the Blitz two million The Town and Country Planning Act The borough as we know it today was created with the houses (60% of these in 1947 came into effect on 1 July 1948, 1965 establishment of . Upon its creation, London) were destroyed which was the foundation of modern it inherited the city status previously held by the smaller resulting in redevelopment town and country planning in the UK. Metropolitan Borough of Westminster from 1900, which and the emergence of was first awarded to Westminster in 1540. council estates being built.

8 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS

960 1666 1735 1746 1814 1825 1828

Westminster Great Fire of London First Prime Minister First detailed map Lord’s Cricket Abbey first The Great Fire of 1666 in of London Ground opens layout complete opens to the founded destroyed four-fifths of the John Rocque created the public and more first detailed map of London. than 13,000 medieval, His 1746 map includes every Tudor and early-17th named court and alleyway. century buildings were lost. It shows a much smaller city, with areas like Bloomsbury and largely undeveloped.

1860 1851 1839 1838 1837 1834

Victoria Royal Parks construction Paddington Buckingham Parliament is station opens become public Trafalgar Square’s name Station opens Palace completed destroyed Victoria station opened Royal Parks become commemorates the Battle of due to fire by Victoria Station public parks with the Trafalgar, a British naval victory in and Railway. introduction of the the Napoleonic Wars with France . and Spain that took place on 21 October 1805 off the coast of Cape Trafalgar, Spain.

1970 2002 2003 2012 2019 2020 2021 2025 2028

Westway Golden Jubilee London London Ultra Low UK leaves Elizabeth Thames Heathrow Crossrail 2 opens Footbridge joining Congestion Olympic Emission Zone the Line due due to expansion due Embankment to Charge comes Games (ULEZ) comes European to open be completed to be completed Southbank opens into force into force Union

9 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS CONTENTS

Stretching just over eight square miles, Westminster is one of London’s largest central boroughs and one of only two to have city status. Much of Westminster is within the Central Activities Zone (CAZ) which is a designation set by the Mayor of London to guide planning policies.

We are home to many of the landmarks synonymous with ‘tourist London’. We have some of the most affluent residential areas in the country, but a diverse demographic means also some of the most deprived (see Figures 1 and 2). Ours is a densely populated city, with 118 people per hectare; almost double the London average of 57.1 This means that space is at a premium, so we must ensure its most effective use.

Figure 1: London Central Activities Zone 1 ONS, Mid year Population Estimates 2019

10 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS

Figure 2: Levels of deprivation in Westminster. Source: ONS Index of Multiple Deprivation 2019

11 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS CONTENTS

Mixed 6% White British and Irish 31% Other Ethnic Group 4%

Arab 9%

Other Black 1% Black Caribbean 2%

Black African 4%

Other Asian 5%

Chinese 2%

Bangladeshi 3% Pakistani 1% Indian 3% Other White 29%

Figure 3: Westminster’s ethnic mix. Source: GLA 2016-based ethnic group population projection

12 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS 90+ 952 628

85-89 1483 1217 Female Male 80-84 2358 1925

75-79 2913 2579

70-74 4056 3805

65-69 5001 4436

60-64 5775 5123

55-59 6652 6532

50-54 7752 8360

45-49 8010 9256

40-44 9011 10775

35-39 10786 14164

30-34 11944 14952

25-29 11156 12728

20-24 8453 9501

15-19 5857 6552

10-14 5821 6380

5-9 7259 7480

0-4 6613 7079

Figure 4: Age mix in Westminster. Source: City Intelligence, 2018

13 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS CONTENTS

The average mean household income in We have identified existing housing estates which Housing Westminster is £52,199, yet the median house are in need of renewal – Church Street, Ebury price was £1,054,400 in 2017. That’s nearly two Bridge and Tollgate. The renewal of these estates 121,000 households with 31% owner occupied, times higher than London as a whole, and almost will bring about much needed housing growth and 40% private rented, 26% social rented five times higher than that of the UK.2 There is high improvements to existing stock. Other housing and 3% other tenure contrast in income between different wards with an estates may be identified by us in future for renewal. Median property price average mean income of £62,074 in £1,054,400 and compared to £31,601 in Church The local housing market assessment5 has Street. Rental property prices now top the identified the need for 316 intermediate £3,000-a-month mark.3 Lack of intermediate homes and 247 social homes each year. housing stock means that less than 2% of homes City Plan 2019 – 2040 looks to support innovation are available for people who can’t afford to rent and delivery, with an emphasis that is people- Incomes on the open market but are ineligible for social focussed. It is essential that affordable doesn’t housing – creating a unique problem. mean inferior quality but enhances the quality Average household income: of life for those who live here. £55,897 This is an issue further compounded by a growing population. ONS Population Projections estimate There are 3,100 homes within the city declared that Westminster’s population will increase to as second homes with many more used as short 284,300 by 2040.4 term lets. It is estimated that 12% of the housing stock is empty. Population 261,000 including 51,500 children

Population increases to 1.1 million workers with the influx of workers, shoppers and tourists in the day time

2 Average Property Price, Land Registry 2017 3 Valuation Office Agency (VOA) data 4 Population projection for 2040, GLA (2016) 5 Westminster Housing Market Assessment, 2019

14 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS

Neighbourhood Planning is a key tool to ensuring Westminster’s unique historic environment is Heritage good growth within Westminster and the City Plan an irreplaceable resource, with an exceptional provides the framework for emerging neighbourhood concentration of heritage assets, one of the highest 11,000 listed buildings and structures plans to follow to deliver that growth for their areas. of any local authority in the country. These date including the Westminster World Heritage Site The council strongly supports and encourages from all eras and alongside more recent buildings, neighbourhood planning in Westminster, as help tell the story of Westminster’s continuing 56 conservation areas evidenced by almost all of the city being covered by growth and development. covering 78% of the designated neighbourhood areas. Within the majority city’s footprint of these areas, designated local neighbourhood We have more than 11,000 listed buildings and 23 Registered Historic Parks, forums have the power to make neighbourhood structures, with over 200 of them being Grade I including 5 Royal Parks plans. The council will engage with and advise these listed including , the National forums as their plans are prepared. The Knightsbridge Gallery, the and 10 Downing 85 London Squares Neighbourhood Plan was the first neighbourhood Street. , is another world plan to be formally made. renowned example of a historic building within 3 scheduled monuments Westminster that is highly symbolic and serves a Westminster is home to a number of internationally very important religious function attracting not renowned educational institutions such as King’s only local residents but visitors from afar. College London, London School of Economics and Political Sciences, University of Westminster, Perhaps the best known listed building is Imperial College London, University of the Arts and The – one of the most many others. They are a huge asset as they help to iconic and significant buildings in the world, boost local economies and with both national and which, alongside and international reputations they make Westminster an St Margaret’s Church, forms the Westminster attractive place to come and study. World Heritage Site, recognised by UNESCO as having Outstanding Universal Value.

15 CONTENTS Neighbourhood planning in Westminster (N.B. Queen’s planning in Neighbourhood 5: Park (N.B. Westminster is not a forum, neighbourhood Council) Figure but instead is Westminster’s only Community – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY CONTEXT 16

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS

This rich heritage contributes to the townscape Economy Employment by Sector and distinctiveness of different areas within the city but also brings many wider benefits including Highest economic output 42% Professional, business admin, finance being a major draw for tourists to the city and is of any local authority at one of the reasons why many businesses choose £53.6 billion per annum 11% Property services to locate here. Largest night time economy 6% Retail There are also 56 conservation areas, which cover in the UK, generating £3 billion 78% of our city, three scheduled monuments and per annum towards the UK’s many areas rich in archaeological potential as well as economic output 11% IT and communications 23 registered historic parks and gardens. 699,000 jobs 8% Arts, entertainment, recreation With such a special historic environment this is a critical factor in managing development and 10% Manufacturing, construction, utilities change in the city. Westminster’s built environment is constantly evolving with 6,283 planning applications processed in 2018; 1,791 of these 5% Accommodation, food services were for listed buildings.6 4% Public admin, education, health Our challenge goes beyond conserving our historical legacy, to one where we must find ways 3% Wholesale, transport, storage of developing which enhance it, retaining and integrating those buildings and features which contribute positively to Westminster’s sense of place into new development to allow the city to grow in a way which retains its distinctiveness.

6 Based on figures returned to MHCLG

17 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS CONTENTS

A vibrant and attractive city creates a vibrant Westminster is home to numerous uses and economy. Westminster’s commercial activity functions of national and international importance reverberates at a national level. The scale and including the seat of Government, cultural diversity of our 51,410 businesses is a key factor in institutions, higher education Institutions, sporting our sustained growth. From our large retailers on venues such as Lord’s Cricket Ground, and many Oxford Street to our many local street markets, research and medicine facilities. These help to Westminster has a range of commercial and boost the economy as workers, students, visitors shopping activities that helped contribute and tourists spend time in Westminster. Many of £66 billion in gross value added (GVA) in 2018;7 the buildings that feature these uses have great 15% of London’s total and 3.2% of that of the UK.8 historical value and contribute positively to local areas and the heritage of the city. Whilst professional, business and financial industries make up the largest sector, we’re also a Westminster is home to various unique areas and global hub for creative industries with 27% of all neighbourhoods each with distinctive townscape London’s jobs in music, performing arts and visual character and serving different functions and uses. arts based within the city. Westminster is home to Many of these areas are rich in history and more than 130 major cultural establishments such heritage assets and have widely recognised as and the . Many reputations making them unique. Savile Row for cultural activities and programmes also take place example is well known for its suit tailoring, while in Westminster such as the City of Sculpture Soho offers a mix of small independent shopping programme and ‘Fourth Plinth’ art Installations and a vibrant night life. at Trafalgar Square.

7 ONS, 2019 8 Economics, Current Issues Note 55: Examining GVA in London’s local authorities in a London and UK context, 1997-2015 (September 2017)

18 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS

Many famous attractions make Westminster a very Westminster 14% popular destination for tourists and visitors alike. Other 25 Boroughs The West End provides a vibrant night life shown City of London 10% by the huge economic output. There are nearly 48% 500 hotels, 56 theatres and 21 LGBTQI+ night time venues.9 Hotels are an integral part of the CAZ generating both direct and indirect spending in Camden 7% the local economy. There are a range of hotels in Westminster accommodating for different budgets – from well-known historic hotels such as the Ritz and the Savoy to the smaller local hotels. Tower Hamlets 6% The GLA estimates that between 2016–2041 there will be a need for approximately 75,000 additional office-based jobs in Westminster.10 Over the Plan period an increased demand for 5% other commercial spaces, including hotels, retail and leisure developments is also expected, Islington 4% meaning additional commercial floorspace of a range of types will be required. Hillingdon 4% Hounslow 3%

Figure 6: Proportion of London’s jobs within each borough 2015-1611

9 Cultural Infrastructure Map, Mayor of London 10 London Office Policy Review, 2017 11 Business Register and Employment Survey 2015 / 16

19 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS CONTENTS

Main Airport Links Population density puts pressure on every aspect of our infrastructure. A constant challenge is how Luton Heathrow Stansted Gatwick City our 1.1 million daytime population moves around the city. Increased capacity, more ‘joined-up travel’, greater efficiency and more sustainable transport options, as well as more choice is needed to meet 4 Terminal Train Station increasing demand.

Charing Cross Paddington Marylebone Victoria The structure of our city is also a major contributor to CO2 emissions. In the UK, buildings are responsible for around 40% of CO2 emissions. In Westminster that figure is more than double Elizabeth Line Stations at around 90%. This not only wastes energy but amplifies the urban heat island effect. The Mayor Paddington Tottenham Court Road of London’s target is to reduce emissions by 60% by 2025. This target informs everything we do as we strive towards being a Cleaner Air City. Regeneration of our waterways, canals and streets Canal Frontage to promote greener travel options and encourage walking and cycling is essential if we are to meet our ambitious carbon reduction targets.

Air quality isn’t the only pollution issue Westminster faces. We have a responsibility to 6.4km address all forms of pollution. Westminster receives the highest number of noise complaints in London. Light pollution wastes energy, detracts from the character of our conservation areas and can negatively impact on health.

20 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS

Westminster is home to many high-quality sporting Air Quality facilities and open green spaces with significant 3 passenger piers investment over the past decade. There are six swimming pools, 16 physical activity centres and 58 park-based sports facilities within the city.12 Exceedence over 26% Several regular sporting events take place in the WHO and EU Limits city including the London Marathon and the 32 underground stations Westminster Mile. Enabling residents to stay active is crucial to their health and well-being but it also contributes to the local economy and relieves Road Transport stress on the health service. Our green spaces, 64.9% 150 + bus routes of total particulates parks and the frontages not only provide recreational opportunities but contribute to the character and attractiveness of the city and provide access to nature. In particular, our five Royal Parks are a huge asset to the city and as 170 cycle hire docking stations designated tranquil spaces, they provide a welcome break from the urban environment.

The challenges we face are not insurmountable, in fact they afford us the great opportunity create a 350 km of highway sustainable city for all. Every action we undertake must enhance the lives of everyone who comes to our city, whether to live, work or visit.

City Plan 2019 – 2040 is a plan for people.

12 Active Westminster Strategy, 2018

21 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 OUR APPROACH FOR WESTMINSTER CONTENTS CONTENTS

OUR APPROACH FOR WESTMINSTER A vision for homes like the regeneration of the Grand Union Canal, A city where people choose to and development of the north bank of the Thames and communities will open up even more of the city to a new live or work because it’s enriching. generation. We want every resident to be within Westminster will be a city where people feel they a five minute walk of an open space, so they have A city that focuses on the needs belong to connected and thriving communities. the benefits of a healthier life on their doorstep.

of our community and beyond. Affordable housing is at the heart of our vision. Living in Westminster should afford residents Through smart design and innovation we will have the opportunity to live the best life possible. A city that will be sustainable created not just enough new homes to meet our for generations to come. housing targets, but more crucially to exceed the expectations of the people who live here. A vision for a healthier City Plan 2019 – 2040 brings By 2040, at least 35% of all new homes delivered and greener city will be affordable. But that’s just part of the story. together our vision for Westminster. We need not only to create affordable housing, Improvements in our air quality will improve but the right kind of housing. That means providing our quality of life. the size and type of homes that take into account our changing demographic and the diverse needs Climate change is changing the way we do things. of everyone who lives here. Design will prioritise sustainable construction materials, with energy-efficiency on an equal footing The golden standard is for people of all ages and all as aesthetic appeal. We will be a world leader abilities to feel safe, and have a sense of belonging in sustainable design. Specialist attention will and enjoyment. Being able to connect with other be given to retrofitting our historic buildings, people will forge communities, improve well-being, so they can take their place in the modern world. and make social isolation a thing of the past. Our city will be characterised not just by our We want people to feel connected to nature even stunning built environment, but also our natural though they live in the heart of the city. Initiatives environment. Soft landscaping which weaves

22 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 OUR APPROACH FOR WESTMINSTER CONTENTS

micro-habitats for wildlife into buildings and A vision for the right for leisure, because it will offer everything; spaces, whilst helping to mitigate the effects a place where people can shop, socialise and of CO2. By bringing nature into the city we inspire kind of growth be entertained. Our high streets will be vibrant active travel, as moving around the city becomes hubs of commercial activity, providing the kind a leisure activity in itself. The very best design, using the most innovative of experience that online retailing simply can’t technology will create the heritage of the future. compete with. The move away from petrol and diesel cars towards more energy efficient electric cars is going to be City Plan 2019 – 2040 sets out a blueprint for Soho is unique, and this plan will ensure it stays made easier by changes to our roads and more how Westminster will enter the next few decades that way. As an area in our ‘special clusters’ zone, electric vehicle charging points. Reduction in in a strong and competitive position. To do this we the focus will be on protecting its vibrant and traditional forms of traffic will improve our air need to be adaptable to change, but at the same cosmopolitan character that has made it such quality and considerably reduce our noise pollution. time conserve the character of a city with one a dynamic place to live, work and socialise. Multiple polluting delivery vehicles won’t be of the world’s most iconic skylines. clogging up our streets and pumping out fumes, Westminster is a powerhouse of business. Our because better, more convenient, options to Growth in the right kind of housing is a huge priority. offices showcase the very best in contemporary consolidate deliveries will exist. People want to live here; we need to create the design and we continue to attract the most dynamic conditions to make that happen. The most notable workforce. By 2040, our business landscape will By 2040 we will have regained our status as significant areas of housing growth will be seen in have grown to create some 63,000 new jobs. We’ll a ‘river city’, through a complete transformation the Victoria and Paddington Opportunity Areas as be setting the pace for changing working patterns of the public realm at the north side of the Thames. new thriving streets with new homes and new jobs with office space and super digital connectivity A transformation that will bring a whole new are created. The north west of the city will see allowing for more flexible working, giving people dimension to the area, without impacting on the economic regeneration and housing developments a better work-life balance, and so better lives. views of the iconic buildings around. in Church Street / Edgware Road and Ebury Bridge estates will bring a renewed vitality. A vitality that City Plan 2019 – 2040 will cement our reputation Over the course of the next 20 years Westminster’s will resonate throughout the city. as a place where people want to live, work and air quality will improve dramatically. contribute to our growth. An exciting, more creative approach to retail will It will feel like a healthier city because it will be offer residents and visitors alike a complete leisure a healthier city. experience. The West End will be the place to go

23 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 OBJECTIVES CONTENTS CONTENTS

OBJECTIVES

Increase the stock of high- These objectives all contribute to our commitment to improve 1 quality housing and provide the health and well-being of the city’s residents and workers and variety in terms of size, type to help ensure Westminster is a place we can be proud to hand to and tenure to meet need and our successors. The objectives also contribute to the delivery of promote mixed and inclusive three key themes in the council’s ambition to make Westminster a communities, with a clear City for All: homes and communities, a healthier and greener city, focus on affordability and and opportunities for growth. The success of the Plan will be family homes. monitored against these objectives.

Enhance connections by Improve quality of life, Improve air quality, minimise 5 improving options for cycling, 6 climate resilience and tackle 7 noise and other polluting walking, leisure, sport and play, environmental challenges impacts, and reduce carbon whilst prioritising pedestrians by protecting, enhancing, and water demands by and improving the interchange expanding our valuable network minimising detrimental between transport modes and of parks and open spaces. impacts from development. incorporating innovative solutions to manage the highway network.

24 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 OBJECTIVES CONTENTS

Enable job growth across a Enhance the West End Broaden the city’s cultural 2 range of sectors vital to the 3 as London’s primary retail, 4 offer, while managing the UK economy, and ensure leisure, and visitor destination, impacts of clusters of uses, those from disadvantaged and ensure our town centres and of the evening and night backgrounds benefit from the and high streets can adapt time economies on existing opportunities this presents. to the challenges they face. residential communities.

Promote quality in the design Making sure our Make the most of our 8 of buildings and public spaces, 9 neighbourhoods 10 unique heritage and ensuring that Westminster continue to thrive. historic environment, while is attractive and welcoming. encouraging innovations in building technology and improving a sense of place.

25 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 OBJECTIVES CONTENTS CONTENTS

HOMES AND COMMUNITIES

A city with community at its heart.

Westminster is one of London’s most densely populated boroughs, with growth set to rise year on year. With this challenge comes the opportunity to transform the lives of the people who live here. This plan is key to that transformation.

By 2040 we will have created enough new homes to exceed our target for affordable homes.

But we’re not just looking to build homes, we’re looking to build communities.

Communities where every consideration has been given to the people who live there. Safe communities that bring people together. Healthy communities with green open spaces within a five minute walk where people can feel a million miles away from the everyday pressures of city life.

Communities where people can truly enjoy where they live.

26 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 OBJECTIVES CONTENTS

A HEALTHIER AND GREENER CITY

A healthier and greener Westminster.

The greener Westminster of 2040 is already being built. It’s one where everything we plan, everything we design, everything we build makes our city a more carbon-neutral, healthier place to live. The policies we set out will help us to deliver exactly that.

It’s about those little changes that make a big difference; maximising soft landscaping, planting more trees, being OPPORTUNITIES less wasteful. It’s protecting our open spaces so people can enjoy healthier, more active leisure time. It’s making greener travel the best travel because it’s more efficient, FOR GROWTH more pleasant and costs less. It’s creating buildings that are more energy efficient, making them cheaper Nurturing growth in Westminster to run and more comfortable to be in. Growth is the lifeblood of any city. But growth is only possible It’s a city that’s greener. A city that’s when that city is a rewarding place to live, work or visit. Here we healthier. A city that’s better. set out how new developments will help us build on our rich heritage to create an environment where people can enjoy more fulfilling leisure time. Creating more open spaces, making the most of our waterways, and expanding our retail offering.

Ambitious projects to regenerate Victoria, Paddington and the north west of the borough will bring a new vitality.

To sustain successful economic growth, it’s not enough just to attract new businesses. We also have to nurture them.

27 CONTENTS SPATIAL STRATEGY

Building better futures

To respond to our growth we need to develop; the challenge is to maximise our limited space. The West End Retail and Leisure Special Policy Area will bring significant jobs growth through a range of commercial development, alongside affordable new homes. Transforming the public realm of the north bank of the Thames will create an exciting new buzz.

Opportunity Areas inspire the redevelopment of brownfield land to create new possibilities and deliver the homes and jobs growth the city needs, but always with an eye on what has gone before. Preserving our design, our character, our heritage is paramount. Special Policy Areas like Soho, Harley Street and Mayfair have enhanced protection, as each brings its own unique contribution to our economy. And to us.

This is a Spatial Strategy that looks beyond building a city to building futures. CONTENTS CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY A. Westminster’s strategy 1. spatial and inspire at the heart of London as a as ofLondon heart the at inspire and to grow, thrive continue will Westminster 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. by: City World

the city’s most distinct places. distinct most city’s the within ofuses clusters specialist the and accommodate that buildings the them, international and/or importance, national and enhancing uses ofProtecting home to residential neighbourhoods. global office centre,and attraction, visitor destination, leisure and retail a as Zone (CAZ) Activities Central the of functions competing the Balancing growth. of commercial otherjobs alongside forms office-based new 63,000 least at to provide space ofbusiness ofavariety adaptation and modernisation growth, the Supporting affordable. be 35% will least at which of 20,685 homes, least at Delivering architecture. ofmodern best the showcases that developments through including land, use of efficient most surroundings and make the their integrate that with developments new in high quality densities optimising intensification and Supporting

B. 10. 2. 1. the: through delivered be primarily will Growth 9. 8. 7. 6.

Prioritising sustainable travel. sustainable Prioritising redevelopment in identified Opportunity redevelopmentOpportunity in identified continued major mixed-use new alongside floorspace, homes; leisure and office, retail, in growth development to provide significant and mixed-use commercial-led with hierarchy centre town our and End, the West CAZ, the of intensification front destination. river Bank North ofanew delivery the supporting environment and public realm, including to naturalenhancements the of climate change, and securing Adapting to and mitigating the effects effects the mitigating to and Adapting and value. townscape settings), their (including assets heritage unrivalled and enhancing city’s the Protecting shop, and socialise. work, commercial areas to multifunctional Knightsbridge, to evolve as and End West the in importance ofinternational centres including streets, town centres and high Supporting is delivered to facilitate growth. to facilitate delivered is infrastructure supporting sufficient Ensuring

4. 3. alongside residential growth. residentialalongside growth. to increase job opportunities local of character, commercial and mixed-use areas of intensification commercial-led the Area including Development West Economic of North regeneration the and job opportunities; local 2,750 new homes increased alongside provide to collectively Areas Renewal Housing Estate Bridge Ebury and Road /Edgware Street ofChurch renewal Area; Opportunity Road and new 150 homes in Tottenham Court jobs new 3,000 and Area; Opportunity Victoria in homes new 1,000 and jobs new 4,000 Area; Opportunity Paddington in homes new 1,000 and jobs new of13,000 targets growth Plan London achieve to least at Areas SPATIAL STRATEGY

30

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS Key

Westminster Boundary Waterways Central Activities Zone International Centre 1 Opportunity Areas Major Centre A - Paddington District Centre B - Victoria C Strategic Cultural Areas: 1 - Tottenham Court Road C C1 - R1 (Westminster portion) C2 - Knightsbridge North West Economic R2 Development Area C3 - West End A INE Housing Renewal Areas World Heritage Site ETH L CR1 ZAB ELI C 1 - Church Street / R Major Rail Stations CR3 C3 Edgware Road CR2 (4 Terminal) Area (Hectares) 2 2 - Ebury Bridge Estate L R1 - Marylebone I R3 2,147 A West End Retail 3 2 R R2 - Paddington S and Leisure S R3 - O Special Policy Area 4 R C 5 R4 - Victoria D Royal Parks West End SE O CR Elizabeth Line Stations Partnership C2 P 1 - Regent's Park O CR1 - Paddington R 2 - Hyde Park P R4 CR2 - Bond Street 3 - Gardens B CR3 - Tottenham 4 - Court Road C1 5 - St. James's Park Neighbours 2 Brent

Camden Kensington City of London & Chelsea London Central Activity Zone Wandsworth

Figure 7: Key Diagram

31 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS CONTENTS

1.1 / Westminster’s growth will be managed to that are better integrated with the surrounding built The Central Activities Zone (CAZ) maximise benefits for residents, businesses, environment and that work effectively for existing 1.8 / The CAZ is designated through the London workers and visitors in accordance with the communities and future occupants. Plan, and includes more land in Westminster than principles of good growth established through the any other London borough. It provides a rich mix of London Plan. It should make the most efficient use of Housing commercial uses that contribute to central London’s land while protecting and respecting Westminster’s 1.5 / Like the rest of London, demand for new wide appeal but is also home to a substantial natural and built environment, including the Royal housing across all tenures in Westminster is residential population. As the heart of a world city, Parks, the Westminster World Heritage Site, our very high. The affordable housing target will ensure Westminster’s portion of the CAZ includes the conservation areas, listed buildings, and the urban that in addition to meeting the demands from the functions of monarchy and government, a variety heritage of the city more broadly. private housing market, delivery also meets of cultural, educational, professional and religious identified need in the affordable sector, and institutions, world-class retail, headquarters of 1.2 / Our Infrastructure Delivery Plan (IDP) sets out conforms with the Mayor’s strategic target of 50% national and international businesses, embassies, the key infrastructure needed to support growth. It affordable housing across all of London. leisure and entertainment. identifies key infrastructure projects, their location, timescale for delivery and funding sources. 1.6 / The policies in this plan encourage much 1.9 / The future growth and intensification of the more housing development of the right types, CAZ in a manner that balances its many competing Intensification and optimisation sizes and tenures, to meet the city’s needs. It functions is supported. This includes the protection 1.3 / Westminster is already very densely developed includes support for new types of housing rarely and intensification of office clusters, and a growth with highly valued open space and heritage worthy seen in Westminster, embraces innovative designs, and diversification in retail and leisure activity that of conservation. To deliver additional growth in the and is based on an expectation of higher densities respects residential amenity. Additional residential city, it will be necessary to intensify existing across the city. The Plan also enables the delivery development that does not compromise nearby urbanised areas. This includes optimising of large housing renewal projects such as at Church businesses’ continued commercial functions can opportunities for infill development and extensions Street / Edgware Road and the Ebury Bridge Estate. also positively contribute to the vibrancy and to existing buildings, up as well as out. This plan diversity of the area. encourages high quality, creative and contemporary Employment design solutions to deliver additional growth. 1.7 / Employment activity in Westminster is highly diverse, and of vital importance to the wider UK 1.4 / Developers will be encouraged to work together economy. To secure the right conditions for to bring forward coordinated proposals, including continued economic growth, the past trend of combining adjacent sites into larger development losing business space must be halted, and the opportunities. This approach is likely to offer greater growth of a range of spaces that meets the needs potential to increase the scale and of buildings of modern businesses supported. through exemplary design. It will encourage the most efficient use of scarce land, helping to create places

32 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

Uses of international and/or Specialist clusters of uses Heritage and townscape national importance 1.12 / Within some parts of Westminster, clusters of 1.15 / Westminster’s heritage and townscape value 1.10 / Central to London’s world-class capital city specialist uses exist that have a distinct character, reflects its rich history and importance as a leading status, Westminster is home to a variety of uses make a major contribution to London’s global world city. It includes the Palace of Westminster and and buildings that are of international and national appeal, and merit policy protection. These include: Westminster Abbey World Heritage Site, over 11,000 importance, and positively contribute to its unique listed buildings and structures, and conservation – Soho Special Policy Area: small scale mixed use appeal. This includes buildings and uses that host areas covering approximately 78% of the city. These including specialist retail, creative industries, the functions of government and the state, centres assets positively contribute to the city’s wide appeal cultural and entertainment uses. of excellence for higher education, research and to visitors, businesses, and residents. New medicine, world-famous arts and cultural institutions – Harley Street Special Policy Area: medical uses. development will therefore need to respond and other prestigious institutions, an international positively to this context through high quality design – Mayfair and St James’s Special Policy Area: sporting venue (Lord’s Cricket Ground), and major and architecture as the city continues to evolve. art galleries and luxury / niche retail. tourist attractions. Many of the buildings that host Heritage assets should be seen as an asset that these uses contribute to Westminster’s heritage, – Savile Row Special Policy Area: bespoke tailoring. positively shapes new developments and contributes and are vitally important to London and the UK’s to a sense of place, rather than a constraint. tourist industry. 1.13 / The West End, Millbank and Knightsbridge Strategic Cultural Areas also provide important 1.11 / A Restoration and Renewal Programme is clusters of uses. Within these areas cultural uses underway to protect and enhance the outstanding are afforded protection to retain the character and universal value of the Palace of Westminster. Over function of the area. the lifetime of the Plan, to safeguard the country’s democracy, development proposals to facilitate the Town centres and high streets temporary full decant of the and 1.14 / The evolution of town centres and high streets House of Commons will be necessary, and is will be supported to ensure they can respond to the supported in principle. The programme will enable challenges posed by online retailing and to make continuous parliamentary activities whilst certain that they remain vibrant hubs of commercial refurbishment is undertaken, and secure the historic activity which meet the needs of local legacy of one of the world’s most iconic buildings for neighbourhoods, workers and visitors. future generations. It will ensure that the Palace of Westminster is a resilient, sustainable and functional building that is more open and accessible, develops heritage skills, and strengthens the World Heritage Site’s appeal as a visitor destination.

33 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS CONTENTS

Natural environment, public realm, 1.17 / The River Thames is a strategic waterway at the and North Bank riverfront heart of London’s origin. It reflects the city’s history 2. Spatial Development and its worldwide position. The river is also one of the 1.16 / The quality of the public realm and green city’s largest spaces and has itself become a tourist Priorities: West End Retail and infrastructure network are vitally important to the attraction. The North Bank is home to some of continued growth and success of Westminster, as Leisure Special Policy Area and Westminster’s more distinctive buildings and acknowledged through a number of council institutions and is also an incomparable platform from Tottenham Court Road strategies1. It includes the city’s streets, the Royal where other London landmarks can be observed. It Parks, canals and waterways, and London Opportunity Area therefore provides a significant opportunity to create Squares. Together these provide opportunities for The intensification of the West End Retail a new destination that reconnects the buzz of the city rest and relaxation, the setting to the city’s iconic and Leisure Special Policy Area (WERLSPA) with its water boundary, where people meet, relax architecture, enable the safe movement of people, over the Plan period will deliver the and play while activating public life and contributing and help address climate change. High quality following priorities: to the city’s success. Improvements to the public streets, parks and spaces can and should realm, alongside uses that promote the cultural and A. Significant jobs growth through a range encourage, facilitate and enable physical activity commercial character of the area and help activate commercial-led development including by default and well-designed spaces should be the riverfront are therefore supported in principle retail, leisure, offices and hotel use. flexible and support a range of physical activity, – to help realise this ambition. Additional commercial floorspace will be leisure and sport. Enhancing these areas over the provided in a manner that respects its lifetime of the Plan will help achieve a more Infrastructure setting, through: pleasant walkable environment and better air quality - to the benefit of residents, workers and 1.18 / New development will be supported by 1. Increased scale and massing in visitors. A shift towards more sustainable travel investment in supporting infrastructure. This will Tottenham Court Road Opportunity patterns that makes the most of central London’s include physical infrastructure such as the Area, to at least achieve London Plan extensive public transport network will also be transport network, and social and community uses targets of 3,000 new jobs and 150 new necessary to make efficient use of scarce land that help support good growth. We will combine homes, and; and accommodate the levels of commercial and developer contributions, secured through residential growth the city needs. the Community Infrastructure Levy and Section 2. The sensitive refurbishment and 106 planning obligations, with council resources extension, or replacement of existing and other public funding streams such as grants, buildings across the WERLSPA. in order to maximise delivery of the objectives set out in this plan. B. An improved retail and leisure experience that responds to innovation and change in 1 Including the ActiveWestminster Strategy 2018-2022, A Partnership Approach to Open Spaces and Biodiversity in the sector, including the transformation of Westminster (2019), the Westminster Walking Strategy the Oxford Street District. 2017-2027, and the Westminster Cycling Strategy (2014)

34 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

and other world-renowned retail and leisure Tottenham Court Road Opportunity Area C. A diverse evening and night-time economy destinations including , Soho, and 2.5 / The area around Tottenham Court Road and enhanced cultural offer. Theatreland. It also contains some of London’s most station, which includes land both in Westminster and recognised tourist attractions and public spaces Camden, has been identified as an Opportunity D. A more co-ordinated approach to such as Circus, , Area in the London Plan. This is in recognition of the managing the area’s freight, servicing, Trafalgar Square, and parts of the River Thames. significant capacity for high quality new and delivery demands. The quality of the built environment, with a high development that delivers new jobs and homes and concentration of listed buildings and heritage an enhanced public realm, alongside transport E. An enhanced pedestrian environment, assets, positively contribute to a unique setting. improvements associated with the Elizabeth Line. public realm (including along the North The London Plan sets out indicative growth targets Bank), and network of public transport 2.3 / The current mix of attractions and workplaces of 6,000 additional jobs and 300 new homes over infrastructure. already result in intense activity across the area. the period 2016-2041 for the entire Tottenham Court This is set to increase as the introduction of the Road Opportunity Area – including land in both F. Protection of the unique character of Elizabeth Line brings a projected further 1.5 million Westminster and Camden. As one of London’s more central London’s distinct and iconic places people within 45 minutes reach of central London.3 mature Opportunity Areas, and given the progress and heritage assets. While new development is welcomed, it must be already made on upgrading the station environs, a managed in a way that respects and enhances the substantial contribution towards these growth character of some of London’s most distinct and 2.1 / The West End is a showcase for London on targets has already been made. At least 50% of the recognisable places and heritage assets. This the international stage, attracting visitors from overall London Plan target will be achieved within includes protecting the character and function of around the world. It provides one of the largest Westminster (including what has been permitted or areas with clusters of specific uses that have been and most diverse concentrations of jobs anywhere built since 2016). Over the Plan period, we will identified as Special Policy Areas (SPAs), and the in the UK. The nature of commercial activity that continue to facilitate the further intensification of this wider quality of the built environment. takes place in the West End is vital to the UK area in accordance with the principles of good economy – generating more gross value added growth - including through the development of 2.4 / Historically the area was designated as the (GVA) than the City of London.2 Crossrail 2 safeguarded sites either alongside or West End Retail Special Policy Area, which after necessary infrastructure works. Delivery of our covered a smaller area of the West End 2.2 / The area contains some of London’s most contribution towards the indicative targets set out in International Centre, Soho, and Covent Garden. iconic shopping and leisure districts, alongside its the London Plan will be documented through future This has now been expanded to better reflect the role as a global office centre. It is home to Oxford Authority Monitoring Reports. mixed-use nature of the wider area, and Street, Regent Street, Bond Street, (which alongside interdependence of uses that is much more Knightsbridge, as International Shopping Centres, diverse and varied than simply retail. sit at the top of London’s town centre hierarchy),

2 West End Good Growth, Arup, 2018 3 crossrail.co.uk/news/crossrail-in-numbers

35 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY WERLSPA and Tottenham Court Road Opportunity Area Opportunity Road Court Tottenham and Figure 8: WERLSPA SPATIAL STRATEGY 36

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

Commercial-led development – Enhances the West End’s position as a globally Evening and night-time competitive retail destination; economy and cultural offer 2.6 / Identified growth within the WERLSPA will be commercially led and will require the delivery of – Secures a diverse range of office space that 2.9 / The West End is home to the largest additional floorspace alongside the intensification supports increased employment opportunities evening and night-time economy in the UK. of existing space. Growth will be achieved through in growth sectors and takes full advantage of It has a wealth of cultural uses, pubs, bars, new developments with increased scale and the opportunities the Elizabeth Line (and restaurants, nightclubs, cinemas, theatres and massing that respect local context, including within Crossrail 2) bring; other leisure uses. To ensure the area is Tottenham Court Road Opportunity Area, along welcoming and attractive to all communities, – Protects and supports the arts, culture and Oxford Street, and the area’s key thoroughfares. the appropriate management and further entertainment offer for residents, workers, Replacement buildings will be focused in areas of diversification of the evening and night-time and visitors; lower townscape value, whilst in areas of higher economy will be supported. This will be done townscape value, sensitive refurbishment and – Supports the visitor economy, including through through enhancements to its cultural offer, extension of existing buildings can also support the upgrading of hotel stock; hosting of events and art installations such growth. The majority of commercial growth is as Lumiere London, and late-night shopping. – Diversifies the food and beverage offer to anticipated to come through windfall development, complement the retail environment; and as has historically been the case in Westminster. 2.10 / This activity will help ensure the evening – Minimises negative impacts on residential and night-time economy is not dominated by the Good growth neighbourhoods. consumption of alcohol, which can lead to issues of anti-social behaviour and deter those who do 2.7 / The WERLSPA is anticipated to absorb Oxford Street not drink from visiting central London outside of much of Westminster’s future commercial growth the daytime. Enhancing the cultural offer will – reflecting its unique status, size, and wide 2.8 / Growth in retail and leisure floorspace will include support for new venues, ancillary uses appeal. Scenario testing for the West End4 has ensure the West End responds to change in the that enable existing ones to thrive (e.g. cafés projected potential for an uplift of 124,000 jobs sector and its status and reputation is enhanced. within museums or theatres), and investment in across the entire West End (including parts of This will include the transformation of Oxford Street to the public realm around existing clusters such London Borough of Camden) to the period 2041, ensure a more diverse and interesting mix of uses and as that proposed at the Strand / . through a range of commercial development better quality public realm that prioritises pedestrians, including retail, food and drink uses, hotels, arts, enhances the shopper experience, and makes it a culture and entertainment and offices. Investment more attractive place to visit and enjoy. Along with an in all of these sectors will be necessary to improved public realm, the built form of Oxford Street achieve good growth that: offers scope for increased height to deliver a range of commercial floorspace that complements the retail offer and provides modern workspace - reinforcing its role as a key commercial centre. 4 West End Good Growth, Arup, 2018

37 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS CONTENTS

Freight and servicing F. Upgraded healthcare facilities. 2.11 / The nature and intensity of activity in the West 3. Spatial Development End generates significant freight and servicing Priorities: Paddington G. Enhanced job opportunities and community requirements. This causes congestion and pollution, facilities for the residents of Paddington and and makes the area less attractive to walk and cycle. Opportunity Area the neighbouring areas of Church Street and We will work with landowners and businesses to Development in the Paddington Opportunity the NWEDA. support the better coordination of freight and servicing Area will deliver the following priorities: in order to minimise unnecessary vehicular trips. This A. The achievement of the growth targets for will be done alongside interventions that secure a the area of at least 1,000 new homes and 3.1 / While a significant amount of growth has more pleasant environment that incentivises walking, 13,000 additional jobs identified in the already happened in Paddington, the area remains cycling and use of public transport. This will include London Plan. one of the city’s most significant opportunities for investment in the public realm to help green the area large-scale regeneration thanks to the presence as part of the Wild West End programme,5 improved B. New workspace through an expanded of under-utilised brownfield sites and the expansion wayfinding, and investment in public transport range of offices, light industrial units and of the Paddington Station transport node with the interchanges by TfL and Network Rail. As set out in the workshops with particular support for arrival of the Elizabeth line. We want to ensure the spatial strategy, investment in the public realm along flexible workspaces. area continues to develop as a successful place and the North Bank is also a key priority for the area. destination that is welcoming and accessible to all C. Inclusive and high-quality public realm and can help bring together existing and emerging Partnership working that enhances sense of place and communities. We will continue our commitment to 2.12 / The rich mix of historic buildings, uses encourages dwelling. working in partnership with local stakeholders to and level of activity in the West End results in a develop a Place Plan for Paddington to deliver our complex number of issues and challenges which D. Enhanced sustainable travel modes shared ambitions for the area. cannot be met through land-use planning alone. through improvements to transport We will therefore continue to work within the interchanges and the pedestrian and Paddington Station West End Partnership6 and with other stakeholders cyclist environment, including public 3.2 / Paddington Station is Westminster’s major to achieve the shared objectives of enhancing access to the canal waterfront. transport node. A Grade I listed building contributing and maintaining its global reputation, improving to London’s distinctiveness, the station is one of the the retail and leisure offer and pedestrian E. Reduced severance from surrounding areas key arrival points into central London. It has a environment, and make visiting the area a including Church Street, Edgware Road number of railway services that link London to the more pleasurable experience. station, the North West Economic west of the country and four London underground Development Area (NWEDA) and Praed lines, with the new Elizabeth line also coming to Street town centre. 5 wildwestend.london serve the station in the near future. The station 6 westendpartnership.london provides connection to the expanding Heathrow

38 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

Airport and to growth areas to the west of the city 3.5 / The excellent public transport connections 3.7 / Paddington is not just an office location. including the Old Oak and Park Royal Opportunity in the area provide opportunities for building at To ensure development contributes to making Area. With increased numbers of passengers higher density while maintaining a focus on liveable an inclusive, sustainable neighbourhood and to arising from residential and commercial growth and public spaces and high-quality housing. The arrival strengthening the area’s offer as a destination, expanded transport network capacity, it is of the Elizabeth line to the area will help increase a mix of other commercial and community uses important that Paddington Station continues to be Paddington’s connection to other parts of London will also be supported. sensitively adapted to accommodate the higher and the wider region and enable further growth volumes of traffic and ensure a seamless integration in the area. In addition to its excellent links, Development sites between different transport nodes. Paddington’s location within the CAZ has enabled 3.8 / A number of identified development sites this area to achieve significant office gains in the within the area have the potential to contribute 3.3 / Significant changes in pedestrian flows and last two decades. It is now – together with Victoria significantly to the delivery of the policy priorities. routes are expected in connection to different – home to most of Westminster’s larger office St. Mary’s Hospital is one of the largest hospitals in phases of station improvement works and major spaces, but there is scope for further office Central London. The site presents an opportunity to redevelopment projects in the area around the provision and for widening the range of re-provide improved health facilities, alongside station (including Crossrail and Paddington workspaces. This will encourage new types of meeting the other priorities in the Paddington Square) will require different solutions to enable business and align with evolving trends in office Opportunity Area and wider City Plan objectives. the operations of the transport hub and the styles and flexible work patterns, create more success of its neighbourhood. This is key to job opportunities and act as a catalyst for further 3.9 / The Travis Perkins site to the north of the ensure the area is accessible and can be easily commercial growth beyond the Opportunity Area Paddington Basin is occupied by an industrial use navigated, which in turn will enable growth and boundary through to Edgware Road. which supports the strategic function of the CAZ. help encourage sustainable modes of travel, The site presents a significant opportunity for including active mobility. 3.6 / We welcome proposals for all types of change to deliver the priorities of the area. We will workspace across the Opportunity Area from large support proposals of high-quality design that can Homes and jobs growth floorplates to flexible space. There are particular enhance the public realm and create permeability, opportunities to accommodate workshops and light including public access to the canal. 3.4 / The London Plan has identified capacity for industrial units, on canal-side locations and under further high-density development in this area and the Westway such as is seen at Great Western sets out indicative growth targets of at least 13,000 Studios in the nearby NWEDA. Meanwhile uses additional jobs and 1,000 new homes over the are also supported in these locations to encourage period 2016-2041 for the Paddington Opportunity and support proposals from small businesses and Area. Over the Plan period, we will continue to start-ups and to prevent long-term vacancy. facilitate the further intensification of this area.

39 CONTENTS Paddington Opportunity Area Paddington 9: Opportunity Figure CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY SPATIAL STRATEGY 40

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

Connections and public realm H. Enhanced routes and connections between 3.10 / The Grand Union Canal and the Paddington 4. Spatial Development Priorities: visitor attractions. Basin are already strong assets to the area Victoria Opportunity Area providing a sense of place. There are opportunities Development in the Victoria Opportunity I. The safeguarding and enhancement of to further improve these waterside places in ways Area will deliver the following priorities: heritage assets, particularly Westminster’s that encourage walking and cycling for pleasure World Heritage Site. and as an alternative last-mile connection to the A. The achievement of the growth targets for the Paddington public transport hub. An improved canal area of at least 1,000 new homes and 4,000 side environment will also strengthen links with additional jobs identified in the London Plan. 4.1 / Victoria faces unique pressures and challenges other areas to the north west of Paddington along given its unique position as a busy transport hub, the course of the canal. An improved public realm B. Additional and enhanced social and hotspot for businesses and government functions, will help ease congestion linked with the volume of community facilities. place of tourism and leisure, and home to a growing pedestrians using the station and provide residential population. We want to encourage accessible, welcoming spaces for people to rest C. Improved integration between public growth in this Opportunity Area alongside and enjoy the area. transport modes. improvements to public transport, accessibility and the public realm to enable the area to thrive and 3.11 / Across the Opportunity Area developments D. Inclusive and high-quality public realm grow its reputation as an attractive destination. We should contribute to improving permeability and that enhances sense of place and will continue our commitment to working with local legibility to create intuitive routes, public space encourages dwelling. stakeholders to develop a Place Plan for Victoria to and townscape improvements that support deliver our shared ambitions for the area. pedestrian and cycle movement throughout the E. Enhanced sustainable travel modes area. Developments should aim to minimise through improvements to the public realm Home and jobs growth severance and strengthen links with the and local environmental quality to neighbouring areas of Church Street, Edgware strengthen the area’s capacity, legibility 4.2 / The well-connected nature of the area means Road, the NWEDA and Praed Street. and permeability, particularly for that it has the potential to accommodate higher pedestrians and cyclists. residential and office density, particularly where it contributes to achieving the other objectives of the F. Support for the relocation of Victoria Opportunity Area. Parts of the Victoria Opportunity Coach Station. Area fall between conservation areas, providing greater scope for change. G. The safeguarding of sites for Crossrail 2.

41 CONTENTS Victoria Opportunity Area Opportunity Victoria 10: Figure CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY SPATIAL STRATEGY 42

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

4.3 / The London Plan sets out indicative growth Townscape and heritage assets physical obstacles to movement. The dominance targets of 4,000 additional jobs between 2016 of roads over pedestrian desire lines force people 4.6 / The area contains a significant number of and 2041 and 1,000 new homes over the period to undertake confusing and counter-intuitive larger and taller buildings which are primarily 2019-2041 for the Victoria Opportunity Area and journeys. The area also lacks a coherent sense located along the key routes of Buckingham identifies Victoria Station and its environs, of place and of urban quality. Visual clutter and Palace Road, Bridge Road and Victoria including the airspace above its tracks and the absence of key landmarks add to this. Street. Victoria is also home to a significant approaches, to have significant potential for number of heritage assets, including the Grade II mixed-use intensification. Over the Plan period, 4.9 / The Department for Transport has made a Listed station, Grade I listed Westminster we will continue to facilitate the further safeguarding direction for Crossrail 2 and we will Cathedral and is in close proximity to the Royal intensification of the Opportunity Area according support the project in safeguarding sites. Should Parks, the Thames and the Westminster World to the principles of sustainable development. this project be realised it will result in an even Heritage Site. Development in the Opportunity busier transport interchange and provide a further Area will need to be sensitive to these assets 4.4 / Victoria Street is dominated by commercial catalyst for change. Crossrail 2 presents an and their settings, and contribute to their activity at ground floor, with office entrances, opportunity to re-imagine the station and the enhancement where possible. shops, restaurants and theatres adding to the surrounding area to deliver a modern transport vitality of this area. A mix of uses on development interchange that can support increased future The Victoria Transport Interchange sites in this area including active frontages at operation, improve access to transport, movement ground floor level is encouraged unless this would 4.7 / Victoria is one of the best-connected areas in the area and enhance the public realm. As part compromise movement in and around the Victoria in the country both in terms of public transport and of this and because the coach station operations Transport Interchange, or access and operational the road network. Movement is therefore one of have grown beyond the capacity of the building requirements for existing activities. the area’s main activities and a defining feature of and its location, we support the potential future the south western extent of the Opportunity Area. relocation of the coach station, which is among the Social and community uses and open spaces The Victoria Transport Interchange comprises safeguarded sites for Crossrail 2. This may be to underground and a mainline railway station outside of Westminster. 4.5 / With local population numbers expected to providing direct links with Gatwick Airport and rise through densification of the housing stock, connecting central London with the wider south it is essential that housing delivery is supported east, and a busy bus terminus and coach station. by adequate provision of social and community facilities including libraries, facilities for children and 4.8 / Victoria is undeniably a congested area. young people, and sports and leisure facilities. This Currently there is insufficient capacity to will be achieved through new facilities as well as accommodate pedestrians using the interchange improvements to and re-provision of existing stock. which can result in conflicts between pedestrians and vehicular traffic. Existing developments sometimes contribute to this issue, presenting

43 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS CONTENTS

Development sites 4.12 / The railway tracks and the busy Buckingham Palace Road are barriers, hindering pedestrian 4.10 / Victoria Station represents a key opportunity 5. Spatial Development movement east to west and vice-versa, particularly to deliver our priorities for the area, including an for the residential areas of Pimlico and Belgravia. Priorities: North West Economic improved transport provision, modal integration, Improved connectivity throughout the area could public realm and local environmental quality, and Development Area be achieved by strengthening the area’s links with act as a catalyst for further development. The Regeneration of the North West Economic neighbouring sites and visitor attractions, including presence of other identified development sites Development Area (NWEDA) over the Plan and the World Heritage Site within the station’s environs, provides scope to period will deliver the following priorities: and other significant heritage assets such as the ensure a coordinated approach to development is Royal Parks and the Thames. A. Increased job opportunities, particularly for taken to integrate sites together and deliver local residents. This will include the successful places designed around people. This 4.13 / Traffic domination and poor air quality protection of existing employment will support the creation of a network of high are key challenges that need to be addressed in floorspace, and the provision of additional quality and welcoming places, which will order to improve the quality of public space and employment and commercial floorspace, in contribute to a stronger identity for the area. enable active travel and easier movement particular that which is suitable for small and throughout the area. We welcome interventions medium enterprises (SMEs) and / or helps Improving public space and connections that can help improve the pedestrian and cyclist diversify the local economy. 4.11 / Developing the potential of Victoria and environment and priority on Victoria Street and particularly its role as an integrated transport hub is Parliament Square, as well as enhanced B. New residential and mixed-use developments largely dependent on managing the high levels of connections between the two areas. that improve housing quality and help pedestrian and vehicular traffic to ease movement diversify the area’s tenure mix. in and around the area. This will be achieved by 4.14 / Provision of green infrastructure as sensibly improving the public realm to make it well as permanent and temporary landscaping C. A greener and more walkable environment easy to navigate through enhanced wayfinding. interventions (e.g. on cleared sites awaiting that addresses issues of severance caused Improved and new public spaces should be redevelopment) can help soften the streetscape by the railway, canal, Harrow Road and the inclusive, pleasant, and safe to encourage and contribute to improved air and environmental Westway, and creates opportunities for the residents, visitors and commuters to enjoy and relax quality and enhanced sense of place. Christchurch extension of, and greater use of, the Grand in the area. Active frontages can also contribute to Gardens represents one such opportunity to Union Canal towpath. interest and visual entertainment which can improve existing green space, and provide a support a sense of place and aid legibility. quieter space away from the buzz of the main D. Enhancements to Harrow Road District street where workers, residents and visitors can Centre to provide a greater range of activity rest and interact. Improvements to the character, and a more attractive physical environment. appearance and safety of Westminster Cathedral Piazza will also be encouraged.

44 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

boat offices – distinct from the employment offer interventions that help encourage walking, cycling E. The provision of new and improved social elsewhere. Land under the A40 Westway also and use of public transport. We will work with TfL and community infrastructure that meets offers potential for additional enterprise space. and the Canal & River Trust to facilitate the the needs of the local community. Multi-purpose spaces that provide opportunities Paddington to West Drayton Quietway. for community use, such as at Paddington Arts, will be welcomed, as will meanwhile use of space 5.5 / Redevelopment in the Woodfield Road 5.1 / The NWEDA has long contained some of in advance of redevelopment proposals. New area represents an opportunity to improve the Westminster’s most deprived areas, with lower commercial development in Harrow Road District pedestrian environment in this part of the NWEDA levels of qualifications, earnings and health, and Centre for town centre uses can help sustain its and to address the issues of severance identified higher levels of worklessness, than elsewhere in long-term vitality and viability and provide above. Developments in the NWEDA will deliver a the city. It is an area requiring coordinated employment opportunities. mix of uses including housing, will help to improve intervention to tackle persistent levels of inequality. pedestrian permeability and provide better Efforts through this plan will include providing for Open space and connectivity connections both within and beyond the NWEDA. improved opportunities within the area itself, but These opportunities will be further explored in the 5.3 / The area is deficient in publicly accessible also ensuring residents benefit from the Harrow Road Place Plan. open space. Severance from the Grand Union opportunities offered by development in more Canal, A40 Westway, and railway lines, all currently central parts of Westminster. The boundary of the Retail limit access to existing open spaces within the area area has been amended from the previous adopted and beyond. New development should therefore 5.6 / Harrow Road District Centre provides the main City Plan to exclude Paddington Opportunity Area seek to green the area, by providing new publicly cluster of shops and other town centre uses within – to reflect the different nature of development accessible open spaces wherever possible, such as the area. It is important that this continues to provide expected in both areas. that being provided at Walterdon and Elgin for local residents’ shopping and servicing needs Community Homes Gardens. alongside Maida Hill Market, but also that it adapts Commercial growth to the challenges traditional high streets face. 5.2 / Much of the NWEDA is primarily residential, 5.4 / Development in the area represents an with a high proportion of social rented affordable opportunity to increase activity along the Grand housing. It also contains some commercial areas. Union Canal. The canal is a significant The Woodfield Road area is home to a variety of underutilised asset that offers opportunities businesses and offers opportunities for to provide an attractive walking and cycling intensification that can deliver new job environment – both to job opportunities in nearby opportunities alongside additional high-quality Paddington, the Kensal area and Old Oak homes. Building on the success of Great Western Common, and to high quality open space at Studios nearby, there is scope to grow the local Regent’s Park. Bids are being made to TfL’s offer for creative, start-up, and grow-on business Liveable Neighbourhoods Programme to fund space including workshops, studios and canal

45 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY North West Economic Development North Area 11: Figure SPATIAL STRATEGY 46

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

5.7 / The findings of the Westminster Town Centre Health Check 2018 identified poor quality public 6. Spatial Development Priorities: G. Enhancements to Church Street / Edgware realm, lack of active shop fronts, and the presence Road District Centre, including improved of some low-quality retail and uses such as hot food Church Street / Edgware Road facilities for Church Street Market. takeaways and betting shops. Greater diversity and Ebury Bridge Estate Housing within the centre, including the growth of the EBURY BRIDGE ESTATE HOUSING evening and night-time economy, hotels, and spaces Renewal Areas RENEWAL AREA for small businesses with active frontages (including CHURCH STREET / EDGWARE ROAD The renewal of the Ebury Bridge estate will meanwhile uses) will therefore be supported, HOUSING RENEWAL AREA deliver the following priorities: alongside investment in the public realm to improve Redevelopment of the Church Street / Edgware its physical appearance. To secure its long-term H. Approximately 750 new high-quality homes. Road Housing Renewal Area over the Plan sustainability, it is envisaged that the retail core of period will deliver the following priorities: the centre will remain close to Maida Hill Market, I. Enhanced connections to the wider with a more diverse mix of uses supported on the A. At least 2,000 high quality new area through improved public realm and periphery of the centre. Recent investments to homes, in accordance with the Church green infrastructure. improve Maida Hill junction will help enhance the Street Masterplan. centre by securing a safer, more welcoming J. Innovative and high-quality design to environment for pedestrians and cyclists. B. At least 350 new jobs and linking further ensure the most efficient use of land. Opportunities to reduce severance to the District employment opportunities in the CAZ to Centre so it more conveniently serves a wider the local community. K. Improvements to the Ebury Bridge Local catchment area will also be sought. This could Centre in the form of new retail include additional or more inviting canal crossings C. Community facilities, including a new accommodation and community facilities. and road underpasses. Proposals for the centre will health and well-being hub. be set out in a forthcoming Harrow Road Place Plan. D. New green infrastructure and public realm Social and community infrastructure improvements, including a north-south green route or ‘green spine’. 5.8 / New social and community infrastructure in the area will be important to support sustainable E. Improved mobility through infrastructure growth, meet the needs of local communities, improvements to support active travel. and provide opportunities for them to mix. Development will therefore be supported by F. Innovative and high-quality design to investment in the improved education, health ensure the most efficient use of land, and leisure facilities necessary to support growth. including tall buildings.

47 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY Figure Road 12: Housing Renewal Church Street/Edgware Area SPATIAL STRATEGY 48

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

Church Street / Edgware Road 6.4 / Opportunities to enable further connectivity Retail Housing Renewal Area between the Church Street / Edgware Road 6.7 / The redevelopment of the area also presents Housing Renewal Area, the Paddington Opportunity 6.1 / The redevelopment of the Church Street / an opportunity to enhance the Church Street / Area and the rest of the CAZ should be supported Edgware Road Housing Renewal Area is a key Edgware Road District Centre. This will continue through redevelopment. priority for us. We have worked closely with the to be an important hub for the local community, local community to produce an ambitious providing access to retail and community facilities, Open space and connectivity masterplan, which will be delivered over the City including a new health and well-being hub. The Plan period. The Church Street Masterplan creates 6.5 / Church Street / Edgware Road lies within an centre will also provide opportunities for skills, a framework for development in the area and is a area of open space deficiency. The redesign of training, business support and other initiatives material consideration for any planning applications. public realm and the introduction of a ‘green spine’ to broaden possibilities for local residents. There north-south route across the area represents an will also be improved facilities for Church Street 6.2 / At least 2,000 new homes will be delivered opportunity to improve both mobility and access Market, including a new layout, higher quality public in the Church Street / Edgware Road Housing to open space. The Church Street Masterplan realm, and parking and storage facilities for traders. Renewal Area over the next 15-20 years. Sites envisages an increase of up to 40% in publicly The existing antiques markets are an important in the area will make efficient use of land through accessible open space in the area. Public realm source of local employment and are an important densification, incorporating innovative and and environmental improvements to increase feature of Church Street’s identity. The masterplan high-quality design, including the development walking and cycling and to enhance accessibility, envisages a new cultural quarter centred around of higher buildings where these will deliver high connectivity, safety and comfort, will improve these and the adjacent Cockpit Theatre. quality homes that meet local needs. mobility and active travel across the area, including the introduction of 20mph traffic calming zones. Ebury Bridge Estate Housing Renewal Area 6.3 / Alongside the delivery of new homes, the 6.8 / The Ebury Bridge Estate is situated between regeneration of Church Street / Edgware Road 6.6 / Development proposals will be encouraged Victoria Station and the Thames, bounded by the will create at least 350 new jobs in the local area, to make the most of the area’s potential, railway line to the east and Ebury Bridge Road to as well as supporting around 3,500 jobs during maximising opportunities to improve connectivity the west. It comprises 13 blocks and 336 existing the construction phase. The area is within easy through the implementation of the objectives of homes. In 2010 Ebury Bridge Estate was reach of transport hubs at Edgware Road Station the Westminster Walking Strategy. Pedestrians will highlighted as a strategic opportunity in our and Marylebone Station, and the potential these be prioritised in public realm developments to link Housing Renewal Strategy. The site has the links have to attract businesses and create a new and Edgware Road. Improvements potential to create a significant uplift in the destination for workspace has not yet been fully to wayfinding and streetscape along Marylebone number of homes, contributing to meeting realised. Opportunities to link further job growth in Road will help to strengthen connections between strategic housing need, but it will also deliver Westminster, particularly in the CAZ, to the local the area and Regent’s Park. Enhancements to the wider benefits for the community, made possible community in Church Street / Edgware Road is a Regent’s Park canal towpath will also contribute by the large-scale nature of the estate renewal. priority for us and will be explored and secured to improvements in east-west connectivity. using planning powers where appropriate.

49 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY Ebury Bridge Estate Housing Renewal Area Renewal Housing Estate Bridge Figure 13: Ebury SPATIAL STRATEGY 50

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

6.9 / The renewal of the estate over the Plan 7.1 / Westminster is already densely developed. period represents an opportunity to improve 7. Managing development for As the city grows, detrimental impacts on quality of life for existing residents by upgrading existing users of the area must be avoided. the ageing housing stock, addressing Westminster’s people It is imperative that design solutions are found overcrowding and providing improved public Development will be neighbourly by: to avoid negative impacts associated with further realm, which will deliver walking links to the growth. By adopting the principle of neighbourly A. Protecting and where appropriate surrounding areas including Victoria Opportunity development, we expect development to make a enhancing amenity, by preventing Area, the nearby Chelsea Barracks site and positive contribution to the quality and function of unacceptable impacts in terms of daylight Belgravia. The long-term regeneration of the the local area. We will take a balanced approach and sunlight, sense of enclosure, estate will allow for the phasing of new buildings, that considers the specific location and context as overshadowing, privacy and overlooking. and the introduction of meanwhile uses on-site, well as the merits of each proposal including the ensuring the continued presence of community wider benefits a scheme can deliver, against B. Protecting and where appropriate facilities and local convenience retail whilst the impacts on the surrounding area. enhancing local environmental quality. estate is redeveloped. 7.2 / The principles of neighbourly development C. Protecting and positively responding contained in this policy apply to all applications. to local character and the historic Opportunities to enhance the quality of the local environment. area might differ for developments depending on scale and typology, and we may therefore apply D. Not overburdening the capacity of relevant criteria flexibly. We encourage early local infrastructure. engagement with us for advice on the application of this and other policies in the Plan. E. Contributing to the greening of the city.

F. Improving sustainable transport infrastructure and highway conditions.

G. Making appropriate and effective waste management arrangements.

51 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY nearby uses from having to curtail their activities. their to curtail having from uses nearby ensures development not does existing cause and toincluded safeguard amenity local future to measures applicant ensurethe are mitigation Change which places principle, burden the on of Agent the utilise We will detail. more in issues policies environment inchapter the cover these The neighbours. and of new or building its users on existing unacceptable impacts environmental prevent Development must and well-being. health and oflife quality on impact adverse an have that are examplesvibrations of impacts environmental strong and 7.4 noise air, smells, /Polluted excessive quality Local environmental increases sense in of the enclosure. should preventnew developments unacceptable sunlight, or ofdaylight loss material no be may there ensure adequate levels of privacy. Even when minimise overshadowing and and overlooking of design measures should be considered to incorporation the as well as ofbuildings orientation and scale play. and Positioning, rest recreation, for space open private and of public use the on impact negatively can and buildings of adjacent operation or quality the affects Overshadowing and lighting. heating reduced for need artificial and to decrease consumption through energy levels is important for health and well-being well-being and for health important is levels sunlight and daylight indoor ofgood Provision oflife. quality on impact can they as minimised be should on amenity 7.3 effects /Negative impacts Amenity

biodiversity assets, which are supported by our tree tree byour are supported which assets, biodiversity Westminster. These spaces also include important of quality to the contribution make important an 7.7 /The Royal spaces open and other Parks greening City city. the in growth future to support ofinfrastructure delivery to the approach our out Plan sets Delivery The Infrastructure to providers realise this. and infrastructure applicants with work We will provision. infrastructure to enhance Development where should, possible, seek visitors. create major nuisances and businesses to residents, is overburdened, can this capacity infrastructure When city. ofthe operation successful the and communities for our role avital play infrastructure of 7.6 types and other services /A of range facilities, Infrastructure of areas. uses and these character the economy chapter to principles set protect the out the in Areas Policy Special The businesses. and visitors attracting and uses, functions particular places. There are also several areas for known ofhigh-quality creation to the approach our out set reinforce The policies design in chapter the this. development should seek to celebrate and new and quality ofexceptional is of Westminster to and Thenatural built environment our heritage. and spaces buildings contribute townscapes, that including neighbourhoods, and high-quality distinct ofmany consists 7.5 /Westminster Character

reduction, reusereduction, and recycling. waste maximising on afocus has which Strategy Waste Westminster’s and in Management line with plan this with accordance in developments for new required be will management waste Appropriate for highway and uses. neighbouring users and disturbance cause and safety on health impact scene, street the of quality the affect 7.9 /Poor management negatively can waste Waste management management. set our approach out to transport chapter The policies connections in the priorities. competing with acity in attention particular require arrangements and servicing Parking travel. active to facilitate modes transport other with integrated as well as enhanced, be should environment As far pedestrian as possible, the highway. ofthe functioning normal the obstruct Development should not of activities. other for avariety and for movement both motorists, and cyclists bypedestrians, 7.8 used is highway /The Highways city. ofthe greening to the approach our out sets The environment chapter and well-being. amenity of greening such as climate resilience, enhanced city. This to includes seeking achieve benefits wider in the and enhanceprotect green the infrastructure increased pressure. therefore Development must spaces these under put will city in the growth green and other features.population Additional SPATIAL STRATEGY

52

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

53 CONTENTS HOUSING

Improved housing, improved lives

Historically our housing hasn’t grown at the same rate as the rest of the city. That’s changing. By 2040 we will have delivered over 20,000 new homes. Good, affordable housing that will contribute towards healthier, happier lives. Housing that makes the most of the land available and embodies the very highest standards of design.

Whilst Westminster is home to some of the most affluent postcodes in the country, we have diverse communities. This brings an immediate need to create housing that’s affordable, inclusive and allows everyone to share in the economic prosperity of the city.

How we respond to housing speaks volumes about who we are as a city. Our response needs to be world-class. CONTENTS CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY C. HOUSING EXISTING B. A. delivery Housing 8. 2. 1. except where: floorspace and landwill be protected, uses, residential units, existing All asset. aheritage to protect except (GIA), where is necessary it Area Internal mGross sq exceed 200 newNo will homes in Westminster 4. 3. 2. 1. by: achieved be will This period. Plan the exceed will Westminster 20,685 over in built homes of new number The

sized housing. reconfigured to create family sizednon-family housing is being or need; meet better would housing affordable or of supported the reconfigurationthe or redevelopment buildings in certain locations. in certain buildings for tall positively planning upwards extensions; appropriate permitting sites; small on of homes a higherdelivering number Areas; Renewal Housing in including those siteoptimising densities,

justify using a different methodology. The standard standard The methodology. adifferent using justify exceptional unless needed to circumstances exist to calculate number of the methodology homes to use a standard requires planning authorities local Framework Planning /The Policy National 8.3 capacity. estimate to policy plan local existing considers and homes new deliver to land of capacity on based is figure This ten years. over year per homes 985 is Plan London the in to Westminster allocated target The (SHLAA). Assessment Land Availability Housing Strategic the through capacity ofland estimate an annual housing target GLA’s on based the /The London Plan8.2 all sets London boroughs TargetHousing ofcases. majority the in living This require will residents. higher density neighbouring existing and new for both of life compromising accommodate,can quality without site each as homes new many as delivering means This efficiently. most used is land ensuring city, the across provision ofnew delivery the optimise housing and fully to existing protect necessary To is it plan. ofthis this, do akeyis priority need housing diversifying and growing meet help to targets housing Westminster’s 8.1 /Achieving D.

a permanent basisa not will permanent be permitted. sleepingto accommodation temporary on ofhousing type ofany ofuse change The

than previous policies have. have. policies previous than plan deliver more will this housing extensions, housing delivery, including upwards through to innovative approach welcoming amore with Taken design requirements. prescriptive together to meet less through solutions housing needs ofdesign supportive is Plan City This Plan. London plan and the this encouragement in both of policy level astronger and ofdelivery levels previous includes a high number of smaller sites, on based up to This influencewill housing2040. delivery considered how policies changes in our strategic we have trajectory, housing our reviewing /In 8.5 Supply Housing period. Plan the across of20,685 homes target derived Plan London to exceed the we expect deliver more Through approach, homes. this to ways innovative new finding and sites delivery more housing optimising housing, with forward geared to towards come encouraging applicants policies are Our predecessors. its than ambitious and pro-growth more is Plan City /This 8.4 for Westminster. year per homes of 1,495 in an annual results requirement methodology this Using target. housing existing the above factor’. 40% Theat resultant figurecapped then is figure that on based an adjusts then ‘affordability projections, housing on based population need baseline a with off starts it that in approach based capacity- SHLAA’s the from differs methodology HOUSING

56

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS

1,600 1533 1484 1,400 1352

1221 1220 1,200 1169

992 1000 989 985 985 985 985 985 1,000 906 978

831 834 810 800 743 698

600

Cumulative number of homes Cumulative of number 400

200

0 2037 / 38 2029 / 30 / 31 2030 / 32 2031 2032 / 33 / 34 2033 / 35 2034 2035 / 36 / 37 2036 / 39 2038 2039 / 40 2019 / 20 2019 2020 / 21 2021 / 22 2022 / 23 2023 / 24 2024 / 25 2025 / 26 2026 / 27 2027 / 28 2028 / 29

Figure 14: Housing trajectory

57 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS CONTENTS

8.6 / Historically more than 80% of Westminster’s being reconfigured to better meet these needs. 8.11 / Furthermore, in order to ensure that site housing delivery has come forward as windfall. Where existing supported or affordable housing capacities are optimised, no new homes in Through our housing trajectory and the is being reconfigured or redeveloped it will be Westminster (including changes of use and future production of a Site Allocations assessed against the latest evidence of need, either residential extensions where new homes are Development Plan Document we are taking a through our Annual Affordable Housing Statement created) will exceed 200sq m of Gross Internal more proactive approach to planning for growth or up-to-date evidence specific to Westminster. Area (GIA). This size restriction is needed because in Westminster. Nevertheless, high existing use Westminster’s position in the global housing values in Westminster mean that it is not always 8.9 / To help meet the continued need for family market can create demand for super-sized possible to predict when land will come forward sized housing in Westminster, we will allow the properties do not optimise development density for redevelopment. This means that sites will loss of one existing non-family sized home where on our scarce land. The only exception to this will inevitably continue to come forward as windfalls this is being reconfigured or merged with another be where a larger unit is needed to ensure the and therefore we continue to include a windfall to provide larger units (de-conversion), provided protection of a heritage asset or a converted home allowance in our housing trajectory. Consistent other options to extend the building to create as we recognise that it is not always practicable or past trends and future projections are used to larger units have first been explored. Properties appropriate to merge parts of the floors to create estimate the scale of windfall delivery. that are de-converted to create family-sized larger units. The 200sq m limit is 62sq m above homes should not exceed the 200sq m maximum the highest minimum standard in the Nationally Density and the size of new homes unless it is demonstrably impracticable to do so. Described Space Standards and is higher than the average size of recently built private homes in 8.7 / Historically, housing in Westminster has 8.10 / Internal design features such as including Westminster (163sq m between 2013 and 2018). been developed at relatively low densities. utility space to dry washing, extra internal storage The limit will still enable generously sized homes This cannot continue in the face of very high space and partitions that can be moved to alter to be developed to meet demand from the prime demand for housing and projected population room layouts can contribute to making high-density market and large families, but balances that growth. Therefore, as developable land is developments acceptable. Good external design, against the other, more strategic housing needs of scarce, to deliver our housing targets, higher public realm and provision of high-quality open the city. The limit will not apply to the replacement density development will be required. space, including trees and soft landscaping, can also of a single dwelling. help ensure the right kind of growth, where impacts Existing housing on surrounding neighbourhoods are mitigated. 8.8 / The high cost of land in Westminster and its limited availability mean that all existing housing uses must be protected. The acute shortage of affordable housing and the continued need to provide for family-sized homes mean that the only exceptions where the loss of residential uses or floorspace may be acceptable is where they are

58 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS

Permanent temporary sleeping accommodation (short-term lets) search for sites revealed no sites are 9. Affordable housing available for affordable housing in the 8.12 / While delivering new homes is essential, A. At least 35% of all new homes will be vicinity that could be reasonably and if we are to meet Westminster’s growing housing affordable across Westminster. viably purchased, including on council needs we must also ensure that existing stock owned land; and remains available for permanent residents. B. There will be no net loss of affordable Westminster has seen the number of properties 2. the site proposed can demonstrably housing across the city. All residential used for temporary short-term lets grow provide more affordable housing and of proposals will provide a minimum of 35% significantly since the need for planning permission a higher quality than would have been of the total residential units as affordable to short-term let a property was removed.1 In addition possible on or off-site in the vicinity; and housing on-site if they: to the impact on housing availability, this can have 3. provision off-site will demonstrably unacceptable impacts on the residential amenity of 1. have a site area of 0.5 hectares contribute to achieving mixed those living in neighbouring properties. Regular noise or more; or communities. disturbance for neighbours, anti-social behaviour, 2. are proposing ten or more residential inappropriate disposal of waste, reduced security and units; or D. A payment in lieu to the council’s overcrowding of properties are all consequences of Affordable Housing Fund may be accepted this entrenched commercialisation of residential 3. are proposing 1,000 sq m or more only as a last resort if it is demonstrated to properties. Restricting change of use to short-term residential floorspace (for sale or rent). the council’s satisfaction that no sites are letting will safeguard our existing housing supply and available for off-site provision. protect residents from the negative aspects of this C. In exceptional cases, affordable housing activity. The restriction on short-term letting applies provision can be made off-site (in whole E. 60% of the affordable units will be to purpose-built student accommodation outside or in part) in the vicinity of the host ‘intermediate’ affordable housing of term time, unless the letting is directly linked to development. This will only be accepted for rent or sale and 40% will be social conferences taking place on the education premises where it is sufficiently demonstrated that rent or London Affordable Rent. the accommodation is linked to. This is because on-site provision is physically or otherwise student homes are often situated in residential impracticable or is inappropriate in terms of F. For intermediate housing, new areas rather than on purpose-built campuses the quantity or quality of affordable housing affordable homes will be provided and the amenity of permanent residents must to be provided. Provision of affordable across the indicative income levels set be protected from the negative impacts of a housing off-site (in whole or in part) beyond out in the Planning Obligations and churn of holiday makers. the vicinity of the host development will Affordable Housing SPD. only be acceptable where: 1 Since 2015 planning permission has not been required to 1. it can be demonstrated that a rigorous short-term let a home in London for less than 90 nights within a calendar year

59 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS CONTENTS

submitted in a standardised and accessible format estate renewal and deliver mixed communities, G. The size of these homes, including the in accordance with London Plan requirements. better quality homes and a more appropriate mix number of bedrooms required to meet need of unit sizes, the affordable housing requirement will be provided in line with the council’s 9.2 / To maintain our stock, where affordable will apply across the regenerated estate, taking Annual Affordable Housing Statement. homes are redeveloped at least an equivalent account of any affordable homes that have been amount of affordable housing floorspace must be re-provided. This is in recognition of the wider H. Proposals involving the demolition of existing re-provided. We will seek an uplift in the amount of benefits brought about for residents of affordable affordable housing will not be permitted affordable housing provided where existing accommodation by estate regeneration beyond unless it is replaced by at least an equivalent affordable housing is redeveloped as part of mixed just an increase in numbers. Maximising affordable amount of affordable housing floorspace. tenure or mixed-use schemes. Such proposals will housing on estate regeneration schemes will help Additional affordable housing will be be expected to submit a viability assessment to contribute to the Mayor’s strategic 50% affordable maximised in such redevelopment proposals. maximise the amount of additional affordable housing target. housing provided. There will be no overall net loss of floorspace and re-provision must be Tenure and bedroom split in the vicinity of the original home(s) to maintain 9.1 / Westminster is the second most expensive 9.4 / At present, ‘intermediate’ homes make mixed tenure communities. Provision of affordable local authority in the country in which to rent or up only around 1.5% of Westminster’s housing housing in the vicinity means it is close to the host purchase a home. Average house prices are more stock and our Housing Needs Analysis shows that development; however, vicinity is not strictly than double those for London and more than 20 there is a high demand for this tenure. We want to defined to avoid unhelpful restrictions when times the average Westminster household income. grow and diversify this sector to create a more dealing with different site circumstances or The shortage of land, its high price and current balanced mix of tenures and improve housing availability and will be assessed in light of funding mechanisms mean that to exceed the 35% options. Therefore, we will require that 60% of the circumstances of each case. affordable housing threshold and contribute to the the affordable housing delivered will be Mayor’s strategic target of 50% affordable homes ‘intermediate’ housing for rent or sale across 9.3 / All affordable housing requirements from across London, it is essential to require affordable a range of household income levels. This is residential development will be calculated based housing contributions from private housing important to ensure new homes provide genuine on the total gross residential development developments. All major developments are choice and meet the variety of needs of different proposed (Gross Internal Area). All developments therefore expected to provide at least 35% of new people and families who are vital to the effective that include the re-development of affordable homes as affordable housing, rising to 50% for functioning of the local economy and delivery housing will be assessed in line with the Mayor’s developments on public sector land. Developments of public services in Westminster. threshold approach to viability. On estate which fall short of provision of this requirement will regeneration schemes we will maximise the be subject to viability assessment and review in line 9.5 / The high cost of housing in Westminster amount of affordable housing, seeking to deliver with the Mayor’s Viability Tested Route as part of makes even relatively small shares of shared- 50% affordable housing on public land where the threshold approach to planning applications set ownership properties unaffordable for many viable. On these schemes, to facilitate large-scale out in the London Plan. Viability evidence should be households eligible for intermediate housing.

60 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS

Therefore, although we support innovative low- 9.9 / Registered Provider (RP) owned affordable 9.12 / Where single ownership of a large estate cost home ownership products, most intermediate homes delivered through section 106 agreements is a barrier to the delivery of on-site affordable homes are expected to be for rent. The household may change to market tenure provided the unit is housing, we encourage landowners to deliver income thresholds for intermediate housing vacant, the affordable homes are re-provided in on-site affordable housing in ways which do not products in Westminster will be set out in the Westminster and are of an equal or higher quality break up their land ownership. For example, by Planning Obligations and Affordable Housing SPD. in terms of size, location and design quality, and considering becoming RPs in their own right and the change is part of a transparent asset transferring affordable units to themselves as RPs. 9.6 / We will work towards 10% of new intermediate management process. All receipts from the sale of homes being for either affordable home ownership affordable homes to market tenure housing should 9.13 / Affordable housing developments or rent-based products that help residents move be re-invested in affordable housing re-provision. completed prior to an application for market in to home ownership. Based on evidence about The mechanisms for achieving this will be set out housing may in some circumstances count towards local housing needs, costs and incomes, we in the forthcoming Planning Obligations and meeting future affordable housing requirements to consider that a tailored approach to meet shared Affordable Housing SPD. enable estate regeneration to take place. The regional and national affordable home ownership mechanism for this will be set out in the ambitions is appropriate and will not prejudice our 9.10 / Getting the right mix of sizes is important forthcoming Planning Obligations and Affordable ability to meet other housing needs. across all tenures. Our Annual Affordable Housing Housing Supplementary Planning Document. Statement will set out up-to-date affordable unit 9.7 / Our Housing Needs Analysis shows that size requirements based on actual need and Payment in lieu there remains a need for low cost rented housing demand shown on the social and intermediate 9.14 / Where payments in lieu are accepted, they in Westminster, and therefore 40% of all new housing registers. will be at a level of broadly equivalent value to affordable homes will be for social or affordable actual provision so there is no financial benefit rent. We consider London Affordable Rent to be an Off-site affordable housing from providing a payment rather than delivery of appropriate rental level for Westminster residents 9.11 / Where it is accepted for residential schemes that actual units. Payments will be based on a fixed on lower incomes alongside traditional social affordable housing cannot be provided on-site, rate per sq m of floorspace that would have been rented accommodation. development off-site in the vicinity of the host site is provided as affordable housing. They will be our priority. This is to ensure mixed and sustainable equivalent to the uplift in value resulting from the 9.8 / Although increasing the number of new communities are created and maintained. The off-site floorspace that would have been provided as affordable homes of any tenure in the city is a priority, housing is expected to be higher quality than would affordable housing being delivered as private we do not support increases in affordable housing have been possible on-site e.g. larger homes which housing. This approach will ensure a cost neutral that do not result in an increase in the number of better meet identified need, more amenity space or impact on the developer. The value of the payment new homes. Therefore, outside of existing council better access to public transport. Applicants are in lieu, including indexation, will be set out in the housing estates, we do not permit the purchase expected to discuss with us any potential forthcoming Planning Obligations and Affordable of market tenure homes to change their tenure opportunities to provide off-site affordable Housing Supplementary Planning Document. to meet affordable housing requirements. housing on existing council owned land either as infill or as part of estate renewal.

61 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS CONTENTS

10. Housing for specific groups well-managed new housing which meets an residents, which enable them to remain in identified specialist housing need. All existing their existing property. Replacement older A. Residential developments will provide specialist and supported housing floorspace people’s accommodation intended to be a mix of units in terms of size, type, and will be protected from changing to non- occupied by the original occupant(s), will as far tenure to secure mixed and inclusive specialist or supported residential use except as practicably possible, be located near to the communities, and contribute towards where it is demonstrated that: original accommodation. meeting Westminster’s housing needs for different groups. 1. the accommodation is of poor PURPOSE-BUILT STUDENT ACCOMMODATION quality, does not meet contemporary FAMILY SIZED HOMES G. The council supports the development of requirements and is not capable of new, well-managed, purpose-built B. New build homes will be designed with being upgraded; or accommodation for students studying at growing families in mind and 25% of all 2. the use has a demonstrable and higher education institutions. new homes across Westminster will be significant adverse effect on family sized. Where two-bedroom units residential amenity; or H. A proportion of the purpose-built student are provided, the majority should be large accommodation will be secured as affordable enough to accommodate two double 3. it is surplus to requirements as any student accommodation in accordance with bedrooms within a single development. form of specialist or supported housing; the London Plan. All accommodation should Studios will make up no more than 10% of or include a proportion of units that are new homes within a single development. 4. the accommodation is being adapted or adaptable to meet specialist needs. altered to better meet specialist need or C. Conversion of purpose-built single-family to enable residents to remain in their I. Existing purpose-built student homes into multiple family homes is existing property. accommodation will be protected unless welcomed. Family sized homes will be demonstrably surplus to requirements. required where a House in Multiple OLDER PEOPLE’S HOUSING Occupation (HMO) surplus to requirements GYPSY AND TRAVELLER SITES (as demonstrated by appropriate marketing E. The council supports the development of as an HMO for at least 18 months) is high-quality accommodation for older J. Gypsy and traveller sites may be permitted proposed to change to market housing. people across a range of tenures and use where it is demonstrated that there is a need classes that meets identified need. in Westminster, that they are appropriately SPECIALIST HOUSING designed and will not have unacceptable F. The council will support adaptations and impacts, particularly on traffic or parking. D. The council supports the provision of alterations to homes occupied by older

62 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS

10.1 / Westminster has a broad range of housing bedrooms are unlikely to meet the housing needs therefore particularly important to ensure inclusivity needs and we support delivery of a range of of families and will therefore not be included in the and maintain Westminster’s rich diversity.2 housing types and sizes to meet those needs. calculation of the 25%. Furthermore, the majority The provision of specialist housing and of two-bedroom units within a single development 10.8 / We will resist the loss of specialist housing accommodation will contribute to our overall should be large enough to accommodate two if it only requires minor layout changes or housing target of at least 20,685 homes over double bedrooms. improvements in quality to bring it up to standard the Plan period. to meet modern requirements. However, we 10.5 / In new intermediate tenure homes, two and appreciate that needs and service delivery change 10.2 / Our strategic housing requirements are set three-bedroom homes may be permitted with only over time and specialist housing can become out in both regional and local assessments and one double bedroom, if it is required to make the obsolete or surplus to requirements. The loss of show that there are shortfalls for all sizes of homes units more affordable to eligible households and specialist floorspace may therefore be considered in Westminster, except for studios. We require a the new homes are meeting demand on the acceptable to: make optimum use of housing sites, range of housing sizes across different tenures to intermediate waiting list. make our housing stock more sustainable as be provided to ensure the kind of homes people needs change, and deliver our or other local need are delivered, including lifetime homes. 10.6 / The 25% requirement for family-sized homes is service provider’s published strategies. Consequently, studios will be restricted to 10% a strategic target. Whilst individual proposals should of new homes within individual developments. seek to incorporate this requirement, there may be 10.9 / We will only accept the loss of any specialist circumstances where it is not appropriate to provide housing uses where there has been no interest Family sized homes family-sized homes, due to a site’s small size, location from another organisation providing housing or other practicability issues. These circumstances for any specialist needs in that location or by 10.3 / To ensure that homes are adaptable, will be assessed on an individual basis. a registered provider for the use of the site and families have enough space to grow in their for any type of specialist housing. This will be existing homes, we require a proportion of double Specialist and supported housing demonstrated by the housing being marketed bedrooms within each new-build unit. This will for 18 months as a specialist or supported home. give growing families the option to remain in their 10.7 / Westminster’s existing stock of specialist existing home, rather than move elsewhere or housing provides accommodation tailored to the 10.10 / Where the loss of an HMO is accepted out of Westminster. needs of the vulnerable and others with specific following the marketing exercise, we expect housing needs which are not met by conventional it to be converted into family sized homes. By 10.4 / Our Housing Needs Analysis shows that housing. High land values mean there is pressure to increasing the stock of such homes in the city, the a large proportion of new homes in Westminster change low-value specialist housing to higher value loss of the specialist floorspace will be mitigated. are developed as one- and two-bedroom units. private residential accommodation. Without this In order to give families more housing choices, stock, the people who occupy specialist housing 25% of all new homes across Westminster will be would be unable to remain in Westminster. The family sized – this means having between three protection of existing, and encouragement of new, 2 For new HMOs please refer to the council’s and five bedrooms. Homes with six or more accommodation that meets an identified need is licensing scheme

63 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS CONTENTS

10.11 / Where new specialist housing is proposed, 10.13 / We welcome new and innovative – storage options for mobility scooters; a management plan will be required and secured approaches to delivering this type of housing – adaptability of the units for future via legal agreement or planning condition to across a range of tenures. New homes to meet mobility needs; and ensure the new use does not have negative the needs of older people will be determined impacts on the amenity of neighbouring residents. with regard to past delivery against the – access to public transport. The management plan will address parking benchmarks set for different tenures of pressures, noise and other potential impacts on older people’s housing in the London Plan. 10.16 / The location of this type of housing neighbouring residents or vulnerable uses, such can be critical in ensuring a high quality of as schools. 10.14 / Self-contained older people’s housing life for older residents and contributing to their that does not fall within the definition of affordable independence. Older people are more likely Older people’s housing housing will be required to contribute to the to suffer from memory loss, which may lead to supply of affordable housing. This will be in the feelings of vulnerability, loss of self-confidence 10.12 / Population projections indicate a 52% form of on-site affordable units specifically for and independence. Where older people’s increase in those aged 75 and over living in the occupation of older people. housing is being redeveloped, the re-provision Westminster between 2017 and 2030.3 will preferably be in the vicinity of the original Additionally, there is expected to be a 45% 10.15 / The quality of accommodation for older accommodation to ensure residents increase in those over 65 suffering from dementia people is more specific than for other types of can maintain familiarity with their surroundings in Westminster between 2015 and 2030.4 There housing. We will assess the quality of new homes and their networks of friends and family. is therefore a growing need for new housing to proposed with particular regard to: meet a range of older people’s accommodation 10.17 / Housing developed specifically needs. This is not necessarily restricted only to – design features suitable for dementia for older people will be subject to conditions to extra-care, sheltered housing or residential sufferers5 both in the home and in shared ensure it continues to be used for its original institutions, although there remains a need for spaces which are part of the development; purpose – this may include a minimum age for the these types of accommodation. Meeting the occupants or the continued delivery of on-site needs of older people can also take the form – availability of on-site care and support; care, where this is included as part of the of mainstream housing designed to aid mobility, – facilities in the development or nearby original development. adapt to changing health or which facilitate the for community and social interaction; lifestyles of those in later life, as well as private Student accommodation homes marketed specifically to older people. – access to technology such as tele-care; 10.18 / Westminster has 11 major universities and – Wi-Fi and broadband; colleges, more than any other London Borough. It is also home to many smaller colleges and 5 Healthy Building Note 08-02. Dementia-friendly Health and professional education institutions. More than 3 Westminster Housing Needs Analysis, 2019 Social Care Environments (Department of Health, 2015) a third of higher education students in London 4 Westminster Housing Needs Analysis, 2019 should be consulted. attend a Westminster-based institution, meaning

64 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS

that there is a high demand for purpose-built by the Mayor of London confirms that there is no 11.1 / London’s housing market is evolving. student accommodation. Nevertheless, our identified need for residential pitches for gypsies New housing models are emerging in response Housing Needs Analysis indicates that there is and travellers in Westminster.6 The city does not to the demand for more (and relatively affordable) no overwhelming demand for accommodation have reserves of sites of a size or kind suitable for homes and reflect changing lifestyles and ways for Westminster-based students to be housed in use for this type of accommodation and it is of working. These new housing models include: Westminster and there is no evidence to suggest unlikely that there will be any suitable sites that current levels of provision are affecting available in the future. – self-build and custom-build homes student numbers or profiles. – build to rent homes 10.19 / We will continue to support the 11. Innovative housing delivery – rent to buy, help to buy and shared development of purpose-built student ownership homes A. The council welcomes applications for accommodation for higher education institutions, innovative models of high-quality housing – large-scale purpose-built shared living secured via nominations agreements, in order to that contribute to providing a range of and live/work schemes. balance the demand for student accommodation housing options to Westminster’s residents. against the competing demands for other types of 11.2 / We welcome innovative ways to housing in the city. B. Qualifying Build to Rent and large-scale deliver more housing and address the high purpose-built shared living proposals will cost of traditional self-contained market housing. 10.20 / Student accommodation must be well- be required to provide a proportion of the If proposals for innovative housing models do managed and a sufficient proportion must be accommodation as affordable housing in not meet the definition of affordable housing adaptable to meet specialist needs. A proportion of accordance with the London Plan. they will be required to contribute to the supply purpose-built student accommodation must be of affordable housing regardless of what use class provided as affordable student accommodation, as C. The council welcomes applications for they fall into. We will expect qualifying Build to defined in the London Plan and associated guidance. new homes built using modern methods Rent and large-scale purpose-built shared living The Mayor’s threshold approach to viability will be of construction particularly when they schemes to follow the affordable housing used to assess the appropriate proportion of contribute to a quick and more sustainable requirements set out in the London Plan (see affordable student accommodation in accordance delivery of homes. Policy H11 Build to Rent and Policy H16 Large-scale with London Plan policy H17. Purpose-built shared living). A deviation from the social/intermediate tenure split set out in Policy 9 Gypsy and traveller sites may be acceptable if any of these models of 10.21 / Proposals for new gypsy and traveller sites housing are delivered following the conditions set will be assessed based on identified need for this out in the London Plan. type of housing in Westminster, how the site optimises the land and the likely impacts the site 6 GLA Gypsy and Traveller Accommodation Topic will have. The most recent research commissioned Paper, 2017

65 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS CONTENTS

Self-build and custom-build homes Rent to buy, help to buy and shared space that is separate from the ‘live’ element. This is ownership homes to ensure it is quality work space capable of 11.3 / Self-build and custom-build homes can meeting modern business requirements. Long term help deliver new homes that meet the needs and 11.6 / Rent to buy, help to buy and shared ownership management plans will be submitted alongside demands of an individual or group who organises products can help households on average income proposals for purpose-built shared living schemes. the design and construction of the new home, levels save for a deposit to buy their first home with or without the help of a specialist developer. through bespoke rental arrangements. We therefore 11.9 / Because purpose-built shared living schemes welcome these products and developments (including live/work developments) will have been 11.4 / In accordance with the Self-build and especially when the “rent” element is affordable designed to meet a specific demand, the layout is Custom Housebuilding Act 2015,7 we keep a and where the homes are allocated to customers likely to mean that, without significant adaptation, register of individuals and associations of on our intermediate housing register. changing the development to meet an alternative individuals who are seeking to acquire serviced residential use will result in a failure to meet the plots of land in Westminster to build homes for Large-scale purpose-built shared living minimum space standards. To protect residential those individuals to occupy. We use the data when and live/work schemes amenity, we may therefore use legal agreements or preparing housing assessments and analysing 11.7 / Purpose-built shared living can offer an conditions to prevent shared living developments housing demand. acceptable form of accommodation for young from converting to other housing types. professionals who are content to share some Build to rent homes space, particularly if it offers a less expensive Modern methods of construction 11.5 / Build to rent developments contribute to option (when including service charges) than 11.10 / The architecture, design and construction meeting the demand for rented homes and can conventional self-contained homes. The amount sectors are changing, and new and modern deliver high-quality and self-contained homes of communal storage and living space provided methods of construction and materials are being that are available on longer tenancies. Build to separately to private spaces should be generous used. Modern methods of construction can have a rent developments often target a certain type and relate directly to the number of occupants positive impact on the quality of homes, the pace of residents (e.g. young professionals, downsizers in the development, to ensure there is sufficient of delivery and its cost. or students) and provide shared spaces and space for comfortable living. services. We welcome build to rent developments 11.11 / Modular homes are homes constructed especially when they help deliver a large 11.8 / Live/work developments can additionally partially off-site, usually delivered by road to number of more affordable homes and offer provide workspace for start-ups and small their destination and put in place by crane, where longer-term tenancies. businesses alongside homes, which is more they are connected to utilities and fitted out. We affordable than renting office space and will welcome the delivery of modular homes in contribute to the city’s economic growth. However, Westminster for a number of reasons: the units we expect the ‘work’ element to include facilities themselves can be constructed very quickly; off- such as a high-speed internet connection, site development means less deliveries being bookable meeting rooms and touchdown working 7 As amended by the Housing and Planning Act 2016 made in Westminster as only the ‘modules’ are

66 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS

delivered instead of multiple streams of construction materials and equipment – resulting in 12. Housing quality following, measures will be required: lower energy use and reduced emissions; the A. All new homes and residential extensions construction disruption caused to neighbours such 1. provision of communal external amenity will provide a well-designed, energy as noise, dust and pollution from on-site space; or efficient and high-quality living construction is significantly reduced compared to environment, both internally and externally. 2. provision of additional and/or higher traditionally built homes; and more homes can be New homes will be designed to a standard quality public open space. delivered on small plots. that ensures the safety, health and well- being of its occupants. E. Where it is sufficiently demonstrated that it 11.12 / We recognise the design and construction is not practicable or appropriate to provide industry is changing and we embrace new technology B. 90% of all new-build homes will meet any type of external amenity space, which helps us respond to the housing challenge. Building Regulation requirements M4 (2) additional internal living space equivalent However, new homes resulting from new construction “accessible and adaptable dwellings” to the external requirement set out in techniques such as modular homes must be of the and 10% of all new-build homes clause D will be required. highest quality, with high standards of quality control (including changes of use) will meet throughout the entire construction process. We will Building Regulation requirement M4 (3) only accept modular homes in Westminster which are “wheelchair user dwellings”. 12.1 / Housing plays an important role in the constructed out of sustainable materials. safety, health and well-being of individuals C. All new homes will meet or exceed the and communities and in the shaping of Nationally Described Space Standards neighbourhoods. It must therefore be designed (where the units are self-contained). to a high quality. This is particularly important in Westminster given the growing need for housing External amenity space driving higher density developments. D. All new-build homes will provide at 12.2 / High quality can take many forms and least five sq m of private external amenity can be achieved through design solutions space for each dwelling designed for one-two such as the location of one home’s living room persons or more and, where practicable, a in relation to another’s bedroom, private internal further one sq m for each additional person living or external amenity space, adaptability the dwelling is designed to accommodate. to mobility needs, access to natural light and a Where it is not considered practicable or dual aspect8 to the home for ventilation to reduce appropriate to provide private external amenity space for all or some homes, the 8 Dual aspect homes have openable windows on two or more walls, allowing for views in more than one direction.

67 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY 9 System Rating Safety and Health Housing, the in identified hazards how to demonstrate expected be will /Applicants 12.3 each property. within overheating and to provide adequate ventilation design measureswe to expect will mitigate noise), to external owing closed tohave remain (or windows homes aspect dual to provide inappropriate or impracticable is it Where quality. internaloverheating and provide air suitable sometimes impracticable to meet the Building Building the to meet impracticable sometimes is it that recognised is –it dwellings new-build over lifetime. their This requirement to applies current home cannot meet changing their needs their because housing specialist to into move also prevent will It being forced residents residents. able-bodied for less and longer living is that for apopulation are future-proofed homes new so are or adapted adaptable for users, wheelchair /We to need homes 12.5 ensure all that new-build needsMobility homes. new in results of use change a when or merged; being are flats (across all tenures); residential when extensions; to: homes new all applies policy Aofthe /Part 12.4 homes. ofnew design the in

and hostel standards. standards occupation flats multiple in flats, self-contained referAlso to the Council’s guidance on bedsits/studios, for landlords professionals. and property-related guidance andSee Housing system: health rating safety 9 have addressed been

applies to new-build dwellings – it is recognised recognised is –it dwellings to new-build applies This set requirement in clause out standard C. internal the in space used calculating GIA the quality. The requirement not does count towards air or noise privacy, overlooking, as such impacts help can unacceptable mitigate façade the potential of back screens or stepping or enhancements glass space are balconiesamenity and gardens. The use ofprivate forms Common views. pleasant and and may provide leisureenvironments space developments contributes living to good quality space in housing amenity /External 12.7 space amenity External homes whereor possible. extending converting when met to be standards the expect However, we assets. heritage within them to meet impracticable sometimes is it that recognised is it – dwellings to new-build applies requirement This homes. amount of space in self-contained their ensurewill have residents access to a suitable and and standards) quality Housing D6 (see Policy in accordance LondonWestminster the Plan with are thereforeStandards (NDSS) adopted in Spacebe kept Described The Nationally in check. size must homes minimum ofnew the norm, the is subsequently high and higher density extremely is for housing demand where aplace /In 12.6 Space standards possible. where ofhomes types all in met to be standards the However, we expect restricted. more are fabric and form to built –changes – for example as assets, heritage within Regulations requirements

internal space standards set out in clause C. clause in out set standards space internal minimum to the addition in be will This options. as balconies or winter gardens should be considered requirementexternal set in clause out D. Enclosed to space internal the equivalent living additional space, provide dwellings will amenity external of type any to provide possible not is it that demonstrated been has it Where appropriate. or practicable be always not may space open public space space, or additional communal amenity amenity private ofexternal however, provision the space; amenity provide external developments housing new-build all that to /We ensure want 12.9 Plan should be provided. amenity, design and environment policies inwith this space public open in line or higher quality additional space, to possible provide communal amenity terraces and roof is not it gardens. When courtyards, are space amenity ofcommunal forms Common are well-managed. and sunlight ofdirect advantage for across-tenures, all designed to residents take space be safe, will that accessible amenity external requirementexternal form in the of communal should provide developers the cases, these In inappropriate. or impracticable be may development a within homes some or for all space amenity Westminster, provisoin of the external private as such environment built adensely /In 12.8 possible. where ofhomes types all in met to be standards the However, we expect restricted. more are fabric and form to built –changes example as – for assets, heritage within floorspace external new to provide impracticable sometimes is it that HOUSING 68

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS

69 CONTENTS ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT

A thriving city creates a thriving economy

The scale and breadth of Westminster’s economy is like no other. Our diverse range of enterprise makes us a global hub not just for business and finance, but also for creative and cultural industries. It’s an economy that benefits beyond our own communities to the UK as a whole.

For our economic success to continue in the decades to come, we need to respond to people’s changing needs. The need for affordable, quality housing that’s suitable for our diverse demographic. The need for flexible workspaces. A city that’s integrated and connected. A city where people want to be and want to stay.

By creating a thriving place where people to want to be, we create a thriving economy. CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

13.1 / Westminster is a global office centre, with an 13. Supporting economic growth C. Proposals involving the provision of estimated 8.45 million sq m of office floorspace,1 affordable workspace will generally be ranging from small traditional offices in heritage A. New and improved office floorspace will be supported throughout the commercial buildings, to large modern floorplates. These cater supported to provide capacity for areas of the city. for a full range of occupiers, including real estate, at least 63,000 new jobs over the Plan hedge funds, professional / financial services and period, enabling the continued growth D. The net loss of office floorspace from creative industries. However, since 2005, more and clustering of the creative, knowledge, the CAZ: than 720,000 sq m2 of office stock has been lost and research-based sectors. Additional in the city – predominantly to residential (including floorspace that meets the needs of modern 1. to residential development will only be permitted development schemes). Reduction in working practices, including through the permitted in those parts of the CAZ that supply has resulted in low vacancy levels (a ten- provision of co-working space and a range are predominantly residential in year quarterly average of 6.4% across the entire of Class E (commercial, business and character and where the proposal would West End, which includes part of Camden and service) uses on site, is supported in reinstate an original residential use; Kensington and Chelsea)3 and high rents. This principle in the: 2. to hotel use will only be permitted trend needs to be halted in order for Westminster 1. Parts of the Central Activities Zone where there is no interest in its to continue to compete globally, to support the (CAZ) with a commercial or mixed-use continued use for office or any other continued growth of emerging sectors, such as character, including the West End Retail Class E (commercial, business and creative industries and technology, and to adapt and Leisure Special Policy Area service) uses education or community to modern working practices. (WERLSPA) and Opportunity Areas; use, as demonstrated by vacancy and appropriate marketing for a period of Projected need for new office floorspace 2. North West Economic Development Area at least 12 months. (NWEDA) and Church Street / Edgware 13.2 / The London Office Policy Review (2017) Road Housing Renewal Area; and E. Proposals within the NWEDA involving estimates a need for more than 75,000 office- the loss of space suitable for small and based jobs in Westminster from 2016 to 2041 – 3. Town centre hierarchy. medium enterprises (SMEs) will be resisted. which equates to more than 63,000 jobs over the Redevelopment proposals will be required Plan period (2019-2040). Average employment B. In the NWEDA and the Church Street / to re-provide existing employment densities of 1 worker per 11.3sq m used within the Edgware Road Housing Renewal Area, floorspace, including dedicated space London Office Policy Review would indicate that a range of workspace typologies, that meets the needs of SMEs. including workshops and studios, will be particularly welcome. 1 As of March 2018 – based on 1990 Land Use Survey and pipeline updates 2 Pipeline data, March 2018 3 Central London Quarterly Office Report, Q4, Knight Frank, 2018

72 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

this could translate to a requirement for the delivery 13.3 / Planning for such growth recognises that the growth, will drive demand for future office of over 710,000 sq m of additional office stock in continued loss of office stock from the city at past floorspace growth in Westminster. Westminster to meet demand. However, such rates is unsustainable. This plan therefore provides calculations would assume that additional jobs are stronger protection for existing office floorspace Opportunities for office floorspace growth only created through the provision of new office than has historically been the case, encourages its 13.5 / The West End, along with the Opportunity floorspace. Structural changes in the way offices renewal and modernisation, and seeks additional Areas at Paddington, Victoria and Tottenham are viewed in many growth sectors as places for provision, in accordance with recognition in the Court Road, provide the main opportunities for interaction and collaboration, rather than places to London Plan of the strategic importance of the significant office growth. These areas of the city: go and work at a fixed desk is resulting in a rise in central London office market. agile working practices such as working from home, – are home to existing concentrations of such use hot desking, and shared workspace models – all of Growth sectors by a variety of occupiers (from small spaces in which enable the more efficient use of space. If this 13.4 / The diversity of Westminster’s economy is Mayfair and St James’s, to large floorplates in continues, it will reduce the extent to which new one of its great strengths, positively contributing to Victoria and Paddington); jobs need additional dedicated office floorspace, its resilience. Alongside its world-class retail, arts and significant jobs growth could be delivered – include clusters of activity in growth sectors and entertainment, and hospitality offer, the city is through the refurbishment and upgrading of – such as in the creative industries in Soho; highly attractive to a number of economic sectors outdated stock, to better facilitate such working associated with office activity. The city has more – represent areas of high demand (Paddington in practices through ‘spaceless growth’. The London registered businesses than any other London particular has seen substantial office gains over Office Policy Review also therefore looked at borough in each of the following categories: the period 1997-2018 of over 134,000 sq m);5 alternative scenarios that treats space with lower information and communication, finance and than London average employment densities – are benefiting from investment in public transport insurance, property, and professional, scientific as excess stock – which could reduce demand infrastructure (including the Elizabeth Line and in and technical.4 It is also second only to the City of for additional floorspace in Westminster to the future, potentially Crossrail 2); and London in terms of businesses administration and approximately 213,000 sq m over the period support services. Together, these sectors provide – offer opportunities for future growth and 2016-2041 – or 179,000 sq m over the Plan period. a diverse range of jobs, including in software intensification. As future office jobs growth is likely to come from a development, film production, advertising, combination of new office floorspace and the more accounting, legal services, medical research, real efficient use of existing stock, 445,000 sq m of estate, creative industries, investment funds and additional office floorspace (i.e. a mid-point insurance. Growth in these high value industries, between 179,000 sq m and 710,000 sq m) is which is projected in the London Office Policy considered a reasonable minimum amount of office Review to underpin London’s continued economic floorspace growth to plan for – taking account of likely capacity in commercial areas, and the need to respect Westminster’s townscape and heritage. 4 Inter-Departmental Business Register 2018, ONS 5 Pipeline data, March 2018

73 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

13.6 / Office growth in these locations will be 13.8 / Beyond these key office markets, further regimented working hours, freelancing and small secured through a combination of: provision of new employment space in the NWEDA businesses are all increasing demand for more and the Church Street / Edgware Road Housing flexible workspaces that better facilitate – the refurbishment and expansion of existing stock; Renewal Area can help complement regeneration collaboration and provide ancillary facilities on-site schemes and secure a more sustainable pattern of for workers to help improve their work-life balance. – the development of new office buildings growth. New employment space in these areas, at a greater density than the buildings they where land values are lower, can help support small 13.11 / To enable growing sectors to continue replace; start-up businesses and enhance job opportunities to thrive, new and refurbished employment – the inclusion of additional office floorspace in areas of deprivation. They could also offer scope floorspace should be designed to meet the needs as part of new mixed-use developments; and for a more diverse range of workspaces than the of modern occupiers. This could include providing office orientated activity found in more central dedicated space for hot-desking, informal – the reconfiguration of existing commercial locations. The provision of affordable workspace meetings and collaboration, hosting conferences, spaces, which could include changes of use here, both as a meanwhile use and that provided by and the provision of on-site amenities that helps that are deemed permitted development. managed workspace providers, will be supported. make them attractive to a talented workforce. Such provision elsewhere in Westminster could also Proposals to this effect should be clearly detailed 13.7 / While commercial uses including offices are help support growth in small businesses. on floor plans, with the rationale behind them a strategic function of the CAZ as set out in the detailed in planning or design and access London Plan, it is important to recognise that some 13.9 / Offices are identified in national planning statements. Development should also offer flexible parts of the CAZ, such as much of Pimlico, parts of policy as a town centre use, and recent changes spaces and leasing arrangements that can adapt Knightsbridge, Mayfair, Belgravia, Marylebone and to the use classes order increase flexibility for a to occupier’s changing demands through the all include streets that are wholly or wider range of uses typically found in town centres life-cycle of their business. Doing so is consistent predominantly residential in character. Policy categorised as Class E, to enable them to evolve with national and London planning policy that new therefore seeks to direct offices to those parts of as multifunctional places to work, shop, and spend and emerging business sectors should be planned the CAZ that are of a commercial or mixed-use leisure time. Additional office floorspace provision for through the provision of a range of workspaces. nature, in order to protect local character and will therefore be supported across our highly residential amenity. The dense nature of accessible network of town centres as they Protection of central London’s office function Westminster makes it difficult to accurately and continue to evolve as multi-functional areas 13.12 / Loss of office floorspace from the CAZ risks definitively map clear boundaries of different of commercial activity. undermining its key strategic employment character areas on a city-wide level. As such, functions as defined in the London Plan, and as a judgements will be based on an assessment of the Changing working practices result, the global competitiveness of the London mix of land uses within the vicinity of a 13.10 / Technological advances are clearly economy. We have therefore introduced an Article development site, and any assessments of local resulting in changing working practices, which 4 Direction to ensure that proposals for loss of character within made neighbourhood plans. new and improved workspaces need to respond offices to C3 residential continue to require to. A growth in hot-desking, remote working, less planning permission. Given past levels of loss,

74 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

and the national, international and London London’s visitor economy and the strategic significance of the central London office market, functions of the CAZ. Past levels of permissions to 14. Town centres, high streets further net loss of total office floorspace from the convert or redevelop office floorspace from the CAZ to residential or hotel use will normally be CAZ to hotel use in Westminster, however, justify and the CAZ resisted, subject to some exceptions. only continuing to support such proposals after A. The intensification of town centres, high other reasonable options have been exhausted. streets and the CAZ to provide additional 13.13 / Some parts of the CAZ are largely floorspace for main town centre uses is residential in character but include isolated office The North West Economic Development supported in principle, subject to impact on buildings that have historically come from Area (NEWDA) townscape and heritage. Proposals in conversion of buildings originally built and existing town centres and high streets will 13.15 / Promoting growth and diversification in occupied as residential. Where such office stock enhance and diversify their offer as places economic activity are central to our strategy does not meet the needs of modern ways of to shop, work and spend leisure time. for the future development of the NWEDA. To working, and there is limited scope for it to be ensure growth is not at the expense of local job adapted to do so, conversion back to its original B. Uses that provide active frontages and serve opportunities, while the intensification of the area residential use can provide benefits in terms of visiting members of the public will be required to deliver much needed housing is supported, townscape, local character, and increasing at the ground floor throughout the town re-development proposals should not result in housing supply. centre hierarchy. Uses serving visiting the loss of existing employment floorspace. members of the public will also be supported 13.14 / There may also be instances where existing at first floor level within centres characterised 13.16 / To assess if development proposals would office stock within the CAZ has reached the end by large format, multi-level stores. The use of result in the loss of workspace suitable for SMEs, of its economic life, and there is no interest in upper floors for residential use is supported in applicants should provide details of existing and its continued use for such purposes, or for other principle across all parts of the town centre previous occupiers, how much space they rent / uses that fall within Class E of the Use Classes hierarchy except the International Centres. rented, and at what cost. This will be used alongside Order. In such circumstances, its redevelopment or any information provided by such occupiers on their re-purposing for educational uses, such as new C. All development within the town centre needs in terms of building layout and locational teaching and research facilities, can provide hierarchy will be of a scale, type and format requirements for proximity to supply chains, to economic benefits in terms of improving skills and that reflects and enhances the role and inform re-provision proposals. The provision of contributing to the further growth and clustering of function of the centre within which it co-working space within new developments could knowledge-based industries. Community uses, is proposed. help meet the needs of SMEs, in addition to offering such as new health facilities, can help address other economic benefits, such as facilitating the 1. The International Centres of the West End needs arising from a growing population and clustering of entrepreneurial activity. and Knightsbridge will provide a focal provide significant employment opportunities. point for large format comparison retail, Where there is also no interest in these uses, well supported by complementary town centre designed and managed hotels can support

75 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY D. F. E.

be appropriately managed. will and viability, and vitality centre town enhance will they that be demonstrated where can it hierarchy be supported will centre town the within spaces of empty Temporary for proposals ‘meanwhile use’ in principle. areproposals supported smallincluding stores in redevelopment sizes unit ofretail ofarange provision The throughout the town the centrethroughout hierarchy and supported be will markets extended and New 4. 3. 2.

opportunities for community interaction. interaction. for community opportunities and support opportunities, employment local provide needs, to shopping day day residents’ to meet uses community and ofcommercial amix provide will Centres Local and Major, District workers, and visitors; residents, of needs the to meet uses centre town large format retail and complementary provide will further Retail Clusters CAZ visitor, evening economy; and night-time for the acentre as and hub, cultural and employment aretail, as End’s role West the commercial support uses that of mix awide provide will WERLSPA The floorspace; office new and time, dwell increase that uses customer

I. H. G. employment, or serve local community needs, needs, community local or serve employment, for frontage, provideactive opportunities an maintain that uses Alternative resisted. be will use to residential shops existing of hierarchy, conversion centre town by the largely residential areasWithin not well served use. by retail occupied be to floorspace mof(gross) sq 2,500 least at enable would (commercial, uses that and business service) E for Class proposals hierarchy, including centre the town outside floorspace retail new mof(gross) sq 2,500 than ofmore proposals be required only will for assessments impact Retail (NPPF). Framework Policy Planning set test National in the out sequential the to pass required be will hierarchy centre town the and CAZ ofthe outside fall that sites Only be resisted. will floor ground the from uses centre oftown loss the character, in mixed-use or are commercial that CAZ the of parts the In plan policies. neighbourhood and uses ofland mix existing to the regard having character, mixed-use or a commercial with CAZ ofthe parts the throughout principle in supported be Town also will uses centre be mitigated. can vicinity) inbusinesses the of requirements existing operational surroundingthe area the (including on where impacts any negative CAZ wider as places to shop, work, and spend leisure time. leisure spend and work, to shop, places as ofusers range to afull attractive remain Westminster in centres key commercial ensuring in vital be environment will physical in a healthier investment by are supported and surroundings to their respond that new developments quality High sustainability. to secure long-term their be necessary will buildings, of, existing replacement of, and extension and repurposing ofthe acombination through these of The intensification centres, boundaries. their and ofvacancies, levels ofuses, ofmix terms in centres ofour performance the monitors which 2018, Check our of Health Centre findings Town the on are based All Clusters. Retail CAZ some Local plan include the this through and Centres designated areas Additional Plan. London the of centres these are /Most designated through 14.2 boundary, are shown in Figure 15. CAZ the with along ofthese, locations The Centres. Local and Major, District, Clusters, Retail CAZ WERLSPA, the Knightsbridge, and End West ofthe Centres and socialise. International includesvisit the It work, to shop, ofareas network adiverse provides and ofLondon parts iconic most ofthe some 14.1 town /Westminster’s centre hierarchy includes Town hierarchy centre on residential amenity are mitigated. fully on residential amenity where impacts any negative be supported will ECONOMY EMPLOYMENT AND

76

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

Figure 15: Town Centre Hierarchy

77 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

Growth and diversification Westminster largely buck the trend of nationwide 14.6 / Development across the town centre hierarchy struggles – with healthy, diverse centres that have should be of a scale, type, and nature that reflects the 14.3 / GLA forecasts based on a range of scenarios relatively low levels of vacancy. role of the centre within which it is located (see indicate that despite the growing use of online explanation of each type of centre below). This will shopping and increased space efficiency within 14.5 / To ensure their long-term sustainability, it is ensure the town centre hierarchy is not compromised. stores, over the period from 2015 to 2041, there will important that town centres and high streets can Proposals should also demonstrate how they will be a need for between 284,693 sq m and 399,021 adapt to changing consumer demands and enhance the existing centre and mitigate any sq m (net) additional comparison retail floorspace in behaviours, and the challenges posed by online potential negative impacts, having regard to policies Westminster,6 assuming base expenditure levels retail. Recent revisions to the Use Classes Order 15 Visitor economy and 16 Food, drink and continue. Over the Plan period, this equates to recognise this, by combining a number of different entertainment uses where relevant. Although they 229,944 - 322,286 sq m. Only small-scale growth town centre uses including shops, cafés and provide active frontages and serve visiting members in convenience shopping is expected as retail restaurants, offices, gyms and health centres as of the public, a predominance of uses such as shisha growth will mainly be driven by increased spending Class E (commercial, business and service) uses – bars, betting shops and fast-food takeaways (which from domestic and overseas visitors and workers thereby enabling a shift towards mixed-use and are all classified as sui generis uses) can undermine on comparison goods. The extent and distribution multi-purpose spaces; both within commercial town centre vitality and viability and be detrimental of existing convenience shopping in Westminster parades, and individual units. The focus across our to public health, and should be avoided. For such means demand for additional provision to meet town centres will therefore be on providing a mix of uses, migitating any potential negative effects will the growing resident populations’ day-to-day commercial uses that provide activity at street level, also require the production and the implementation needs are likely to be minimal. and creates a welcoming, attractive and healthy of management plans. environment for consumers to shop, access 14.4 / The increased trend in retail towards larger, services, and spend leisure time, whilst also Unit sizes more successful centres that serve a range of supporting their role as major employment hubs visitors highlights the need to continue to plan 14.7 / Subject to the context of a proposed site and and visitor destinations. Beyond Class E for retail growth in Westminster through the the part of the retail hierarchy it sits within, (commercial, business and service) uses, other town intensification of existing centres and high streets proposals for major new retail and complementary centre uses such as pubs and drinking – where some additional building height can also developments will be expected to provide a range establishments, exhibition spaces, cultural and accommodate office floorspace growth and other of unit sizes – to encourage variety in the shopping leisure uses, can all help support the future success town centre uses. This is also key to why offer and support small business growth. As a of these key clusters of commercial activity. Ground Westminster is anticipated to absorb a significant guide, small shops will generally be considered floor residential however, would break up active proportion of London’s future retail growth. as those under 150 sq m gross retail area. frontages, is not identified as a main town centre Furthermore, the Town Centre Health Check 2018 use in the NPPF, and will therefore be resisted. indicated that town centres and high streets across

6 Consumer Expenditure and Comparison Goods Floorspace

78 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

Meanwhile use and innovation – Berwick Street W1 of Kensington and Chelsea. Comparison retail is the dominant use in these centres, which are 14.8 / Well managed pop-up and meanwhile uses – Rupert Street W1. largely characterised by large format stores, often across the town centre hierarchy can help provided over multiple floors. minimise vacancies while a long-term occupier is 14.10 / Existing markets will be enhanced sought, maintain active frontages, support small through partnership working with traders, 14.13 / The Mayor of London has identified these businesses to test their products, add to the residents and businesses, in accordance with centres as being of high commercial growth vibrancy of an area by attracting new footfall, and our Markets Strategy. Where it has been potential7 and therefore especially suitable for provide community benefits. All of this, combined demonstrated that existing markets are no further large-scale retail growth. To reflect their with an improved public realm, and further longer viable in their existing form and location, role and function, retail provision should be innovation such as the greater use of digital media proposals for comparable re-provision in the predominantly for comparison shopping and within stores, and development of new models vicinity impact on the surrounding area. maintain a strong retail core at ground floor level such as brand showrooms and experience centres and immediately above. Complementary town will help ensure our town centres, and high streets 14.11 / Proposals for new markets will be directed to centre uses that enhance customer experience remain at the cutting edge of the revolution in our town centre hierarchy and commercial areas of and increase dwell time are also supported, retail, and offer experiences that cannot be the wider CAZ – to support the existing retail offer particularly on upper floors. In addition, new and matched by online shopping. and minimise disturbance to the amenity of improved office floorspace on uppers floors can residential neighbourhoods. Management plans support wider jobs growth, and support customer Markets will be sought through legal agreements in order spend within the International Centre from a to minimise any disturbance – through matters such 14.9 / Suitably located, well designed and worker, as well as visitor population. While as the arrangements for setting up and removing managed markets can also add to the diversity, residential use of upper floors can help sustain stalls and collecting refuse. vibrancy and experience of our town centres. They smaller town centres and high streets that do not can be a source of fresh, affordable, and locally generate high footfall, they are not supported International Centres sourced food that supports a healthy diet, within the International Centres to ensure: complement the local retail offer, and like 14.12 / Within the town centre hierarchy, the West meanwhile uses, support small businesses in End and Knightsbridge International Centres – they do not fetter opportunities for these showcasing their products. Existing council-run provide London’s prime retail destinations and commercial centres of international importance markets within Westminster include: offer unparalleled specialist and comparison retail to continue to grow and diversify; of regional and national importance that draws in – the scale of commercial activity in these – Strutton Ground SW1 international visitors. The West End International centres, and their operational requirements, Centre includes Oxford Street, Regent Street and – Tachbrook Street SW1 are not compromised. Bond Street, while Knightsbridge International – Maida Hill W9 (temporary consent) Centre includes Brompton Road and extends beyond the city boundary into the Royal Borough 7 2017 London Town Centre Health Check, – Church Street NW8 Greater London Authority, 2018

79 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

14.14 / Where provided, non-retail uses should The mix of uses also provides rest and refreshment New development will respond to local character enhance and sustain, rather than dilute the centre’s for workers and shoppers during the day. in terms of the scale and nature of the proposed comparison shopping role. Convenience shopping, uses. The nature of activity across the CAZ such as supermarkets, could also dilute the 14.17 / Alongside retail growth, a balanced mix of means that in many instances retail and other comparison shopping offer and present significant complementary leisure, entertainment, food and complementary town centre uses will be welcomed servicing issues and they are therefore discouraged. drink and cultural and employment offers are above the ground floor, though proposals will welcomed to help the West End to grow, not only need to respect that the CAZ is also home to a 14.15 / As the UK’s premier shopping street, the as a global shopping destination, but also as an large residential population. Supporting larger impact of changes to the retail sector will likely be enhanced leisure and employment destination. scale retail and complementary town centre uses most strongly felt in Oxford Street – particularly within these clusters can also help respect the given the existing presence of large format stores 14.18 / Continued growth in a diverse range of character of parts of the wider CAZ that are and the presence of multiple stores by the same commercial uses in the West End will make an predominantly residential. operators. Comprehensive proposals for the future important contribution to meeting Westminster’s of the area that respond to these challenges are employment growth targets. To ensure such growth Queensway/ Westbourne Grove Major Centre therefore set out in the Oxford Street Place Strategy occurs in a manner that maintains and enhances the 14.20 / Queensway / Westbourne Grove Major and Delivery Plan. This includes proposals for an West End’s global reputation, and improvements to Centre is the only Major Centre in Westminster. enhanced public realm befitting the status of the the local environment are secured, we will It is designated as such due to the scale and nature area, that will provide a more attractive shopping continue to work within the West End Partnership of its mix of convenience and comparison retail environment and user experience. (WEP) and with other stakeholders. activity and complementary town centre uses. It has a traditional high street character largely West End Retail and Leisure Special Policy CAZ Retail Clusters surrounded by residential areas and provides an Area (WERLSPA) 14.19 / The CAZ Retail Clusters provide clusters important convenience shopping function to these 14.16 / The WERLSPA covers the wider West End, of retail and other complementary town centre uses local residents. Over the Plan period, new where there is an insatiable demand for new that make a major contribution towards the strategic development should ensure the centre meets the floorspace across all land uses. Beyond the West functions of the CAZ, as set out in the London Plan. needs of its local catchment area through a variety End International Centre lie iconic areas of retail and Most are designated through the London Plan, of commercial space at ground floor, including leisure activity, such as Covent Garden, Leicester though some additional areas have also been shops and services, workplaces, and community Square and Theatreland. Away from the main re-classified from designations in the previous facilities, supported by residential development shopping streets, the land use is highly diverse, City Plan as ‘other centres in the CAZ’ or ‘named above and investment in the public realm. containing a mix of commercial activity, including streets’. All CAZ Retail Clusters meet the needs retail, pubs, bars, restaurants, theatres, cinemas and of a combination of residents, workers and visitors, other entertainment venues. Together, these provide adding to central London’s wide appeal. Catering a wealth of attractions that draw in visitors and make to this wide audience, the offer in some clusters a major contribution to London’s world city status. includes large format retail over multiple floors.

80 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

District Centres Local Centres The Central Activities Zone (CAZ) 14.21 / The District Centres of Praed Street, St 14.22 / There are numerous Local Centres in 14.25 / Whilst not forming a part of Westminster’s Johns Wood High Street, Harrow Road and Church Westminster. They are smaller in scale than District town centre hierarchy, the wider CAZ as defined in Street each have their own distinct character and Centres, playing a more localised role for residents the London Plan covers much of the city. Town challenges that new development will need to and workers. They normally contain a mix of centre uses provide a key element of the mix of respond to. The proximity of Praed Street to the convenience goods shops, local service uses, such as uses within it and contribute to its character and Paddington Opportunity Area is likely to increase pharmacies and launderettes, restaurants, cafés and strategic functions. However, the CAZ is also demand for retail floorspace that is more focussed pubs at ground floor. These centres can provide a home to many local residents and some parts of it on new resident’s needs than the current offer, focal point for community activity, and the availability are also wholly residential in character. To respect which is more orientated towards visitors, tourists of a range of shops and services close to where its many functions, and the need to protect and workers. Such provision could also help serve people live can be particularly important for the less residential amenity, policy support is therefore existing residential areas to the north (around Little mobile. Over the Plan period, these centres will provided for town centre uses within the parts of Venice) that have limited convenience retail maintain a healthy mix of uses that includes a range the CAZ that are of a commercial or mixed-use floorspace nearby. The presence of boutique of convenience shops for local residents to carry out character. Furthermore, this character and function fashion and independent retailers in small format their day-to-day shopping needs, supplemented by will be maintained by resisting the loss of ground stores is fundamental to the character of St John’s complementary uses that enhance the centres’ vitality floor town centre uses from these areas to Wood High Street, although there is a lack of and viability. This includes uses such as banks, advice residential development that would break up leisure and community facilities in the centre. centres, doctor’s surgeries and cafés. commercial frontages, and may result in a poor Harrow Road currently suffers from a comparative living environment. In applying this policy lack of quality and diversity in its retail offer. A 14.23 / New Local Centres have been designated approach, the dense nature of Westminster makes balance therefore needs to be found between through this plan, based on the findings of the it difficult to accurately and definitively map clear protecting the remaining retail and allowing for Town Centre Health Check 2018. They include the boundaries of different character areas on a city- other uses that provide new employment designation of a previously unidentified centre wide level. As such, judgements will be based on opportunities and bring greater activity to the at Elgin Avenue / Chippenham Road, and the an assessment of the mix of land uses within the centre. Church Street provides a range of shops re-classification of small centres in Pimlico and vicinity of a development site, and any and services to local residents and has a long- Fitzrovia that serve a primarily local function. assessments of local character within made established antiques market and theatre that hosts neighbourhood plans. Our approach to community events. A growth in retail, cultural and 14.24 / Beyond the existing town centre hierarchy, requirements for sequential tests and impact community facilities in the area will support we will work with neighbourhood forums to identify assessments – as set out in the NPPF – reflects sustainable growth as regeneration proposals additional retail frontages of importance to that whilst commercial uses should be supported come forward. neighbourhood areas and support neighbourhood throughout the parts of the CAZ with a commercial plan policies to guide development within them. or mixed-use character, the town centre hierarchy should provide the key focus of retail related growth. However, recent revisions to the Use

81 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

Classes Order mean that it may not always be community, and changes to these uses clear if a development proposal will provide retail will therefore also be supported subject to 15. Visitor Economy floorspace, as permission can be sought for a appropriate mitigation of any negative amenity A. We will maintain and enhance the variety of uses under Class E (commercial, impacts (e.g. noise disturbance from a pub or attractiveness of Westminster as a visitor business and service) uses. Where a proposal for drinking establishment). destination, balancing the needs of visitors, more than 2,500 sq m of Class E floorspace is businesses and local communities. proposed outside of the town centre hierarchy 14.27 / Furthermore, outside of the CAZ some with no restrictions on types of future occupier, small undesignated parades of shops and services ARTS AND CULTURAL USES a retail impact test will be required. This will help exist. The Town Centre Health Check 2018 found ensure that any significant out of centre retail that these suffer from: B. All existing arts and cultural uses and uses provision would not be harmful to the retail of cultural significance will be protected function of the town centre hierarchy. – vacancies; and proposals for enhancement will be supported in principle. Proposals for new – poor physical appearance; Existing shops outside of the town arts and cultural uses will be supported in: centre hierarchy – concentrations of uses detrimental to public health 1. Strategic Cultural Areas when they such as hot food takeaways and betting shops. 14.26 / The extent of Westminster’s town centre complement the existing cultural hierarchy means that most residents benefit from offer; and 14.28 / As recent changes to the Use Classes good access to a diverse range of shops and Order have increased flexibility in terms of the use 2. the town centre hierarchy; and services. However, outside of the CAZ there are of premises within such parades, policy also some residential areas that are not within easy 3. commercial areas of the CAZ. supports a range of new uses that can provide walking distance (i.e. 400m or less) of a community benefits (subject to impact on amenity), designated town centre or high street. In such Outside of the CAZ, new arts and cultural to help improve the vitality and viability of these areas, where isolated convenience stores that do uses will be of a scale and nature parades. Piecemeal conversion to residential not form part of a wider parade exist (e.g. a corner appropriate to the local context and of development that breaks up any frontages and shop), they provide a vital function for meeting the benefit to the local community. provides little benefit to the wider community day to day needs of surrounding communities, and meanwhile, will be resisted. can help avoid unnecessary trips by car. Under C. Commercial developments associated recent changes to the Use Classes Order, such with an arts or cultural use should be stores can be converted to any Class E clearly ancillary, maintain its core arts or (commercial, business, and service) use without cultural function which could not otherwise planning permission. Beyond this, some other be achieved, and be of clear and lasting uses falling outside of Class E, such as community benefit to that use. halls or a pub or drinking establishment, may also provide enhanced amenities for the local

82 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

15.1 / The visitor industry forms an important part D. In the exceptional circumstances where G. New hotels and conference facilities will be of Westminster’s economy, creating a significant it is necessary to redevelop a theatre or directed to: number of jobs. Growth in this sector must be cinema, a replacement of equivalent size balanced with the need to protect the liveability and standard will be required. Proposals 1. commercial areas of the CAZ; and of the city and enhance participation of local to improve theatres and cinemas will be communities in cultural activities. 2. town centres that are District Centres encouraged and should have particular or higher in the town centre hierarchy. regard to their heritage designation. Arts and cultural uses H. Applications for extensions and upgrades 15.2 / Attractions, events, businesses and EVENTS IN THE PUBLIC REALM to existing hotels will have regard to institutions in Westminster attract visitors from E. Events in the public realm will benefit the impacts on the wider area. Development around the world and contribute to the appeal city, its people and enterprises. They proposals should improve accessibility and of the city. These include uses that represent should support the character and function enable the extended lifetime of buildings a major part of the nation’s cultural heritage, of the area in which they take place and by incorporating principles and measures such as the Westminster World Heritage Site, must be organised in ways that minimise of sustainable design wherever possible. London Zoo and Lord’s Cricket Ground. the impact on the long-term access Development proposals should, where to open space, amenity of residents, appropriate, reveal the historic significance 15.3 / There are many parts of the city that have businesses and others, and maintain of hotels located within heritage assets. a distinct cultural focus or present a more localised the quality of the public realm. cultural offer. These include Soho for film and PUBLIC TOILETS visual effects, Church Street for art and antiques, HOTELS AND CONFERENCE FACILITIES and Covent Garden for street entertainment. I. Safe, secure and publicly accessible We seek to protect both those uses of national F. Existing hotels will be protected, except toilets will be required in proposals and international significance as well as those where the proposal is in a predominantly that generate a large amount of visitors that serve particularly local communities. residential area and would re-instate an including large retail, leisure and Developments that enhance the visitor experience original residential use, or where the entertainment developments, tourist and provide interesting activities for residents existing use has significant negative attractions and transport interchanges. will be supported in appropriate locations. effects on residential amenity. 15.4 / The designated Strategic Cultural Areas contain a number of renowned arts and cultural uses, which we seek to promote, protect and enhance. The West End Strategic Cultural Area (SCA) has one of the largest clusters of cultural and entertainment uses in the country, including

83 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY ECONOMY EMPLOYMENT AND Strategic Cultural Areas Cultural Strategic 16: Figure 84

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

Theatreland, Trafalgar Square, the National and accessibility or visibility, or other improvements 15.10 / Management plans are required to set National Portrait galleries and . The relating to the operation of the theatre. out how the event will be managed; the length Millbank SCA along the River Thames includes Tate of time necessary for set-up and dismantling of Britain and the Chelsea College of Art and Design. 15.7 / We recognise the difficulties faced in any structures or equipment required; and how In the Knightsbridge SCA a concentration of upgrading theatre facilities to meet the needs of the organisers will cover the cost of, and institutions of international importance includes the theatregoers and the standards they expect, while contribute to any clean-up of public areas and Royal Albert Hall, the Serpentine Gallery, the Royal minimising adverse effects on theatrical heritage. return of functionality of space required after the College of Art and the . We will continue to work closely with the theatre event.9 They should also set out arrangements to industry and other agencies to seek to resolve these work with the police, fire and ambulance services 15.5 / We recognise that commercial activities, issues, whilst ensuring that Westminster’s unique as part of the event, where appropriate. such as cafés and restaurants, can help arts and heritage is maintained. We will continue to consult cultural facilities to attract additional visitors and with The Theatres Trust and the Society of London 15.11 / Proposals for temporary events will be generate income to fund their core activities. Theatres on applications relating to theatres. assessed based on the short-term impacts of the However, these activities should not dilute the event itself, but also the cumulative impacts of all primary arts or cultural function of the venue, Events in the public realm events in the local area – including road closures harm the character of the use or compromise and residential amenity. 15.8 / The public realm is an important arena for an its operation. We only support these ancillary increasingly diverse range of functions, activities when they are part of a long-term Hotels and conference facilities experiences and cultural activities for the nation as strategy to maintain and enhance the arts or a whole. These range from international sporting 15.12 / Any significant decline in the extent of cultural value of the venue. Management plans events, bespoke art installations, Armed Forces visitor accommodation in Westminster would may be required to mitigate any potential commemorative events, to the Lord Mayor’s have significant impacts on strategically negative impacts of these activities. annual procession, Royal celebration events, important central London activities and levels Pride London and a rich variety of other of employment. Therefore, a strong level of 15.6 / Given their valuable economic and commercial, civic and cultural events. protection is given to existing hotels. reputational contribution to Westminster as a cultural centre, replacement theatres and cinemas 15.9 / Although many events will not require formal 15.13 / The CAZ is the centre of commerce and may be required to be provided within a stated planning permission, we intend to ensure our activity in London, served by excellent national period to ensure the continuity of the use. Any planning functions are aligned with other powers and international public transport connections. replacement theatre or cinema should seat at least and responsibilities in managing events safely and It is therefore an appropriate location for hotels the same number of people as the original and effectively, with any negative impacts on the built and conference facilities. Hotels and conference be fully equipped to cater for live theatrical environment minimised and mitigated.8 productions. A reduction in seating capacity may be allowed as part of cinema or theatre 9 The Royal Parks and Westminster’s Paddington Recreation refurbishments, if this is necessary to improve Ground utilise management plans for temporary events which 8 Our emerging Active Events Protocol should be consulted could be used as a template for other management plans.

85 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

facilities may also be appropriate in all town Public toilets centres (except local centres), where they enhance 15.16 / Publicly-accessible toilets provide an 16. Food, drink and entertainment their role and function and there are no adverse important facility for residents, workers and A. Proposals for food and drink and impacts on the wider area, including on residential visitors. They contribute to keeping London’s entertainment uses will be of a type properties. When assessing proposals for new streets clean, and reduce the risk of anti-social and size appropriate to their location. hotels, hotel extensions and conference facilities, behaviour. They are especially important for some The over-concentration of those uses will be we will take into account the site location, groups, such as the elderly, families with children, further prevented where this could harm relationship to neighbouring uses, scale of or those with certain health conditions. residential amenity, the vitality and character accommodation and facilities proposed (the of the local area or the diversity that defines number of bedrooms and nature of other services 15.17 / For the purposes of this policy, large retail the role and function of the town centre. the hotel offers), highways and parking. Proposals developments are those having 1,000 sq m of gross Applications for entertainment uses will for extensions and upgrades to existing hotels will floorspace or more. Large entertainment uses are need to demonstrate wider benefits for the also consider how the sustainability and those having 500 sq m of gross floorspace or more. local community, where appropriate. accessibility of the building can be improved. The toilets should be maintained at the applicant’s When located within heritage assets and where expense as part of the overall maintenance of any PROTECTION OF PUBLIC HOUSES appropriate, development should better reveal the development. Toilets accessible to the public historic significance of the building. B. Public houses will be protected throughout should be clearly sign-posted within developments Westminster, except where there is no to ensure they are easily located and the needs of 15.14 / There is a need to ensure a balance reasonable prospect of its continued use less mobile people must be taken into account in between hotel and residential uses so that they as a public house, as evidenced by the design of new toilets. Facilities should be well- can all function well, while also ensuring a good appropriate marketing for a period of at managed, and their opening hours should reflect quality of life for residents. Particularly large or least 18 months. Replacement of ancillary the needs of the area. intensively used hotels or conference facilities spaces on upper floors to public houses, are often not compatible with predominantly such as function rooms or accommodation, residential streets, because the amount of activity may be acceptable where it can be they generate can cause amenity problems. satisfactorily demonstrated that loss of this floorspace will not compromise the viability 15.15 / The change of use of hotels to residential or function of the public house. use will be encouraged where the existing hotel is not purpose built and is demonstrated to be HOT FOOD TAKEAWAYS AND DELIVERIES causing adverse effects on residential amenity. C. Proposals for hot food takeaways within 200m walking distance from the entrance of a primary or secondary school will not be supported.

86 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

16.1 / Westminster has a vibrant entertainment be taken into account. Applicants will be required D. Provision for food deliveries from sector, including a huge range of food and drink to produce a management plan setting out the restaurants or cafés, including facilities for uses. This plays a vital role in supporting the steps identified as a result of the assessment. platform-based delivery, will only be visitor economy, providing local employment Implementation of management plans will be supported where it is demonstrated that opportunities and contributing to London’s world- secured by planning condition and / or legal the facilities do not result in a change of city status. Given the recent changes in the Use agreements as appropriate. use to hot food takeaway or other uses Classes Order we cannot control growth of cafes including composite / sui generis uses. and restaurants that are now in a new Class E. The 16.3 / The cumulative impact of multiple food, focus of this policy will therefore be on other uses drink and entertainment uses in a particular area E. Purpose-built facilities for platform-based such as takeaways, shisha smoking bars and other can have a negative impact on the functioning deliveries will only be supported when they drinking establishments that are sui generis uses. and use of an area and can negatively impact are purposely designed to limit the adverse Much of the entertainment sector is concentrated residential amenity. We will therefore prevent impacts of this type of delivery mechanism. in the West End, but clusters also exist in other the over-concentration of these uses and require parts of the city, such as Edgware Road and proposals to make sure any negative impacts are SHISHA SMOKING Queensway / . Proposals for the managed (applying the Agent of Change principle). provision of these mix of uses within the WERLSPA F. The use of premises and outdoor areas for will be supported provided they do not lead to 16.4 / Applicants proposing new entertainment shisha smoking in exceptional circumstances over-concentration owing to the impacts on uses will set out in their planning statements the may be permitted within the town centre servicing and amenity. benefits that the local community will gain from hierarchy, provided any unacceptable these uses. Arrangements may be formalised impacts on public health and the amenity of 16.2 / The impacts of food, drink and through a legal agreement, where appropriate. the surrounding area (including residential entertainment uses on the surrounding area need Local community functions provided by new properties, the pedestrian environment and to be carefully managed. Proposals for food, drink entertainment uses could include discounted the operational requirements of existing and entertainment uses should be accompanied access to space for community functions, or the businesses in the vicinity) are adequately by an assessment of development impacts, which provision of learning and training for the local mitigated. Applicants will therefore be should be proportionate to the likely impact of the community associated with the use. required to demonstrate how any negative proposal. This is based on the principle that larger impacts of the proposal can be mitigated scale proposals, and those with later opening Protection of public houses through the implementation of a hours, will be likely to have disproportionately management plan for the premises. 16.5 / While we acknowledge that under the new larger impacts on surrounding areas. These Use Class Order public houses and other drinking impacts will also be felt more strongly within establishments such as wine bars are sui generis, smaller commercial areas, given their role and this policy specifically applies only to public function. The type of use proposed, as well as houses. Although the public health risks of alcohol the concentration of uses in proximity, will also consumption are recognised, public houses can

87 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

play an important role as social hubs at the heart of uses where it can be satisfactorily demonstrated that delivery platforms, however, we will ensure that any communities, add to the diversity of commercial loss of this floorspace will not compromise the negative impacts are minimised and managed. We areas, and make a positive contribution towards viability or function of the public house. will therefore seek to control numbers and hours of townscape and local identity. They include many operation of food deliveries through planning premises that have Best Bar None10 status. The Hot food takeaways and deliveries conditions to ensure any such services are ancillary protection of public houses is supported by both to the primary use of the premises and will seek to 16.7 / Reducing health inequalities is a priority national policy and the London Plan.11 promote use of sustainable delivery options. for us. Although being overweight has different causes, evidence12 shows a link between the 16.6 / Latest records indicate there are 439 16.9 / Westminster’s dense pattern of development consumption of hot food takeaways and obesity. public houses in Westminster, of which 87% are means that it is unlikely that there will be anywhere We resist new hot food takeaways opening up in conservation areas and 28% are listed. They within its boundaries that are suitable for stand- around schools, to protect our children from the can support the economy by providing direct alone food preparation facilities supporting these negative consequences of consuming junk food. employment, supporting food suppliers and the platforms given their likely amenity impacts, Due to the high density of schools in Westminster, brewing industries, and helping make Westminster a particularly in terms of noise and odour. a buffer of 200m is appropriate to allow some desirable place in which to work and do business. growth in the sector in the right locations. Despite this, they are facing increasing threat of Shisha smoking closure. Recent monitoring data shows that over 16.8 / In recent years there has been significant 16.10 / Shisha is a flavoured tobacco smoked recent years there has been an increasing loss growth in mobile technology-based platforms through a waterpipe or hookah. Shisha smoking of floorspace for drinking establishments. These used to order hot food. This often leads to negative creates smoke containing chemicals which are include venues aimed at specific communities (such impacts on the amenity of residents and businesses linked to several life limiting diseases, including as LGBTQI+), the decline of which we seek to halt arising from the noise and other disturbance from cancer, heart disease and respiratory disease, through the introduction of this policy and by working large numbers of delivery agents outside food as recognised by Public Health England. Smoke in partnership with community groups, landlords, the premises or elsewhere. Hot food takeaways fall free legislation means it cannot be smoked Mayor of London and other partners. This policy under a different use class to restaurants and cafés indoors in public places, but a licence for outdoor essentially seeks to halt the loss of public houses and by their nature, can result in increased smoking is not required. Shisha smoking is often a through incorporating flexibility that differentiates disturbance as a result of motor vehicles, mopeds social activity, with people sharing waterpipes. between active public house use and ancillary upper and motorbikes taking deliveries of food This means that the outdoor areas of the premises floor space to allow the latter to be changed to other to customers. It is becoming increasingly offering shisha smoking are likely to be occupied commonplace for restaurants and cafés to offer by people wanting to smoke this type of tobacco. takeaway services with the rise of platform-based Although smoking any type of tobacco and under 10 Best Bar None is an accreditation scheme promoting responsible management and operation of alcohol delivery options. We recognise the convenience of any circumstances is harmful, when many people related premises. smoke together and in the same area, the public 11 See paragraph 92 of the NPPF; and Policy HC7 Protecting 12 London Plan topic paper: Hot food takeaways, health risks increase. Smoking material and public houses of the London Plan. Mayor of London, 2018 burners needed for shisha smoking and secondary

88 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

smoke from water pipes and fuel sources also making it more difficult for people to get around pose a health risk to non-smokers present in the city. We will use planning conditions to seek to and deliver new infrastructure. New the area. We are committed to managing the control the positioning and the numbers of tables facilities will be of a nature and scale to concentration and impacts of any uses detrimental and chairs used for outdoors shisha smoking, the meet identified need and be sufficiently to public health throughout the city. opening hours of the premises and the flexible to meet the requirements of management of waste disposal. Management providers as they may change over time. 16.11 / An increased amount of outdoor shisha arrangements will be required to safeguard premises are emerging in the city, often as residential amenity, minimise disturbance and B. Where new facilities are provided they ancillary uses within cafés and restaurants that negative impacts on the operational requirements should be designed to accommodate then incrementally expand. Estimates indicate of existing businesses in the vicinity and manage a range of community uses wherever that from the period 2010 – 2013, the number of any negative impacts in the environment. The possible. The council will strongly premises more than doubled, from 60, to more approach to new shisha is necessarily different encourage the co-location of facilities than 130.13 Such premises are distributed across the from, for example, drink and entertainment uses and access for appropriate organisations city, with notable concentrations in Edgware Road. because shisha smoking is not a licensable activity and the local community. and does not therefore come within the control of 16.12 / The use of premises and outdoor areas for statutory licensing regime. As such, any necessary EXISTING INFRASTRUCTURE shisha smoking is a sui generis use, meaning that control must be exerted through the planning C. Existing community facilities and floorspace where an applicant seeks to change the use of process. Given the amenity and public health will be protected other than where it can be premises or outdoor areas for shisha smoking, impacts of shisha smoking, we are lobbying for demonstrated that either: planning permission will be required. increased licensing powers to control the proliferation of shisha bars. 1. the loss or relocation is necessary 16.13 / In addition to its direct health impact, to enable service provision to be outdoor shisha smoking, which often occurs late at reconfigured, consolidated, upgraded, night, can harm amenity through increased noise, or delivered more effectively as part odour and fumes, particularly in areas with large 17. Community infrastructure of a published strategy to improve concentrations of these uses. This, in turn, can also and facilities services and meet identified needs; or have an impact on quality of life and public health. NEW INFRASTRUCTURE 2. there is no demand for an alternative A loss of retail units for shisha smoking can result social and community use for that facility in a change of character and function of established A. New community infrastructure and facilities or floorspace, evidenced by vacancy shopping areas. The use of outdoor tables, chairs, will be supported where there is an and appropriate marketing for at least and charcoal burners can also block pavements identified present or future need. The 18 months. council will use its Infrastructure Delivery Plan alongside other strategies to plan for 13 Reducing the Harm of Shisha: towards a strategy for Westminster, 2017

89 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

17.2 / Community facilities and infrastructure the changing needs of the city, and to mitigate D. Where a reduction in community floorspace can be either publicly or privately owned and/or impacts on existing services, as Westminster is deemed acceptable, other ancillary uses operated. Wherever possible, they should have grows and changes. We also want to be sure that will be permitted where they support the shared or extended use to serve the wider new facilities are only provided where they are continued function of the main community, for example, the use of school sports really needed to avoid facilities being developed community use. facilities beyond the school day for the wider where there is not an identified need, resulting in community. Shared use of facilities can encourage development sites being under-optimised. We will E. Within designated town centres, where the active lifestyles, help ensure the effective use take into account the role of the proposed facility loss of community facilities is deemed of resources and land, reduce maintenance and beyond just local need – some facilities have a acceptable, replacement uses with an management costs, and encourage joined-up and wide range of functions including at a regional, active frontage will be prioritised. For other coherent service delivery. national or even international level, for example, sites in the CAZ, other town centre uses will certain educational or medical institutions. be supported in principle. In all other cases, 17.3 / Westminster’s community infrastructure residential use will be preferred. needs will be kept under review to ensure they Existing community infrastructure continue to be met. We will work with providers 17.5 / We accept that demands change over time of local services to review existing provision, to 17.1 / Community infrastructure and facilities are and this may result in changes to the pattern of identify future needs, and ensure the most efficient integral to supporting people’s everyday lives, service delivery. To be resilient to such changes, use of land and other assets across the public being used by residents, workers and visitors, and community facilities need to operate in buildings estate in delivering services, with particular use are a vital resource to support successful places that meet the modern needs of the service and made of the Infrastructure Delivery Plan (IDP). We and communities. Community infrastructure and those who use them. This may mean that will utilise other council strategies to inform the IDP facilities consist of: co-location of a number of different community and deliver required infrastructure including our facilities within a single site or building is existing Active Westminster Strategy, our – Health facilities e.g. hospitals, GP surgeries. appropriate, alongside rationalisation of floorspace emerging Playing Pitches and Built Facilities to facilitate this. A good example of this is the – Education facilities e.g. schools, nurseries, Strategies, School Organisation and Investment recent refurbishment of Seymour Leisure Centre universities and colleges. Strategy and the Health and Wellbeing Strategy, in Marylebone, which has combined swimming as well as documents prepared by other – Sports and leisure facilities e.g. leisure centres, facilities with a gym, sports hall and climbing infrastructure providers such as the NHS swimming pools, outdoor playing pitches and centre. There are also plans to co-locate a library and Thames Water. Multi-Use Games Areas. facility at the site to create a community hub. – Cultural facilities e.g. theatres, museums and New community infrastructure 17.6 / Nevertheless, we will only accept a art galleries. 17.4 / New development will place pressure on rationalisation of community floorspace if it is part – Social facilities e.g. meeting halls, public existing community infrastructure and facilities of a published strategy and brings overall benefits houses, libraries and places of worship. and these must continue to be provided to meet to the local community or is necessary to deliver a

90 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

new or improved facility. It should not compromise the core function of any part of the facility. We 18. Education and skills initiatives; and will encourage (and where appropriate, lead) A. The council will support the provision of new 2. for larger schemes, the submission coordinated joint work by public service providers or expanded primary and secondary schools and implementation of an Employment to ensure the most effective use of landholdings, and further education facilities, to meet the and Skills Plan. identifying shared opportunities to improve the needs of a changing population and enhance range and efficiency of services through a “One education provision. Public Estate” approach. Education B. The improvement and expansion of 17.7 / There may be some cases where commercial 18.1 / Current pupil projections14 indicate a decline Westminster’s world-class higher educational uses operating alongside community infrastructure in demand for primary school places, and a institutions will be supported will help the function and viability of the facility, such growing demand for secondary school places in principle, in recognition of the economic as an on-site café. Such uses will be supported in Westminster. However, demand will continue benefits they provide to Westminster, London where they are ancillary to the main community use to fluctuate over the Plan period as the population and the UK. This includes proposals for the and the requirements of clause C are met. grows, children move through the school system, upgrading of existing, and provision of new, families move in and out of the city, and schools teaching and research facilities and the 17.8 / There may be cases where there is no are expanded or contracted. In the short term, provision of purpose-built student housing. continued need or demand for the provision our school expansion programme, along with of community facilities. Where this may be the additional capacity being created through the C. Where new and additional educational case, the early marketing of vacant community relocation of Marylebone Boys Sixth Form to facilities are provided, proposals for their use floorspace to assist in identifying any alternative Paddington, will meet demand for additional outside of core operation hours for occupiers who could make a good public service secondary school places in the city.15 Beyond this, community or recreational use will be use of the site is strongly encouraged. A demand will continue to be monitored as pupil supported in principle. comparable market value when undertaking projections are updated, and additional capacity a marketing exercise will be based on the facility planned for in accordance with our annual School D. Major developments will contribute to being public, regardless of whether it has most Organisation and Investment Strategy. improved employment prospects for local recently been occupied by a private social / residents. In accordance with the council’s community occupier. Planning Obligations and Affordable Housing SPD, this will include:

1. financial contributions towards employment, education and skills

14 Greater London Authority, 2018 15 See School Organisation and Investment Strategy and Infrastructure Delivery Plan

91 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

18.2 / Currently there is a lack of suitable and Skills developments in delivering benefits to local available land for the construction of new schools residents. Further details of how financial 18.6 / Whilst Westminster has the highest within the city, though there may be opportunities to contributions will be calculated, when Employment number of jobs of any London borough, it adapt the existing school portfolio in response to and Skills Plans will be sought and what they relies heavily on in-commuting of skilled changing demands for different age groups. Further should include, will be provided in our Planning workers.16 As the heart of a world city, this will unidentified opportunities could also emerge over Obligations and Affordable Housing SPD. continue to be the case over the Plan period – as the Plan period. new job opportunities continue to attract workers from across the south east and beyond. However, 18.3 / The presence of world-class higher educational alongside this, it is important that Westminster institutions, including London School of Economics, 19. Digital infrastructure, residents, particularly those from disadvantaged Imperial College London, and King’s College London, backgrounds, fully benefit from the diverse information and communications form an integral part of the character of central London. range of opportunities economic growth brings. They provide a significant source of employment, technology Removing barriers to local employment can improve contribute towards a highly skilled workforce, support A. Investment in digital and resident’s life chances, help support continued the clustering of the knowledge economy, and are telecommunications infrastructure will be business growth, and reduce traffic movements. internationally recognised for their research supported. The public benefits of proposals reputations. Such benefits help London compete on a for new infrastructure will be weighed 18.7 / We will therefore use the opportunities offered global stage as a location of choice for business. against impacts on local character, heritage by new development, in both the construction and assets, or the quality of the public realm. operational phases, to improve residents’ access to 18.4 / To maintain and enhance their international skills, training and employment. This will include standing, and continue to attract the best talent B. Major new developments and infrastructure seeking financial contributions towards employment, to London, higher educational institutions are likely to projects will be designed to enable the education and skills initiatives, and on larger need to upgrade, and / or provide additional teaching installation of the most up-to-date schemes, requiring apprenticeships and job and research facilities over the Plan period. Such standards of digital connectivity and ensure placements in accordance with targets set out in an investment is supported in principle – in recognition easy maintenance and future upgrading as agreed Employment and Skills Plan. Securing job of the benefits this will bring to the wider economy. technologies and standards improve. placements within the end use of a development, rather than solely in the construction phase will be 18.5 / To maximise the community benefits of new C. Major commercial developments will important to ensure residents fully benefit in the educational uses, applicants are encouraged to make provide a communal chamber on-site for long term from the diverse opportunities economic facilities available and adaptable for public use, where telecommunications equipment or make growth brings. The Westminster Employment this does not compromise their primary purpose and an appropriate contribution to the cost of Service17 will provide a key point of contact to assist operational needs. Multiple purpose use of such providing one nearby. facilities can help make efficient use of scarce space and overcome any deficiencies in dedicated 16 Local Economic Assessment, 2014 community space within a locality. 17 westminster.gov.uk/employment

92 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

19.2 / The continued growth and success of 19.5 / Equipment that is no longer required should D. Opportunities for co-location, shared Westminster’s economy is dependent on securing also be removed in accordance with Ofcom’s facilities and innovations such as smart access to digital infrastructure and ICT services of Electronic Code of Practice, to reduce clutter and street furniture should be explored where the highest specification available that is future- improve the experience of pedestrians and other new digital and telecommunications proofed to enable upgrades as technologies and highway uses and the quality of the public realm. infrastructure is proposed and proposals standards improve. To ensure end users can for standalone apparatus should exercise choice regarding technologies and demonstrate that such opportunities suppliers, applicants are encouraged to engage 20. Soho Special Policy Area have been exhausted. Proposals on the with a range of providers in the design of major A. Development in the Soho Special Policy highway should also demonstrate that it developments. To minimise disruptive street Area will reflect its unique character and is not feasible to locate on existing works, major commercial development will provide function and demonstrate how it respects, buildings or other structures. or contribute towards communal entry chambers protects and enhances the existing scale that enable the quick and easy installation of new and grain of the built environment and the ICT services to meet occupiers’ needs. unique mixture of uses present there. 19.1 / The last twenty years have seen huge technological advances resulting in a shift in 19.3 / Although future investment in digital B. The following uses will be supported: ways of working and significant growth in infrastructure and ICT is vital and of clear public technology-based sectors of employment. benefit, it must be provided and coordinated in a 1. small and medium enterprise (SME) Access to high quality digital infrastructure and manner that respects Westminster’s rich heritage. workspace, particularly in the information and communications technology (ICT) New apparatus such as boxes that enable the roll creative industries; are increasingly viewed as a vital component of out of 5G should be sited away from listed 2. specialist retailing; modern life – by residents, visitors, and a wide buildings wherever possible, but applicants should range of businesses. The government’s UK Digital also seek to minimise unnecessary and visually 3. housing that meets the needs of those Strategy sets out the importance of providing obtrusive clutter of the public realm. working in the area; world class digital infrastructure to improve 4. LGBTQI+ venues; connectivity, and the government is investing 19.4 / Proposals for new standalone apparatus £1 billion to accelerate investment in, and roll-out will only be supported where all reasonable 5. new live music venues; of, next generation digital infrastructure, options for sharing existing facilities, or the use 6. physical, social and green infrastructure; including 5G and full fibre broadband.18 of less obtrusive locations, have been ruled out as impracticable. It is recognised that there are 7. small-scale hotels; and some forms of telecommunications infrastructure 8. food, drink and entertainment uses, where co-location or sharing of facilities may not subject to clause C. be an option.

18 UK Digital Strategy, 2017

93 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY ECONOMY EMPLOYMENT AND Figure 17: Soho Special Area Policy Figure 94

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

20.2 / Soho Special Policy Area (SPA) has a 20.5 / Changes of use to new drinking C. Proposals for new drinking establishments cosmopolitan character, density and diversity of establishments will be assessed in terms of their will be considered with regard to their uses. It functions as a place to live, work and visit, cumulative impact on Soho’s streets. This will cumulative impact on the character of with all these roles taking place within its dense ensure that the mix and balance of uses in the area Soho’s streets and mix of uses. network of narrow streets, and often within the is maintained by preventing over-concentrations of same buildings. Soho has a distinctive scale of these uses. Although already prevalent in Soho, D. The scale and setting of Soho and Golden uses, typically smaller than elsewhere in the West further clustering of these uses can have a squares will be protected. The function of End, typified by the small scale of its individual detrimental impact on the area’s overall mix and these squares and of St. Anne’s Churchyard commercial units at street level. The dense nature can lead to incremental changes to its character. as green spaces will also be protected and of the urban fabric lends itself to smaller enhanced. Other opportunities to improve floorplates, which typically support tenants from 20.6 / Applicants should address this issue in their the public realm should be explored in specialist and smaller scale industries, particularly Planning Statement and should consider both the development proposals. the cultural, creative and visitor sectors and for surrounding uses at ground floor level and the SMEs. Smaller units and flexible workspaces to existing servicing arrangements in the vicinity of encourage this type of use will be supported. the site. Noise and amenity impacts will also be 20.1 / Soho has been a mixed residential and carefully considered, especially where there are commercial district since the mid-18th century, 20.3 / Where development proposals involve the residential uses on upper floors in the immediate when it was popular with artisans, traders and amalgamation of units behind retained façades, vicinity of the site. immigrants, often fleeing conflict in continental particularly at ground floor level, they will be Europe.19 In the 19th and 20th centuries, Soho considered in the context of Soho’s existing scale 20.7 / Although hotels are generally considered further developed as a centre for the creative arts, and grain of development. Where proposals seek acceptable within the CAZ, within Soho, smaller scale particularly the British film industry. By the 1960s, to reduce the duplication of cores in adjoining or ‘boutique’ hotels are more appropriate due to Soho had become a focal point of London’s music buildings, for example to improve energy Soho’s existing character. Large-scale hotel facilities scene, alongside its boutique shops and other efficiency, they may be justified provided the will not generally be considered acceptable within bohemian culture, and has become a home for ability of the commercial floorspace to be let to the SPA, as their larger floorplate requirements are London’s LGBTQI+ community. The area was several individual occupiers is not inhibited. likely to erode local character through the loss of designated a conservation area in 1969. Since the smaller scale existing units, which will also displace 1960s, Soho has become a major tourist attraction 20.4 / It is important to maintain the mix of uses other commercial uses, as well as having potential and has become more commercialised. It still has a present in Soho to protect local character. This amenity and environmental impacts. Larger floorplate unique role to play within the wider West End and policy aims to promote a range of uses that reflect units are generally at odds with Soho’s existing scale it is important that its distinctive qualities are Soho’s cosmopolitan and varied nature. Soho has and grain. We consider small-scale hotels, in a Soho conserved and enhanced. a diverse range of retailers, many of which form context, to be those of fewer than 100 rooms. specialist clusters within the area, such as: fashion and tailoring; music and the arts; food; and those 19 Soho Heritage and Character Assessment, 2018 catering to the LGBTQI+ community.

95 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY Mayfair and James’sFigure St. 18: Mayfair Special Area Policy ECONOMY EMPLOYMENT AND 96

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

20.8 / Soho has a range of housing stock, meaning it Square and Golden Square are designated London attraction for international visitors and investors and is a place where people can both live and work. Squares that perform an important heritage function. have a broader significance for London’s economy. Proposals for new housing in Soho will demonstrate As a result, their setting and scale should be that they are able to meet the needs of those working respected in development proposals. 21.2 / Both areas are home to niche and in the area by contributing to the range of stock bespoke retailers. Examples can be found on Jermyn including through the provision of affordable housing. 20.11 / Alongside policies in this Plan, development Street and the arcades linking it to Piccadilly. Jermyn proposals within the Soho SPA will be assessed Street is renowned for shirt makers, grooming 20.9 / Soho is also a centre with a high against the Soho and Chinatown Conservation Area products and accessories including hatters and shoe concentration of LGBTQI+ venues and they remain Audit, supplementary planning documents, specific makers amongst other uses, which are also found in an important aspect of its character. The number studies and the Soho Neighbourhood Plan. the neighbouring streets and arcades, such as wine of LGBTQI+ venues in Westminster has declined merchants, tobacconists and other niche uses. by 46% between 2006 and 2018, representing a loss of 16 unique venues.20 It is therefore important 21.3 / Mayfair is the historic centre of the art that we seek to retain existing, and encourage 21. Mayfair and St. James’s market in London and the UK. It is home to many new, LGBTQI+ venues so that Soho remains a Special Policy Areas commercial art galleries, the internationally centre for the LGBTQI+ community. Existing renowned Sotheby’s and Bonham’s auction A. Developments in the Mayfair and St. LGBTQI+ venues will be protected through this houses on New Bond Street, and the Royal James’s Special Policy Areas (SPAs) that plan and new venues are explicitly encouraged Academy of Arts on Piccadilly. Most of the retail enhance the character and function of both within the SPA to ensure Soho retains its status as galleries are now found in the southern part of areas as centres for the art trade and luxury a centre of LGBTQI+ culture, retail and nightlife. Mayfair, with clusters on Cork Street and parts retail, through the provision of additional of nearby Bruton, Bond and Albermarle streets. floorspace for use as art galleries, antique 20.10 / Soho’s green spaces are rare and formalised The areas character and function are highly trading or luxury retail, is encouraged. green space only exists in Soho Square, Golden influenced by the art trade, with galleries being Square and St Anne’s Churchyard. It is therefore a long-standing feature and draw of the area important that their function as green spaces is – attracting collectors from all over the world. 21.1 / Together Mayfair and St. James’s are protected and enhanced where possible, with further prestigious locations with long standing opportunities explored for providing green 21.4 / Art galleries have also been in existence international recognition, and a distinctive pattern of infrastructure and enhanced public realm in new in St. James’s for several hundred years. Today specialist uses including art galleries, antiques development. Public realm improvements should the area contains a number of small independent traders, and luxury retail. They also have a rich implement the findings and recommendations of the businesses employing specialist and skilled visual townscape and history, with grand formal Soho Public Realm Study (2014). Furthermore, Soho workers, that attract clients from all over the world. buildings including palaces and formal open The internationally renowned Christie’s Auction spaces. While their heritage value is recognised House is located in the centre of St James’s, through wider conservation area designations, the 20 LGBTQ+ Cultural Infrastructure in London: Night Venues, surrounded by commercial art galleries. UCL Urban Laboratory, 2006-present pattern of land use within the SPAs acts as an

97 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY Harley Street Special Policy Area Policy Special Street Harley 19: Figure ECONOMY EMPLOYMENT AND 98

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

21.5 / Proposals for new development in either area 22.3 / We will seek to protect existing and support should demonstrate that it respects and 1. There is no reasonable prospect of its new medical floorspace and complementary complements the area’s character and function, continued use for medical use or facilities in the area to ensure continuation and given their contribution to central London’s global complementary facilities, as evidenced extension of the benefits of the clustering of these appeal. Proposals for additional gallery floorspace, by vacancy and appropriate marketing uses. Complementary facilities include antiques trading, and luxury, bespoke and niche for a period of at least 12 months; and physiotherapy and health training services. The retail, are therefore welcomed. In seeking to protect nature of treatments provided in Harley Street 2. The proposal is for high quality existing character, it is recognised that existing art means that ancillary patient and family residential development. galleries and antique trading uses may be able to accommodation is sometimes required change to a range of Class E (commercial, business within or near medical institutions. Therefore and service) uses without planning permission. accommodation specifically for patients and their 22.1 / Harley Street is a national and international families may also be considered a complementary centre for medical excellence and has been the facility, but will be restricted to such occupancy home to a wide range of medical disciplines for through use of legal agreements. 22. Harley Street Special nearly 200 years. It has more than 5,000 medical Policy Area practitioners,21 adds to the economic diversity of 22.4 / In common with many parts of the the city, and provides education and training CAZ, the area is also home to some residential A. Development in the Harley Street Special services. The clustering of medical uses in the properties. Where it can be demonstrated Policy Area will support and enhance its area is specifically recognised in the London Plan through appropriate marketing evidence (see the continued role as an international centre and its proximity to, and links with, the medical glossary) that space is no longer needed for medical of medical excellence, complemented research cluster around Euston gives it a particular or support services, residential use may therefore be primarily by residential use. strategic significance. acceptable. Legal agreements will be used to ensure any accommodation cannot be converted to general B. Proposals for additional floorspace to 22.2 / The townscape and heritage value of the purpose short-term accommodation, to ensure the upgrade or provide new medical facilities, area is recognised through the wider conservation area’s existing function and character is not eroded. patient care and patient accommodation, area designation. As such, the impact of will be supported subject to impact on development proposals on this setting will be an townscape and heritage. important consideration. The continued evolution of the Special Policy Area (SPA) to meet the needs 23. Savile Row Special C. Medical facilities that do not fall within Class of modern medical practices is supported to E (commercial, business and service uses) Policy Area ensure the area continues to attract the world’s as a result of being attached to the A. Development in the Savile Row Special best medical talent. residence of the consultant or practitioner, Policy Area (SPA) will complement and will be protected, unless: enhance its continued role as an 21 harleystreetmedicalarea.com/aboutus

99 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY Savile Row Special Policy Area Policy Special Row Savile 20: Figure ECONOMY EMPLOYMENT AND 100

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

uses complementary to the predominant tailoring permissions can be an effective way of securing international centre of excellence for uses in the area. Some office space is also further clustering of tailoring uses, whilst still bespoke tailoring, supported by interspersed throughout the area, meaning offering flexibility over the future use of such space. complementary Class E (commercial, alongside its tailoring function, the area includes a business and service uses) floorspace that range of Class E (commercial, business and service 23.4 / New retail development within the SPA that is respects townscape and heritage value. uses), reflecting its location within the CAZ. The rich small scale, in the fashion industry and offers townscape and heritage value of the area is bespoke services, will complement the role and B. New bespoke tailoring uses will be supported recognised through conservation area designations. character of the area, and is encouraged where it throughout the SPA, particularly at lower floor would not result in the net loss of dedicated tailoring levels. Proposals for other uses that would 23.2 / The clustering of uses and floorspace within floorspace. In contrast, large and flagship high street result in the net loss of tailoring floorspace Savile Row results in agglomeration benefits for stores selling a wide range of products over multiple from the SPA will be resisted, unless this established businesses that contribute to the floors and generating high levels of footfall are more relates to floorspace benefiting from character of the area, a diverse economy within suited to nearby principal shopping streets with temporary consent for tailoring purposes. the city and the UK tailoring industry. The numbers wider pavements designated as part of the West of tailors employed within existing premises are End International Centre or as CAZ Retail Clusters, C. Where new Class E (commercial, business increasing, including through a growing number where such retail formats are supported under and service uses) development of apprenticeships that is helping to ensure the Policy 14. Any proposals for the wholescale incorporates retail floorspace, provision of continued long-term success of this specialist redevelopment of existing retail premises that would a size, type and format that complements cluster and the tailoring industry more widely. require planning permission should therefore the unique character and function of the respond to the unique character and offer of the SPA is encouraged. Redevelopment 23.3 / The unique status of the area as a specialist tightly defined SPA. Conditions will be used to proposals that would result in the cluster is acknowledged in the London Plan. Given restrict the extent to which any new Class E replacement of multiple individual stores its status, demand for tailoring floorspace within the (commercial, business and service uses) with large format retail will be resisted. area remains strong, and the presence of existing development can be occupied by large format retail. bespoke workshops within premises make the area The average size of existing retail units in the SPA is distinct from other luxury retail nearby. To enable 266 sq m. As such, stores of up to 300 sq m gross 23.1 / The cluster of bespoke tailoring the tailoring industry to continue to thrive and grow internal floorspace will normally be considered establishments in Savile Row has been established within this globally recognised destination, the net reasonable. Other Class E (commercial, business for centuries. It is globally synonymous with premium loss of dedicated tailoring floorspace from the area and service uses) that are of a scale and design that bespoke tailoring. Premises on the east side of will be resisted and the provision of additional respect local townscape, and can complement the Savile Row include a mix of workrooms and retail dedicated tailoring floorspace is supported. Where commercial nature of the area, are in principle elements that are both visible from street level, and floorspace not previously used for tailoring supported – as uses such as cafés and restaurants as such are categorised as sui generis. To the west purposes in the SPA becomes vacant (e.g. an can increase dwell time, and additional office of Savile Row retail uses dominate, whilst to the existing retail unit), the use of temporary floorspace can contribute to the strategic office north the mix of uses includes art galleries and retail function of the CAZ.

101 CONTENTS CONNECTIONS

Connecting with a healthier way of life

A growing city puts growing pressure on our transport system, which in turn presents us with a greater environmental challenge. As we move towards 2040, we move towards more sustainable travel. More ‘joined-up’ public transport options and greater use of our waterways will become a more attractive choice to people than driving around Westminster.

But it’s the area of ‘active travel’ where we’ll see the real difference, as a greener city with more accessible pedestrianised areas, even in the very centre of our busiest West End streets, to make Westminster a truly walkable city.

A city that connects us to healthier living. CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS CONTENTS

24.2 / This policy reflects this aim and embodies 24. Sustainable transport 3. Positively contribute to the reduction of Westminster’s 2019/20 to 2021/2022 Local the dominance of private motor vehicles Implementation Plan objectives which are to: A. The council will support a sustainable both in terms of traffic and congestion, pattern of development which maximises whilst not worsening the excessive – deliver sustainable development for growth trips made by sustainable modes, creates levels of on street parking and tackling safer streets for all, reduces traffic, – deliver safer roads for us all poor air quality. improves air quality and reflects the – deliver better air quality for future generations objectives in Westminster’s Transport and 4. Contribute to the London Plan’s Public Realm Programme and Local – prioritise the transport network for pedestrians Healthy Streets approach to improve Implementation Plan 2019/20 to 2021/2022. air quality, reduce congestion and – promote better health and inclusivity make Westminster’s diverse B. New development and the connected – deliver a sustainable future network communities become greener, transport modes should contribute towards healthier and more attractive places – implement the ‘pay for your impact’ principle. maintaining and enhancing Westminster’s in which to live, work or visit. places and streets as one of the most 24.3 / There is a strong connection between our attractive and liveable areas in London. 5. Major development should provide or aim of promoting sustainable transport, the city’s financially contribute towards creating existing urban structure and character and the C. Development must: well-connected, high-quality, convenient, need to guide development in a manner which 1. Positively contribute towards the safe infrastructure and routes where responds to the needs of a 21st century city. To improvement of its public transport necessary to mitigate its impacts. achieve this, active, efficient and sustainable travel nodes in terms of accessibility and should be a key element considered in new legibility and the improvement and developments. This responds to the need to delivery of walking and cycling routes 24.1 / We are committed to improving the quality of create an integrated transport network that that serve a site in order to create an life for people who live and work in or visit the city. minimises the impact that motorised traffic environment where people actively A key element of this is creating a more joined up has on growth by directly designing in more choose to walk and cycle as part of and integrated transport system which positively pedestrian and cycle measures. everyday life. supports the existing and future built environment, its relationship with the public realm and which 2. Support the reallocation of road and encourages healthier living and active travel. development space to promote walking, cycling and the use of public transport where appropriate.

104 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

Road safety Westminster. Our Greener City Action Plan 2015- 24.9 / The “pay for your impact” principle 2025 indicates that parts of the city are among the recognises that as central London grows it is 24.4 / Transforming road safety for all road users worst performers in air quality tests in Europe. imperative that we work with applicants, land and ensuring that all future road safety schemes Seeking to reduce NOx emissions by discouraging owners and other stakeholders to grow the city in and projects steadily reduce causalities will deliver motor vehicle use will contribute to reducing the a more sustainable manner where active transport upon our emerging 2019 Road Danger Reduction exposure of children and vulnerable people to modes and co-ordinated delivery and servicing of Strategy and the Mayor’s Vision Zero ambition.1 transport-related air pollution and to delivering buildings is delivered on the street through a Creating safer environments will promote active Westminster’s Air Quality Strategy and Action Plan. greater use of developer funded Community travel which in turn is supported by our other Infrastructure Levy (CIL) contributions. strategies such as the Walking Strategy2 and Growing demand initiatives such as the emerging City Kerbside 24.10 / Related to this is the need to cater for the Hierarchy which calls for calmed traffic and 24.7 / There is a wider need to deliver a proper consideration of a proposal’s transport improved and safer facilities for walking and sustainable future network by recognising that as impact. As a result, applicants of major cycling. These aims are also reflected in localised central London grows the transport network will developments are urged to engage with our pre- initiatives such as in the Oxford Street District. need to be developed in a manner that meets the application process at the earliest possible stage demands of the majority in terms of encouraging to discuss the potential need for the submission of Public realm and Healthy Streets more use of active travel options, like walking and either a Transport Assessment and Travel Plan, or cycling along with use of the bus, underground 24.5 / A fundamental instrument in delivering a Transport Statement and Local Level Travel Plan. and national rail networks. a sustainable pattern of development and sustainable transport is development’s 24.11 / The submitted information should be 24.8 / The emphasis towards more sustainable relationship with an improved public realm. sufficiently detailed and accurate to enable us to modes of transport is supported by Westminster fully assess the development proposal. This may having one of the lowest car ownership rates in 24.6 / Approximately 1.1 million visitors step into include traffic modelling to demonstrate that London3 and is rated above the London average Westminster each weekday so ensuring that all development proposals will not have an impact in terms of walking activity.4 highways and public realm projects prioritise the (individually or cumulatively) on the flow of traffic. needs of the pedestrian is essential. This aligns A road safety audit/assessment may also be with the Mayor’s Transport Strategy and its necessary on specific schemes. headline outcome to deliver Healthy Streets for 3 74% of English households have a car, and 58% of London and the objectives of our Health and London households. Westminster has the fifth lowest Wellbeing Strategy which identifies a high car ownership rates in London (at the time of the Census) prevalence of childhood obesity within at 37% (Census, 2011) 4 67% of residents walk for 30 mins at least three times a week while the London average is 60% ranking 1 Vision Zero Action Plan (2018) Westminster 5th of 33 London boroughs (Active People 2 Westminster’s Walking Strategy (2017) Survey by Sport England, 2015/16)

105 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS CONTENTS

25. Walking and cycling quality footpaths to Department for convenient and safe cycle routes for Transport minimum standards5 with all, in line with or exceeding London A. Development must promote regard to existing street furniture and Cycle Design Standards; sustainable transport by prioritising layout including through the provision walking and cycling in the city. 2. enable and contribute towards of land for adoption as highway. improvements to cycle access, including WALKING 5. Enable footway widening, re-surfacing the delivery of current and planned cycle and de-cluttering where increased routes identified in the council’s Local B. Development must: footfall is expected, to be suitable for Implementation Plan and existing and 1. Prioritise and improve the pedestrian vulnerable road users including older potential Cycle Permeability Schemes; environment and contribute towards people, people suffering from 3. meet the cycle parking and cycle achieving a first-class public realm dementia and disabled people. facilities standards in the London Plan. particularly in areas of kerbside stress, Where it is not possible to provide including the provision of facilities for CYCLING suitable short-stay cycle parking off the pedestrians to rest and relax (including C. Development should contribute to public highway an appropriate on-street seating) and high-quality and safe improvements to deliver a first-class location should be considered provided road environments and crossings, public realm which supports cycling it does not conflict with improvements to where needed. by improvements to legible signage, and the quality of the public realm; 2. Contribute towards improved legibility provision of access and facilities that do 4. provide links to public transport nodes; and wayfinding including signage to key not conflict with the needs of pedestrians infrastructure, transport nodes, green or compromise safety and addresses risks 5. contribute towards improved spaces and canal towpaths (such as posed to cyclists from other transport modes. wayfinding; and through TfL’s Legible London). 6. promote and contribute towards the D. To promote cycling and ensure a safe 3. Be permeable, easy and safe to introduction and expansion of cycle and accessible environment for cyclists, walk through, enhance existing routes hire facilities. major development must: which are adequately lit, creates step- free legible access and entrance points whilst providing direct links to other 1. provide for and make contributions 25.1 / We will continue to improve conditions pedestrian movement corridors towards connected, high quality, for pedestrians and cyclists through a variety and desire lines. of interventions including the development of our cycle network, upgrading the public realm, 4. Facilitate the improvement of high- 5 Local Transport Note 1/12 DfT 2012 managing parking demand, reducing severance, pro-actively place shaping, junction improvements and introducing traffic calming measures.

106 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

Walking 25.6 / New development can facilitate change to Cycle routes people’s walking habits by providing permeable 25.2 / Pedestrians, particularly those with mobility 25.9 / There are now more than 730,000 cycling spaces with direct, safe and attractive walking difficulties, are the most vulnerable of all users of trips per day in London and cycling in central routes. These spaces should both minimise the the highway and their personal safety can be London has increased by 8.9% since 2014. Within conflict between pedestrians and competing compromised by poorly designed developments. Westminster, a number of strategic cycle routes uses such as servicing or car parking and ensure National policy states that priority should be given exist, including the London Cycle Network, Cycle movement and the quality of the public realm is not to pedestrian movement as a sustainable mode Superhighways, Quietways, and the Thames Cycle impeded by street clutter whilst catering for the of transport, and the London Plan emphasises the Route. Along with our Cycle Permeability Scheme, specific needs of pedestrians with mobility issues. need to secure a significant increase in walking which seeks to immediately improve upon the The emerging Site Allocations Development Plan in London. safety and permeability of other key sections Document will provide further detailed guidance across the Westminster highway network, these on design principles that can help achieve these 25.3 / Prioritising pedestrians has multiple form an important element of London’s cycle aims, whilst further guidance on how the needs of benefits, including easing the pressure on the network. These routes will continue to be pedestrians can be met is set out in Westminster’s public transport and road networks, encouraging improved through further investment to ensure Walking Strategy. healthier lifestyles, and making places feel safer they are intuitive, visible and safe, and are well through increased natural surveillance. ‘Healthy integrated with existing infrastructure. Cycling Streets’ that provide attractive walking environments is a key pillar of the Mayor of 25.7 / Similarly to walking, cycling has multiple Facilities for cyclists London’s Transport Strategy which we support. benefits. It enables people to lead healthier, 25.10 / Provision of cycle parking and storage more active lives, can help to reduce the pressure on facilities, as well as facilities for cycle hire, are 25.4 / It is also more space efficient than other highway capacity and public transport, facilitate essential in order to encourage this mode of forms of transport enabling development to make improvements to the public realm and enable greater transport. Showers, changing facilities and lockers the best use of the available land whilst reducing numbers of people to use the existing road space. should be provided for cyclists at all new workplaces, the environmental and health impacts of motor places of further and higher education, hospitals and vehicles, which is of particular importance in 25.8 / Through co-ordinated efforts to improve health facilities. At least one shower should be Westminster which has a dense urban pattern. the environment for cyclists, cycling can become installed for every 20 cycle parking spaces provided a more attractive transport option resulting in and one locker provided per cycle space. These 25.5 / These interventions will contribute to an increased shift from the motor car. This will facilities should be conveniently located in relation achieving the ambitions of our Walking Strategy contribute towards a reduction in harmful to the cycle parking spaces and accessible to all staff to increase the percentage of daily trips that emissions leading to better air quality, as well as (and students where applicable). Therefore, the resident’s make on foot from the current 84% improving health by enabling an active lifestyle. needs of cyclists should be given careful to more than 92% by 2027. This means that consideration during the design of new Westminster’s people would have the highest developments as provision of cycle parking and walking levels in London. storage space as well as supporting cycle facilities is intrinsically linked to the quality of the public realm.

107 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY Figure 21: Cycle Routes 21: Figure CONNECTIONS 108

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

25.11 / However, pressure from competing uses, 26.1 / A high-quality public transport system is high PTAL values across the city and the limited 3. management of coach routes stops essential to our strategy to promote sustainable space on offer within Westminster’s fine grain and stands whose use may be intensified travel patterns in the city, with less reliance on urban environment mean that provision of short- subsequent to the relocation or private cars and increasing use of other modes. stay cycle spaces will not always be appropriate. redevelopment of . As a result, there is a need to continue to upgrade This approach is reflected in Westminster’s travel public transport infrastructure and its relationship pattern that suggests people don’t generally cycle B. Development must improve the with the public realm in locations such as railway to visit areas like the Central Activities Zone (CAZ) accessibility to, and legibility of existing stations where a large number of people and many of Westminster’s town centres. and proposed public transport by creating congregate and busy transport nodes exist. and improving walking and cycling links 25.12 / Major developments may also need to to stops or stations. 26.2 / As most of Westminster’s built environment provide new cycle docking facilities for cycle hire, has a fine urban grain and space is limited, in addition to parking facilities. Applicants should C. Major development must: improvements to the accessibility and quality of seek pre-application advice to determine these public transport infrastructure are required in order 1. facilitate improvements to the requirements and refer to Westminster’s 2014 to maximise use of these modes, especially by operation of all sustainable transport Cycling Strategy which has further information. disabled people, the elderly, young children and modes through improvements to the others for whom public transport accessibility is a public realm; barrier. Improvements to routes to and from public 2. support car clubs, cycle hire facilities and transport nodes (bus stops and stations) are critical 26. Public transport and other sustainable transport initiatives in persuading more people to use buses and trains. infrastructure such as electric vehicle charging infrastructure where they do not 26.3 / Major investment will be necessary during A. The council seeks better connectivity, detrimentally impact upon public realm the lifetime of the Plan to improve the efficiency and legibility, quality, usability and capacity in improvements and pocket parks; and effectiveness of the transport infrastructure serving public transport. Therefore development Westminster and to ensure it remains fit for purpose. should help to support the: 3. improve access to public transport This includes a package of measures to increase facilities by promoting walking and 1. investment in strategic transport the capacity and reliability of public transport. cycling and through their design infrastructure including the Elizabeth improve the legibility of transport nodes Line and Crossrail 2, HS2, mainline and interchanges. termini and key underground stations; 2. streamlining of bus services and the relocation of standing facilities to less intensively used areas of the city;

109 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS CONTENTS

Figure 22: Strategic Transport Infrastructure

110 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

Figure 23: Edgware Road Safeguarding Area

111 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS CONTENTS

26.4 / As resident, worker and visitor Highways numbers continue to rise, improvements to rail 3. prioritise the issue of parking spaces 26.6 / Local road improvements may sometimes infrastructure are needed to increase capacity and within development to families with be necessary, particularly in areas of substantial connectivity, reduce overcrowding and improve young children; and regeneration or development activity. Edgware rail’s attractiveness as a sustainable mode of Road is expected to experience development 4. let, rather than sell, parking spaces transport. It is therefore essential to ensure that activity along the road frontage over the Plan to residents of new developments on consideration is given to how rail passengers period, but narrow sections of it currently cause a short-term basis, with spaces continue their onward journeys and the impacts congestion. As a result, we will continue to allocated to individual addresses or this has on other parts of the transport network safeguard this location in conjunction with any property numbers. and public realm. As a result, we will work with redevelopment proposals that may allow or require Network Rail, TfL and other agencies involved in the acquisition of land affected by the safeguarding. C. The council will apply the maximum planning rail services to ensure these synergies non-residential car parking standards are taken into account at the earliest stages. set out in the London Plan. Coach travel 27. Parking D. When considering parking impacts, the 26.5 / Victoria Coach Station (VCS) is the country’s A. The parking standards in the London Plan council will prioritise alternative kerbside largest and is considerably exceeding its original built will apply to all developments. All new uses (such as car club spaces, cycle capacity, resulting in substantial congestion and parking spaces should provide active parking and electric vehicle charge points) environmental and amenity concerns. We will provision for electric charging vehicles. ahead of parking for private vehicles. continue to work with TfL and National Express B. Where on-site parking is delivered to find an appropriate strategy to relieve these E. For major developments, contributions will applicants will: impacts in the short-term. In the long-term we support also be required for on-street provision of the closure of VCS and relocation of new coach 1. provide car club membership for electric vehicle and other low emission terminal provision. A suitable new location (or all residents and provision of car vehicle infrastructure. locations) for a coach station must support multi- club spaces; modal interchange while minimising amenity, traffic F. Where sites are redeveloped, existing 2. ensure that all outdoor and open and environmental impacts. We recognise that the parking provision must be reduced to meet parking areas are designed to a best location(s) may be beyond Westminster’s the parking standards in the London Plan standard which accommodates the boundary. This approach is consistent with the unless there is site specific justification to need for safe pedestrian and vehicle commitment in the London Plan and Mayor’s re-provide an element of the existing movement and creates permeable Transport Strategy that the Mayor will identify and parking. On housing renewal schemes, links through the site; deliver replacement coach station facilities to provide parking provision may be retained or easier access to the coach network, while retaining good access to central London for coach operators.

112 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

27.1 / The effective management of parking spaces 27.5 / Given the high levels of public transport re-provided where it can be demonstrated will influence transport mode choice and will be an provision and accessibility to jobs, leisure and that: important tool for improving health and tackling shopping facilities in Westminster, we have taken congestion and local pollution in the city. the view that new development should be 1. existing occupiers with established predominantly car free. Notwithstanding, there will parking spaces or permits are to return 27.2 / The management of parking spaces is always be a need to ensure that a lack of provision to the site once the development is particularly important in an area like Westminster does not result in significant increases in demand completed and that the retained or which, for the most part, has a dense and fine grain for on-street parking in the vicinity of the re-provided parking is for those built environment where considerable pressure development, leading to increased congestion, residents only; and on public space and in particular kerbside disruption to traffic flow, air and noise pollution, 2. there is evidence of adequate capacity space exists. poor parking practices, and adverse impacts on within the relevant controlled parking the amenity of residents. To ensure this is the zone if the re-provided parking is to be 27.3 / By minimising parking provision, space for case, developments should not create or on-street; and other uses is released and facilitates better exacerbate areas of parking stress. Where a integration with a new development scheme. This in residential development without on- or off-site car 3. the retained or re-provided parking turn precipitates the more efficient use of land which parking is proposed in an area of existing high is delivered as part of an overall has a positive impact on the public realm particularly parking stress (i.e. over 80% of on-street parking package of measures improving in areas of kerbside stress and will benefit sustainable spaces being occupied during the day or at night, legibility, including walking and cycling travel modes such as walking and cycling. in compliance with existing parking restrictions), routes, and making improvements to mitigation measures will be expected to off-set the the public realm. On-site parking impact of increased car parking on Westminster’s streets. As a minimum, mitigation may include G. Proposals for the redevelopment of existing 27.4 / Our approach to residential car parking lifetime car club membership for all future car parks for alternative uses will be supported. conforms to the London Plan principle of balancing residential occupiers, increased cycle parking The removal of boundary treatments and new development with the prevention of excessive quantum and quality within the development site gardens to provide vehicle crossovers and car parking that undermines cycling, walking, and and other measures agreed with us. on-site parking will be resisted (where public transport use. The standards in Table 10.3 permitted development rights do not exist). ‘Maximum residential parking standards’ in the 27.6 / Where on-site parking is provided in line with London Plan apply in Westminster and set out clauses A-C, developers will also include sustainable H. Proposals for, or including, new public car maximum residential parking standards, which transport measures, such as provision for car clubs parks (and other motor vehicle public parking, take into account the high level of public transport and cycling parking. Disabled parking for residential including for coaches) will be assessed against provision in the city. For non-residential and non-residential uses should be provided in the objective of reducing motorised travel. developments the standards in the London Plan also apply in Westminster.

113 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS CONTENTS

accordance with the London Plan standards. We Car clubs and car sharing them to use them. Residents have also been able advocate the letting rather than selling of car park to acquire a resident’s parking permit to park 27.10 / The use of car clubs can contribute to spaces to residents in new developments on a short- on-street, but only in the zone in which they live. a reduced need for car ownership and hence reduce term basis so that their use can be kept under review. parking stress, and as such they are encouraged. If under-used, this approach enables car parks to be 27.13 / Although the policy encourages car-free Where provision is made for car clubs, they should converted into another use. residential development, residents will still be able provide a range of vehicle types and sizes, including to apply for on-street parking permits. The low emission and family sized vehicles. This can help 27.7 / Where parking is provided in new residential eligibility criteria for on-street residents’ parking broaden the appeal of membership to a range of developments, free membership to a Carplus permits will be kept under review. households. Doing so can improve take-up thus accredited car club will be secured for the occupiers reduce demand for car ownership and parking stress. of all residential units. The demand for car club bays 27.14 / Given the increasing demand on kerbside arising from this requirement should be assessed as space in the city, proposals seeking exclusive On-street parking part of the Transport Assessment or Statement. If access to the kerbside through measures such as necessary, off-street parking will be provided by the 27.11 / On-street parking is a limited resource dedicated parking bays, permits or Parking Identifier applicant in a publicly accessible location. and demand can exceed supply in parts of the Boards for exclusive parking will be resisted. This city, meaning that the loss of such space will not will ensure the free-flow of vehicular traffic and allow Cycle and motorcycle parking normally be supported. On-street parking spaces can all users of the highway to access the kerbside in cater for a wide range of users including residents, compliance with existing restrictions. Exceptional 27.8 / Cycle parking should be provided in short stay (visitor) parking, and to facilitate loading circumstances such as an overriding national accordance with the London Plan where they do not and servicing requirements at various times of the security, NHS or other emergency services conflict with public realm enhancements. Motorcycle day. Balancing these needs requires careful needs, or where it can be demonstrated that any / moped parking should also be provided in management, and we will therefore work with the full restrictions will not adversely impact on traffic accordance with the London Plan standards. range of user groups to ensure their needs are met as flow, highway safety or parking conditions, will be far as possible. This could include reviewing existing considered on a case-by-case basis. If granted, Cycle facilities parking zones and controls as circumstances change such concessions will be regularly reviewed. 27.9 / Showers, changing facilities and lockers should over the Plan period. be provided for cyclists at all new workplaces, places Off-street parking of further and higher education, hospitals and health 27.12 / Our approach in recent years has been 27.15 / The creation of additional off-street public facilities. At least one shower will be installed for to minimise the number of resident cars parked parking can undermine efforts to encourage use of every 20 cycle parking spaces provided and one on-street, where on-street facilities are under more sustainable modes of transport, which is locker will be provided per cycle space. These pressure, by seeking off-street parking in new necessary to reduce congestion and improve air facilities will be conveniently located in relation to the residential development to cater for those that quality and road safety. New parking provision for cycle parking spaces and accessible to all staff (and want or need to own a car. This allows residents the public should therefore only be made where it students where applicable). to own cars but does not necessarily encourage is replacing existing off-street public parking, and

114 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

should include provision for disabled people’s 28.1 / The road network plays a vital role in the parking, electric vehicle spaces as well as car club servicing and should ensure no loss of life and work of Westminster, enabling trips by spaces and cycle parking to encourage more street furniture.6 residents, businesses and visitors. It also enables sustainable travel choices. public transport to deliver staff and customers to C. Development will only be allowed access businesses and provides for their servicing needs. 27.16 / There are some exceptions where the onto the strategic road network where it can All these demands mean that highway space in essential operational needs of the proposed use be demonstrated that: Westminster is under particular stress and there may require dedicated off-street parking. Such is a pressing need for a strategic approach to its 1. there is no reasonable alternative uses include hospitals, medical centres, and the management. to direct access; key emergency services. In addition, hotels, leisure, entertainment, and education uses can 2. the number of individual new access Loss of highway land increase demand for coaches, minibuses or taxis, points will be minimised; 28.2 / The loss of highway land will not generally be and parking facilities. Meeting the needs of these 3. there is no adverse impact on the strategic acceptable, as reducing space on the highway for vehicles should be considered although parking road network including impact on the local pedestrians and vehicles impedes movement and should only be provided where it is needed for the neighbourhood network; traffic flow, worsening congestion and discouraging essential operation of the use. active transport modes such as walking and cycling. 4. the proposed access is not in close However, we recognise that there may be 27.17 / Housing renewal schemes will be expected proximity to road junctions; and circumstances where a minor loss of highway land to attain an overall reduction in car parking 5. the provision of access does not adversely may be appropriate to deliver benefits. By provision over time. affect the safety and free flow of traffic and designating frontage as highway land where pedestrians, including through provision of buildings are set back from the highway, we will be adequate visibility splays. able to carry out improvements such as footway 28. Highway access and widening to encourage active travel opportunities D. New development likely to attract large visitor and smooth pedestrian flows. management numbers should ensure that proportionate A. Given the increasing demands on existing provision is made for taxis, coaches and other New highway access highway space, the council will resist the loss tourist vehicles, where necessary, particularly 28.3 / Footway will not be reduced as a result of of highway land, particularly footways. In where it is in close proximity to major tourist changing building lines following redevelopment to cases involving the setting back of buildings, destinations and transport hubs. allow adequate space for pedestrians. Likewise, the council will seek the designation of where new developments require vehicular access resulting frontage land as highway. to the highway, they should minimise the loss of kerb 6 Street furniture is considered to be distinct from street space for parking where this will lead to increased B. New highway accesses should minimise clutter which is defined as unnecessary structures congestion on local residential side roads and not the amount of footway, cycling space and such as signs, railings, street lighting, road markings result in loss of footway or cycling space. kerb space lost for parking and / or and advertising hoardings.

115 CONTENTS ensure that adequate space is made available for available made is space adequate that ensure hubs should or transport major attractions tourist to in or close those large proximity numbers visitor are that likely to /Developments generate 28.6 tourist vehicles Provision for taxis, coaches and coaches taxis, for Provision safety. road to improve and amenity local and residents local on of traffic impacts negative the to minimise order in streets unsuitable using from traffic to discourage used be will principle considering this developmentWhen proposals, therefore should be avoided wherever possible. and andcongestion compromise function its to increased to lead likely is development new from WSRN) and (TLRN network ofthe parts vehicular /Direct access onto strategic the 28.5 – – – roles: distinctive their and of roads types different the out setting has a defined /Westminster road hierarchy28.4 Westminster’s road hierarchy and Network Road Strategic The CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY

to residential areas centres. and local access providing traffic, motor over cyclists and to pedestrians priority give Roads Local and to boroughs. neighbouring within Westminster traffic distributes (WSRN) Network Road Strategic Westminster The traffic. for through suitable most considered is Road (TLRN) Network

policies and standards in this plan. this in standards and policies adopted highways shouldpublicly accord the with maintenance, roads housing estate whichare not and materials ofdesign, ofquality terms in /To28.7 ensure across Westminster consistency highwaysUnadopted space for vehicles. other and circulation parking and allow sufficient quality) on air and impacts potential noise disturbance (given to need residentialthe protect amenity provision however, should, be balanced against of The benefits ranks. taxi minicab offices,and points, down set and up pick layovers, parking, This could buses. include dedicated sightseeing coaches vehicles, such tourist and other as taxis, B. A. 29. Freight servicing and and last mile delivery modes. mile delivery and last provision for consolidation low-emission, Plans which encourage and Servicing produce will Delivery site and applicants adevelopment within met fully be should needs and delivery collection Servicing, willbe resisted. facilities off-street ofexisting loss net The policy. Plan London development in accordance emerging with and in deliveries new servicing freight, for facilities ofconsolidated provision the support The council strongly will

E. D. C.

adherence to the Construction and Logistics and Logistics adherence to Construction the incorporating (CLPs) Plans Logistics and Constructions through and mitigated be minimised must development construction of impacts and environmental transport surrounding on the public highway,impact the to asignificant lead may activities related For major developments where construction space. kerbside of lost cost opportunity the as well as bay loading and maintenanceimplementation of any of cost the for both sum commuted ofa form the in obligations planning seek council the instance, will this In activity. residential and other or commercialusers, realm public and highway other on effects adverse minimises that away such in met be must they site adevelopment within needs and delivery collection servicing, the meet to fully possible not is it Where 3. 2. 1. be: will developments within deliveries Provision and collection for servicing,

other businesses. other with shared of being capable of vehicles; of arrival and frequency anticipated and size, in type appropriate level; street below or buildings, converted or new behind located CONNECTIONS

116

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

Figure 24: Westminster’s Road Hierarchy

117 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS CONTENTS

29.3 / The re-timing of deliveries, collections and 29.5 / New development can contribute to the Community Safety Scheme (CLOCS) and the servicing to avoid the busiest times of the day will management of freight traffic through the provision Freight Operator Recognition Scheme (FORS). bring significant safety, environmental and social of sufficient, dedicated off-street space for On-site machinery and vehicles used should benefits to residents, businesses and visitors. By servicing, deliveries and collections particularly comply with industry best-practice emission spreading movements evenly throughout the day where multiple developments can share the same standards contributing to the council’s and reducing their noise impact, the efficiency and facility so as to ensure the most efficient use is air quality objectives. road safety of on-street loading areas will be made of scarce space, where this does not improved, through reducing collisions and compromise businesses’ operational needs. This congestion. In addition, air quality improvements includes the provision of appropriately sized ground Freight will occur as smoother traffic flow is enabled floor holding areas for deliveries and refuse bins. thereby freeing capacity on the road network Such provision of off-street space takes delivery 29.1 / Westminster has a high level of demand for to absorb more growth. activity off the highway, avoiding obstructing other freight, servicing, delivery and collection services road users, including pedestrians. It can also help (including personal delivery and ‘click and collect’), 29.4 / Delivery and Service Plans associated minimise residents’ exposure to noise if such areas that must be managed to allow residents to access with a development proposal should address the are underground or sited away from residential the goods and services they need and to enable final stage in the movement of goods between properties. This is more likely to enable the businesses to continue to grow. The high a transport hub such as a distribution centre and re-timing of deliveries to ‘shoulder hours’, or other concentration of commercial activity interspersed the end destination, commonly known as the ‘last times when residents’ amenity will be less affected. with residential development is a particular mile’.7 This stage of the delivery process should be characteristic of Westminster’s dense, historic viewed as an important part of the supply chain 29.6 / The use of freight and micro-consolidation urban fabric. This is especially the case in the CAZ where significant environmental and efficiency facilities can also help to reduce the number of including the West End, which creates particular gains can be made. Utilising electric vehicles vehicle movements and enable the use of lighter challenges for the movement, re-moding and for the last mile or consolidating loads are just a vehicles or more sustainable options to make re-timing of freight, servicing and deliveries. couple of examples of how the last leg can be deliveries or carry out servicing that cause less made in a more sustainable way. This stage of the disturbance and environmental impact. We 29.2 / Consequently, we support the West End delivery process should be informed by the Mayor are keen to promote facilities of this kind. Partnership’s (WEP) Freight & Servicing Strategy of London’s Freight and Servicing Action Plan.8 which seeks to go beyond the Mayor’s target by reducing overall numbers of delivery and servicing vehicles in the West End by 10%, rising to 80% at peak visitor times where key public realm and 7 The ‘last mile’ delivery term does not imply a strict measurement of distance but rather the last stage in the highway interventions are planned. delivery process from a transport node such as a distribution centre. 8 tfl.gov.uk/corporate/about-tfl/the-mayors-transport- strategy

118 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

Servicing D. New development must incorporate 29.7 / Servicing provision is essential to the 30. Technological vehicle charging facilities with a high level viability of commercial developments in order to of active provision in line with the council’s facilitate the timely and practical delivery and pick innovation in transport parking policy. up of goods and for the maintenance and care of A. Technological innovation in transport the building. Servicing, including waste collection designed to improve mobility, reduce facilities, must be provided on-site and vehicles congestion and improve air quality will be must be able to pull clear of the public highway supported where it does not compromise 30.1 / Technological advances and innovations will without causing obstruction, unless it is clearly highway safety and other amenity and change the way people travel and the operation of demonstrated that it cannot be accommodated environmental concerns. The council will work the transport network over the Plan period. We will and adequate justification is provided for this. If with applicants, infrastructure providers and embrace the opportunities such changes offer, servicing is to be undertaken on street, it must be other stakeholders to minimise any negative whilst ensuring that the introduction of new demonstrated that it would not lead to adverse impacts of these new technologies. technologies do not compromise the safety or safety implications, for pedestrians and / or security of people living in, working in, or vehicles, or the obstruction of traffic. REFUELLING visiting Westminster. B. Existing refuelling stations will be protected, 29.8 / This is particularly important in mixed-use 30.2 / New modes of travel will help to improve unless demonstrated to be operationally developments including residential uses where mobility by offering a wider choice of travel options, unviable. Opportunities for new refuelling adequate areas for servicing must be designed including dockless cycle hire, electric scooter hire technologies, such as hydrogen refuelling and in a way which does not conflict or cause adverse and autonomous vehicles. Other technological electric vehicle charging facilities, should be amenity impacts. Therefore, servicing should be changes will help to reduce congestion by removing fully explored before a change of use is integrated into the development at the early vehicles from the road, particularly in terms of considered. New or replacement refuelling design formulation stages and not after the deliveries and collections. This includes the use of facilities will be directed to accessible scheme has been designed. unmanned aircraft or ‘drones’, and other self-driving locations on the strategic road network. delivery vehicles that operate on the highway. 29.9 / Cycle safety measures should be Nonetheless, the opportunities represented by ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING FACILITIES included in construction logistics plans for new technological change may sometimes have developments, particularly to provide safe routes C. The council will support the continued roll unintended negative impacts in terms of amenity and for cyclists during the construction period. out of on-street electric charging points the local environment, such as noise, street clutter for use by the general public across and on local character, as well as potential safety Westminster. and security concerns. We will therefore work with applicants and a range of stakeholders to avoid or mitigate any negative impacts and to ‘design in’ facilities in new development where required.

119 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS CONTENTS

Refuelling considered through appraisals such as noise and air quality assessments. 30.3 / New fuel types will help reduce air pollution; 31. Waterways and however, during the transition from fossil fuels Electric vehicle charging waterbodies traditional refuelling stations will remain essential, A. Proposals alongside or affecting particularly in the first half of the Plan period. There 30.6 / Fully electric and hybrid vehicles are water should support the creation of a are limited such facilities within Westminster and a becoming more prevalent on London’s roads and network of high-quality water spaces lack of coverage could lead to unnecessary Westminster has the highest number of new which promotes biodiversity and the detours for refuelling purposes, cause additional plug-in vehicles being registered in London, with use of Westminster’s waterways and traffic and congestion, and undermine economic new registrations currently exceeding 1,000 per waterbodies for sport, leisure, competitiveness. We will therefore protect existing quarter. Westminster currently has 153 off-street recreational and educational uses as refuelling facilities in Westminster unless it is electric vehicle charging bays, comprising 109 well as for water-based transportation. robustly demonstrated that the station is unused spaces and 44 car club bays. Many developments or operationally unviable. also provide off-street electric vehicle charging, B. Development along waterways or adjacent although usually for private use only. In addition to to waterbodies and within the Thames 30.4 / For refuelling sites identified as suitable for the wider roll out of on-street charging facilities Policy Area must address their waterfront hydrogen refuelling, protection is justified by their accessible to the general public, where location in terms of access and design. scope to facilitate the more widespread use of developments propose new car parking, charging Water-related and waterfront enhancing innovative energy technologies, in accordance provision should be made in accordance with the uses will be encouraged and the loss of with the London Plan. Where provided, alternative standards set out in Policy 27. This will enable such existing uses resisted. Access for lower emission fuel and recharging points should people to continue to take up electric vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists will be improved be in addition to, rather than instead of, traditional thereby helping improve Westminster’s air quality. through enhancements to waterside refuelling facilities. Options for incorporating these It is also important to ensure suitable fast-charge towpaths and footpaths. facilities alongside traditional refuelling should be points in off-street delivery / servicing bays for considered prior to any proposed change of use. goods vehicles are placed in appropriate DEVELOPMENT AFFECTING locations, given the high volumes of freight, WATERWAYS AND WATERBODIES 30.5 / Where redevelopment is proposed, refuelling servicing and delivery traffic in Westminster. stations should be re-provided, preferably on-site, or C. Development that builds into or over in an appropriate location nearby where this is not waterways will only be acceptable if it possible, unless it can be clearly demonstrated that is a water-related or water dependant use at there are viable alternatives for refuelling already in appropriate locations.9 Transport the vicinity. New or replacement facilities will be directed to accessible locations on the strategic road network (TLRN or WSRN). As these routes still include 9 Appropriate locations are defined in Clause F sensitive land uses, impact on local amenity will be

120 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

31.1 / Westminster’s blue infrastructure of waterways related structures, projects of strategic 2. they will not hinder navigation; and and waterbodies is of strategic importance to London importance to London, or major water related and forms part of the open space network that is 3. they can be satisfactorily serviced by infrastructure will be supported only where an essential to quality of life in such a dense city. utility services and the road network. overriding strategic case for such development can be demonstrated. 31.2 / The open aspect of Westminster’s G. Proposals for permanent moorings on waterways is important for several reasons. the River Thames will: D. In assessing development proposals They offer respite from the built-up nature of the affecting Westminster’s waterways and 1. enhance the character and city, supply important habitats for wildlife, and waterbodies, the council will have regard to appearance of the riverside and provide the setting for significant heritage assets. the Thames River Basin Management Plan, be open to the public; The River Thames provides the setting for the the Marine Policy Statement and the Palace of Westminster and other historic buildings, 2. not compromise views of the river, emerging South East Marine Plan. and many of London’s most iconic views include the World Heritage Site and other the Thames and the lakes in the Royal Parks. heritage assets and their settings; PIER FACILITIES 3. not hinder navigation or jeopardise the 31.3 / Waterways and waterbodies are also E. Improvements to pier facilities long-term use of pier recesses; important for providing habitat and wildlife will be encouraged as part of new corridors, providing for recreational activity development along the River Thames. 4. not compromise the integrity of the and public enjoyment, fulfilling environmental Proposals for new or enlarged piers River Thames flood defences or the functions such as drainage, and in some cases should improve accessibility for ability to raise them in the future in line supporting sustainable transport. They therefore passengers, and not impact adversely with the 2100 Plan; and merit strong protection, and opportunities to on other land-side functions. 5. not negatively impact the intertidal enhance their use are encouraged. foreshore defined and protected within MOORINGS the London Biodiversity Action Plan Development affecting waterways and waterbodies F. Residential and commercial moorings and and, where feasible, provide 31.4 / Where development proposals are adjacent facilities for boaters on Westminster’s improvements to intertidal habitats. to rivers or canals, buildings should orientate canals will be encouraged in appropriate Where required, developers should towards the water, and allow for continuous public locations as long as: provide appropriate mitigation access along the waterside. Water-related and measures that will preserve the 1. they do not negatively impact on waterfront enhancing uses are encouraged at continued dynamism and biodiversity navigation, water quality, the openness waterside locations and at sites within the Thames value of the foreshore. and character of the water space Policy Area10 in order to enrich the waterfront. and the amenity of surrounding residents; 10 The Thames Policy Area is a London Plan tool for ensuring Planning co-ordination. The boundary of the Thames Policy Area has been informed by the London Plan maps encompassing the Westminster area. 121 CONTENTS crossings in Westminster. for proposals Any new river for new proposals favour not we do principle of amatter as that means approach /This 31.8 defences, or increased transportation. river (such enhanced Thames as Tideway), the flood improvements suchas water quality benefits strategic overriding demonstrates it unless on openness, to impacts due resisted be normally will waterways /Development encroaches that 31.7 over or into andmaintained improved where necessary. be will steps riverside to existing access Public solid or overhanging other boardwalks projections. bycreating waterway the narrow not should they but required, be will ofthese provision exist, paths Where no such affected. adversely or otherwise narrowed removed, be not must paths /Existing 31.6 appropriate). as buoys life ladders, access chains, (e.g. grab equipment lifesaving riparian as such features safety ofappropriate provision the including and improvement widening extension, of paths these the facilitate will development towpath, canal or path spaces, such as riverside where there is an existing of associated the water and accessibility usability the affects detrimentally development /If 31.5 contribution to existing open space and the urban urban the and space open to existing contribution make apositive will it land meets bridge new character. open our waterways’ protecting Where a of theimportance a sufficientoutweigh scale to on need transport evidenced strategic robustly a meet they that to demonstrate required be or replacement crossings will do that come forward CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY

on the Riveron Thames the therefore careful need moorings Permanent Plan. London the in out set as and iconic important featurea strategically of London, is a finite resource,riverfront the ThamesRiver and is however, and vibrancy; the diversity Westminster’s to add can waterways city’s the along structures floating other and vessels ofmoored /Arange 31.10 Moorings concerns. and environmental heritage Wall,Embankment where are these with compatible pier recesses along the purpose-built existing should make Bridge of Westminster use of the access to water. the Proposals located downstream should be focusedEnhancements on improving routes. and cycle pedestrian public transport, where is well it linkedelsewhere, to particularly modes and reducetransport congestion of choice the broaden help can /Enhanced pier provision locations right in the 31.9 Pier facilities freight. and bypassengers river ofthe use the residentialtoaspirations increase areas, and reflect of surrounding and amenity character important the Thames, ofthe value ecological and setting of the importance strategic the designed to respect Proposals should travel. be sustainable incentivise to network transport public to the only, link and and cyclists should be designed for pedestrians proposals is need evidenced, Where this parks. and trees protected and buildings listed and areas such fabric and as environmental conservation

Paddington Basin, , and Lisson Grove. Venice, Lisson and Little Basin, Paddington include locations routes. Likely suitable navigation main disrupt not do they where principle in supported are for boaters facilities and moorings waterways, other city’s ofthe use 31.12 the /To support such as ticket kiosks. structures ancillary for opportunities limit may buildings) listed other of setting the on Wall (and impacts Embankment listed the and river ofthe character the on impact in although principle, be supported will education and recreation or areas, exhibition galleries, as uses suchprivate as residential or offices. Usessuch encouragethat public use of river, the than rather to uses Thames shouldalong the be restricted /To31.11 moorings impacts, manage these navigation. river continuous wildlife corridor and to avoid impeding a as role its to protect assets, heritage important to setting ofthe part as and views its including of river,management the to character the protect CONNECTIONS

122

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

Figure 25: Westminster’s blue infrastructure network

123 CONTENTS ENVIRONMENT

A healthy environment created by everyone, for everyone

Our environment is crucial to how we perform as a city. Tackling climate change head on is the only way we can continue to grow and prosper as a healthy and resilient city.

For the past two decades Westminster has been designated

an Air Quality Management Area, and reducing our CO2 emissions remains a top priority. A bold approach to traffic management and greener travel options is already helping us ease congestion and reduce pollution.

The urban heat island effect has called for even greater consideration in everything we build. Energy efficiency isn’t just desirable, but fundamental.

By taking measures to lower our environmental footprint, we give people in our city the highest quality of life. CONTENTS CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY D. AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENTS C. B. POSITIVE AND NEUTRAL QUALITY AIR A. quality Air 32.

of an air quality positive approach. approach. positive quality air of an across proposeddevelopment the as part improved be can quality air local how demonstrate additionally must Assessment to an Impact Environmental subject those and Areas Renewal Housing and Areas Major developments in Opportunity Neutral. Quality Air least at be should (CHP) Power and Heat Combined incorporating Major developments and developments in areas. other quality ofair detriment without locally it improve to opportunities and maximise air quality to poor exposure to reduce development expects and city the in quality air toThe council improving is committed 2. 1. for: required be will Assessments Quality Air

Proposals that includeProposals that potentially Major developments; combustion-based technologies; combustion-based or uses generating air pollution

environmental concernsenvironmental for our residents top is the among Westminster. quality Air in and economic environmental impacts health, detrimental significant causes 32.1 pollution /Air Air Strategy (2019). Strategy Air Government’s in Clean the and actions ambitions the support will this Strategy, Environment London Mayor’s 2024) the in out set those and (2019- Plan Action and Strategy Quality Air our in out set measures wider the Together with travel. and sustainable efficiency energy infrastructure, green our approaches to design and construction, through for instance plan, this in way integrated an in quality air poor to /We tackle seek 32.2 possible. as far as levels PM to reduce to work we are continuing Westminster, across are met (PM) Matter for EU While Standards. Particulate standards (WHO) Organisation Health World EU and current exceed city ofthe areas large in levels pollution Air Management Area for decades. (AQMA) nearly two Quality Air an declared been has city of the whole The for us. priority aparticular is it improving 1 Air Quality Manifesto (WCC), March 2018 March (WCC), Manifesto Quality Air 4. 3. Air Quality Focus Areas. Focus Quality Air within residentialAll developments uses; sensitive Proposals incorporating and 1 and and

expected review of the AQNPSD. AQNPSD. ofthe review expected planning following document an supplementary We set will updated out guidance in a forthcoming (AQNPSD). Document Planning Support Neutral Quality GLA’s Air 5ofthe Section in out are set this Theprocess calculation and for a final intervention. as considered be may quality air on development the of impact the offset to contributions financial exploited, been have status Neutral Quality be considered. all When measures to achieve Air should that actions the out sets SPG Construction Designachieved, and Mayor’s the Sustainable cannot be status neutral air /If quality 32.5 quality. of technologies on these airpotential impact developments due incorporating to CHP the requirement to also applies Neutral Quality Air achieve an overall improvement to air quality. The and are worse make encouraged to air quality should not major other developments /All 32.4 approach. requirement positive for an air quality policy the in reflected is which quality, air local to improve methods to include potential have the in particular developments Large masterplanned Plan. London the in out set as approach neutral and positive quality air the /We haveadopted 32.3 and Positive Neutral Quality Air ENVIRONMENT 126

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

Figure 26: NO₂ Pollution and Air Quality Focus Areas

127 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

Air Quality Assessments 32.10 / The exposure of poor air quality to vulnerable people is a particular concern which development 32.6 / Air Quality Assessments (AQAs) should 33. Local environmental impacts should reduce or avoid. Sensitive uses include many identify the potential for air quality to impact on, or A. The council will make sure that quality of types of social and community infrastructure, be caused by, new development and demonstrate life and health and wellbeing of existing including schools, hospitals and nursery facilities, as how these impacts are being appropriately and future occupiers, and the natural well as types of specialist housing such as elderly minimised and mitigated. environment are not adversely affected by housing and care homes. harmful pollutants and other negative 32.7 / Consideration must be given to the impact impacts on the local environment. 32.11 / There are eight Air Quality Focus Areas of improvements on air quality elsewhere. For (AQFAs) in Westminster, which are designated by the instance, traffic reductions could improve local air LIGHT POLLUTION Mayor of London.2 These areas not only exceed air quality but push traffic-related air quality impacts quality limits but are also locations with high human B. Developments must be designed to to other areas. Early engagement with us is exposure. Due to the existing poor air minimise the detrimental impact of glare encouraged to assess how development could quality in these areas, developments incorporating and light spill on local amenity, biodiversity, avoid this unintended consequence. new residential units in these areas will be required to highway and waterway users. submit an AQA to demonstrate air quality is not made 32.8 / Where AQAs show that emissions or exposure worse and where possible, improved. AQFAs and NOISE AND VIBRATION should be reduced, this should be done on-site. Off-site their environments will be prioritised for air quality measures to improve local air quality may be acceptable C. Development should prevent adverse offset projects, including those funded through where it can be demonstrated that on-site provision is effects of noise and vibration and improve contributions made in accordance with this policy. impractical or inappropriate, and equivalent air quality the noise environment in compliance with benefits to the local area will be achieved. the council’s Noise Thresholds, with particular attention to: 32.9 / Development proposals that include potential 1. minimising noise impacts and air pollution generating uses or combustion based preventing noise intrusion to residential technologies, could comprise, for example, those developments and sensitive uses; which generate extensive traffic such as from deliveries or customer arrivals and departures, car 2. minimising noise from plant machinery parking proposals or those which include CHP or and internal activities; biomass boilers. Consideration must be given to how 3. minimising noise from servicing and these will be designed so as to not worsen local air deliveries; and quality to ensure their acceptability. 4. protecting the relative tranquillity in and 2 The London Datastore provides the most up to date around open spaces. information on Air Quality Focus Areas in Westminster

128 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

principle which places the burden on the applicant Noise and vibration ODOUR to mitigate negative environmental impacts and 33.4 / People come to the city for work, culture, ensures development does not cause existing D. Development will effectively address education and entertainment, and noise and vibration nearby uses from having to curtail their activities. the adverse impact of odour through the are inevitable by-products of these activities. Some of incorporation of appropriate mitigation these activities are focused in areas, such as the 33.2 / A range of measures can improve the measures using a precautionary approach. Central Activities Zone, and as a result the noise quality of the local environment, including the environment changes significantly across different management of land use, the design and location LAND CONTAMINATION parts of the city. However, not all noise and vibration of buildings, incorporation of green infrastructure, can be attributed to city living and if uncontrolled, can E. Applicants are required to carry out and management of transport infrastructure. be of nuisance and severely impact on health and contaminated land assessments and take We will publish technical guidance that provides quality of life. Defra’s Noise Action Plan and our noise appropriate remediation measures for detail on the assessments, standards and other data show that ambient noise levels in Westminster development on or near a site which is requirements that should be met. are higher than national and regional averages. potentially contaminated. We therefore not only seek to avoid adverse noise Light pollution impacts, but also reduce noise in the city. CONSTRUCTION IMPACTS 33.3 / We seek to make sure artificial lighting uses F. Developments are required to minimise the right light, in the right place and at the right 33.5 / Developments should ensure that any noise demolition and construction impact by time. Lighting helps to keep our public realm and vibration impacts are mitigated. They should be complying with Westminster’s Code of accessible, legible and safe after dark. Artificial constructed and operated to achieve appropriate Construction Practice (CoCP). lighting can also help to extend the use of sports noise levels and ensure that any cumulative effects facilities for communities. We will use the relevant of new noise sources (for example additional plant G. Modern methods of demolition and professional standards3 as a guide to assessing machinery or music) does not contribute to the existing construction that minimise negative local light impacts. Applications for physical activity, background noise level. Careful consideration must be environmental impacts will be encouraged. leisure, sport and/or play facilities should follow given to the design and location of schemes that could Sport England’s Artificial Lighting Guidance. It is impact or be impacted by noise from development also important to retain subtly-lit and dark spaces that includes: plant machinery, internal activities, 33.1 / The many varied activities in Westminster to protect biodiversity from light spill – for instance amplified noise, transport (including servicing and create a vibrant city, but in the wrong locations or at along canals. The desire to minimise wasted deliveries) and other noise generating activities. the wrong time these activities can be of nuisance. energy should also be considered. Where We aim to maintain high standards of life in the city relevant, we will require lighting assessments 33.6 / Our Noise Strategy (2010-2015) sets out and protect health and well-being, particularly to demonstrate compliance with this policy. our overarching framework for controlling noise in the of vulnerable groups. We therefore seek to city. Our Noise Technical Guidance Note sets out the manage impacts that negatively affect the local 3 E.g. standards set out by the Institute of Noise Thresholds developments are expected to environment. We apply the Agent of Change Lighting Professionals meet and shows where existing tranquil spaces exist.

129 CONTENTS and the community whilst the demolition and and demolition the whilst community and the To impacts. noise environment and dust the protect vibration, detrimental andrelated traffic additional in results often city the in activity /Development 33.9 impacts Construction measures. remediation proposed for any abasis as if and land to uses need requiredused be identified ofwatercourses the or waterbodies) history the is avoided (e.g. impact environmental on soil, areor users and not to risks exposed health contaminated. order In to ensure occupiers that be may potentially that to land adjacent or on take place will development that means which / Developable land is scarce33.8 in Westminster, contamination Land future. the in arising issues incorporated to prevent unacceptable odour measurespremises, require will to mitigation be food hot as such uses, for such Proposals them. between to change permission for planning need the without ofuses range awide accommodate can developments some that mean rights development Permitted appropriately mitigated. to make areassessments sure potential impacts odour require we will appropriate, Where highway. adjoining the or buildings surrounding of amenity the on impact not do create odour that activities that important is It ofnuisance. sources be can which fumes or create odour, smells will in Westminster uses33.7 and /Some activities Odour CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY

implemented where possible. should be emissions from construction and nuisance to reduce ofconstruction methods Innovative andresidents. affected community local the engage with and proactively communication, possible, to site good implement management and as much as impact construction the to mitigate adhere and contractors to. applicants We expect to need will firms construction and applicants that measures and standards the out sets (CoCP) Practice ofConstruction Code our take place, works building D. C. OPEN SPACE B. GREENING CITY A. infrastructure Green 34.

provide new or improved public open open public improved or new provide to required be will developments Major willamenity be protected. and value,and ecological tranquillity spaces open All quality, and their heritage spaces into design of the scheme. the rain gardens green and other features and roofs, green walls, green trees, incorporating by ofWestminster greening to the contribute wherever will, possible, Developments social andenvironmental, economic value. its to maximise infrastructure green city’s The council and enhance protect will the

I. H. TREES G. F. TO ACCESS NATURE AND BIODIVERSITY E.

new developments. cover canopy be encouraged in will city’s the to optimise oftrees planting The protected. be will townscape and appearance of character the to the contribute which those and value historic and Trees ecological ofamenity, habitats. and species for priority features to enhance particularly biodiversity, areas of nature should include deficiency within Developments should be maximised. species for priority habitats create new and to habitats enhance existing Opportunities appropriate. and feasible wherever gain, net should achieveDevelopments biodiversity protected. be will network SINCs features of ecological other the outside and habitats priority (SINCs), Conservation for Natural ofImportance Sites of and range uses. enhance quality their the Royalshould Parks Development affecting space deficiency. play or space ofopen areas in particularly play, for children’s space active and space ENVIRONMENT

130

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

Figure 27: Open space and deficiencies

131 CONTENTS have a heritage designation, and many provide provide many and designation, aheritage have spaces open city’s ofthe half Over increasing. is roofs and walls green as such assets green green space, number of and and range the other is of and open Westminster one quarter Almost infrastructure. 34.1 green ofour /We are proud planning document on the application of this policy. ofthis application the on document planning Strategy. We also prepare will a supplementary be set in our out emerging Infrastructure Green will detail on our approach to green infrastructure Further network. enhance our green infrastructure to partners howdescribes we work will with (2019) in Westminster’ Spaces and Biodiversity ‘A to Approach Open strategy Our Partnership network. infrastructure green the into integrated fully when benefits wider bring which can solutions, beaddressed by nature-based effectively often can effect island heat the and quality, air poor Challenges risk, suchasflood benefits. its maximise to network infrastructure green ofour out most the to get required is approach integrated /An 34.2 resilience. and ecological biodiversity education, and play, conservation, and heritage landscape leisure, recreation air quality,improving sport, and well-being, health climate adaptation, change include and are diverse bring assets blue that our green and and benefits The functions for wildlife and biodiversity. function an important CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY

open space following the event. the following space open and differentvalues the of restore function the to remediated fully be should land the space, open on events oftemporary case the In space. of open the safeguardspaces must functions the Development adjacent to or underneath open enhancing values of space. open the the to maintaining or ancillary and clearly essential be must space open on /Development 34.5 spacesopen be secured will legal agreement. via our spaces. open Public access owned to privately of to quality and improve the accessibility partners us and our to work with encourage applicants We disabilities. physical with and people users accessible for or inclusive wheelchair publicly not all of /Currently our spaces open are34.4 space Open development. ofthe lifetime the relevant green spaces and features are in place for formanagement and maintenance arrangements should ensure appropriate Applicants and trees. drainage systems sustainable gardens, grassland, planting, vegetated rain walls, and roofs green include measures ofgreening Examples development. of the context and scale type, specific the on depend will suitable be will that ofmeasures scale and type The city. ofthe greening further to the contribute to haveopportunities developments /All 34.3 greening City for children and young people. future developments provide sufficientopportunities that ensure not we do if increase will which city the in space play of adeficiency is /There 34.7 functions. other and recreation amongst amenity conservation, to nature contribution make apositive can appropriately managed and developed when and element of our green infrastructure an important development should be explored. These spaces are new through ‘pocket parks’ spaces’ and open ‘small byfocussed spaces ofopen supply the increase to opportunity every deficiency space ofopen areas spaces therethe isIn an city. in overall deficiency open number of /Despite the high-quality 34.6 4 and applicants to preserve the open character of the of the character open the to preserve and applicants partners with work We will city. ofthe character of the part are avital and space open ofWestminster’s 90% to close constitute Parks Royal The land. belt green as protection same the afforded are therefore and (MOL) James’s Land are Open Park) designated Metropolitan Kensington and Park St Hyde GreenPark, Gardens, Park, (Regent’s city the in Parks Royal five /The 34.8 replacement document. subsequent any (2012) or SPG Recreation Informal of London’s Plan and Shaping Neighbourhoods Mayor the with accordance in space ofplay quantum Major residential development should provide the carers. and parents their as well as city the in people for ofcaters needs all the children and young that space play active and accessible to providing

See emerging Playing Pitch and Facilities Built Strategies 4 We are committed committed We are ENVIRONMENT

132

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

Figure 28: Sites of Importance for Nature Conservation

133 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

Royal Parks and enhance the value they bring for 34.12 / Developments impacting on biodiversity London. Any development affecting the Royal Park should follow the Mayor of London’s mitigation 35. Flood risk boundaries must be accompanied by thorough hierarchy of avoid, minimise and compensate. A. All developments should be safe for their evidence which demonstrates that there are The emerging Green Infrastructure Strategy and lifetime from the risk of flooding, complying exceptional circumstances consistent with the a supplementary planning document will set out with the council’s Strategic Flood Risk requirements for changes to MOL in national policy additional information on how biodiversity can be Assessment (SFRA), Surface Water and the London Plan. protected and enhanced, including for priority Management Plan (SWMP), Local Flood habitats and species. Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) and Biodiversity and access to nature the Mayor of London’s Regional Flood Trees 34.9 / There are 33 Sites of Importance for Natural Risk Appraisal (RFRA). Conservation (SINCs) in the city, which account for 34.13 / Westminster’s trees, whether on the more than 3,000 hectares. This includes eighteen streets, in parks, public open spaces or in private B. A site-specific Flood Risk Assessment Metropolitan SINCs, which have regional importance gardens, make a significant contribution to (FRA) must be submitted for: and national significance. SINCs provide important London’s reputation as one of the world’s greatest habitats for a range of species and make it possible cities. They are an integral and historic component 1. developments of 1 hectare or greater; for residents and visitors to access nature. of Westminster’s townscape and bring an 2. all developments in Flood Zones 2 enormous amenity value. Trees provide additional and 3; and 34.10 / It is important to utilise all opportunities to functions as vital parts of the green infrastructure enhance biodiversity in the city. Despite the large network: trees shade buildings and streets, provide 3. all developments within a number of SINCs, there are still significant areas of a drainage function, form green corridors and Surface Water Flood Risk Hotspot. nature deficiency in the city. Development will be contribute to tackling poor air quality. Many trees expected to take all opportunities to improve access also provide a heritage function as an integral part VULNERABLE USES to nature - bringing nature to residents’ doorstep. of historic townscapes and landscapes. Their loss C. Highly Vulnerable Uses will not be should therefore be prevented. allowed within Flood Zone 3; in Flood 34.11 / Development should aim to create Zone 2 they will be required to pass net gains in biodiversity, leaving the natural 34.14 / Proposals for new trees should have regard the Exception Test and should as far environment in a better state than before. There to the wider context, consider their contribution to as possible be located outside of the are a growing number of tools and good practice biodiversity and follow the guidance in our Trees Surface Water Flood Risk Hotspots. guides available which can help developments and the Public Realm SPD (2011) or any achieve measurable biodiversity net gain. replacement document. All tree planting strategies D. Proposals for Essential Infrastructure and should be submitted as part of a landscaping, More Vulnerable Uses within Flood Zone 3 tree or biodiversity strategy. will be required to pass the Exception Test.

134 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

35.3 / Our requirements for site-specific Flood Risk Within the Rapid Inundation Zone, basement developments which result in the need for Assessments (FRAs) are aligned with the SFRA. dwellings and basement extensions to off-site upgrades to the water or sewerage Proposals should be accompanied by a signed existing dwellings will not be acceptable. network, will be subject to conditions to Flood Risk and Sustainable Drainage pro forma. ensure the occupation is aligned with the E. More Vulnerable Uses should, as far as delivery of necessary infrastructure upgrades. 35.4 / In addition, sleeping accommodation below possible, be directed away from Surface the modelled breach flood water level in areas Water Flood Risk Hotspots. SUSTAINABLE DRAINAGE identified as being at risk of flooding in the event of a breach of the Thames Tidal Flood Defences, J. New development must incorporate F. A Flood Warning and Evacuation Plan as set out in Environment Agency guidance, will Sustainable Drainage Systems (SuDS) to will generally be required for More not be supported. alleviate and manage surface water flood Vulnerable Uses within the areas at risk of risk. Development should aim to achieve tidal breach flooding, especially if the land Vulnerable uses greenfield run-off rates and demonstrate use is within the Rapid Inundation Zone. how all opportunities to minimise site 35.5 / Development should be steered to the areas run-off have been taken. with the lowest probability of flooding, as set out in FLOOD MANAGEMENT INFRASTRUCTURE the National Planning Policy Framework (NPPF). G. All existing flood management Given the dense built-up nature of Westminster, it infrastructure will be protected, including 35.1 / As our climate changes the risk of flooding in will not be possible to direct all development access for maintenance. Wherever the city increases. Sources of flood risk include tidal outside of the Flood Zones and Surface Water possible, an undeveloped buffer zone of flooding (from the Thames), sewer flooding (foul Flood Risk Hotspots. Depending on vulnerability, 16m should be maintained around flood water from the sewer system) and surface water some developments within Flood Zone 2 and 3 will defence structures, including buried flooding. Increased levels of development have the therefore be required to satisfy the Exception Test elements of the flood defence. potential to increase risks of surface water flooding. set out in the NPPF. This approach gives However, redevelopment provides the opportunity consideration to the type of development, as some H. Improvements to flood defences will be to reduce flood risk by the incorporation of flood uses are more vulnerable to the impacts of flooding secured through planning conditions and / resilience and resistance and drainage measures. than others. The approach to vulnerable uses is or legal agreements where the size, type derived from the SFRA. and / or location of development impacts 35.2 / With the Strategic Flood Risk Assessment on flood risk. Development should not limit (SFRA), Surface Water Management Plan (SWMP), Flood management infrastructure future raising of flood defences outlined in Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) 35.6 / Besides the , Westminster is the Thames Estuary 2100 Plan. and the Mayor of London’s Regional Flood Risk protected from tidal and fluvial flooding by Thames Appraisal (RFRA), we have a strong framework Tidal Flood Defences including the Embankment I. Where appropriate, planning permission for in place to manage flood risk in the city that wall. We will protect flood management applicants should comply with.

135 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY Figure 29: Flood Zones 29: Figure ENVIRONMENT 136

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

infrastructure to ensure the risk of flooding is an ecological value and improve air quality and minimised. Development within 16m of a tidal flood amenity while increasing resilience to climate 36. Energy defence will only be acceptable if it can be change. Our canals can also play a role in A. The council will promote zero carbon demonstrated that the defences can be raised and managing surface water drainage from adjacent development and expects all development to maintained for the lifetime of the development. Engagement with the Canal & River reduce on-site energy demand and maximise development. Access to defences for maintenance Trust is encouraged for development adjacent the use of low carbon energy sources to and emergency purposes must be retained, and to canals to explore opportunities. minimise the effects of climate change. their improvement will be sought as a condition or via legal agreement where appropriate. 35.10 / A Sustainable Drainage Strategy should CARBON REDUCTION be submitted with major developments and 35.7 / The Thames Estuary 2100 Plan (TE2100) is when advised by us, setting out how SuDS will be B. All development proposals should follow the strategic flood management plan for London incorporated into the development and how peak the principles of the Mayor of London’s and the Thames Estuary. Its primary focus is tidal flow volumes will be reduced. Where it is not energy hierarchy. Major development flooding, and Westminster is located in the London possible to deliver greenfield run-off rates, should be net zero carbon and City Zone. We will work with our partners to make applicants should demonstrate how all opportunities demonstrate through an energy strategy sure the Thames Flood Defences remain strong to minimise site run-off have been taken to get it as how this target can be achieved. and the recommendations of the TE2100 Plan close to greenfield standard as possible. Applicants are implemented. We will also continue to work should follow the Mayor of London’s drainage C. Where it is clearly demonstrated that it is with partners to support the timely implementation hierarchy and set out the proposed SuDS not financially or technically viable to of the Thames Tideway Tunnel including the maintenance schedule in the strategy. achieve zero-carbon on-site, any shortfall in combined sewer outflows in the city. carbon reduction targets should be Wastewater infrastructure addressed via off-site measures or through Sustainable drainage the provision of a carbon offset payment 35.11 / Developers are encouraged to contact secured by legal agreement. 35.8 / Sustainable Drainage Systems (SuDS) Thames Water as early as possible to discuss incorporate a range of measures which help drain their development proposals and intended HEAT NETWORKS surface water, reduce pollution of water entering delivery programme to assist with identifying any the watercourse, reduce surface water flooding potential water and wastewater network D. Developments should be designed in and attenuate surface water run off. Examples reinforcement requirements. Where there is a accordance with the Mayor of London’s of SuDS include permeable paving, green / blue capacity constraint, we will, where appropriate, heating hierarchy. Major developments roofs and rainwater harvesting systems. apply phasing conditions to any approval to must connect to existing or planned local ensure that any necessary infrastructure upgrades heat networks, or establish a new network, 35.9 / SuDS can be a multifunctional asset to are delivered ahead of the occupation of the wherever feasible. the city, not only helping to reduce flood risk relevant phase of development. from surface water flooding but also provide

137 CONTENTS guidance on sustainable retrofitting. guidance on sustainable should refer value. to Applicants heritage our latest in of recognition their sensitively be undertaken will to Interventions upgrade historic buildings comfort. tobuildings reduce use energy and improve their of improve current performance the retrospectively refurbish or seek to that proposals sensitively support therefore We will buildings. by existing emissions are carbon Westminster’s produced of portion a large that /We recognise 36.2 future. the in addressed to be ofemissions alegacy to avoid life-cycle, development the across zeronet carbon should also explore routesDevelopments towards and minimising annual and both peak emissions. hot water lighting, space and ventilation), heating, emissions from all regulatedoperational uses (i.e. reducing means zero Net carbon emissions. zero net to achieve carbon developments for new is priority Our change. climate offuture extent the to now limit emissions to reduce opportunity every utilise developments that is essential It demand emissions. and associated carbon energy on impact acumulative have will city the in ofgrowth level the 36.1 that /We recognise CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY E. OVERHEATING Mayor of London’s cooling hierarchy. ofLondon’sMayor cooling the in line with a include cooling strategy will overheating. Major development proposals ofinternal risk the to minimise operated should be designed and developments All

issues in Westminster’s unique circumstances. issues in unique circumstances. Westminster’s to approaches these successful to dealing with and draw attention todocument share practice best planning and we prepare will a supplementary target this achieving in to knowledge share partners regional and local and industry applicants, with work We will innovation. oftechnical advantage taking and ofmeasures arange through achieved be will /The challenge of zero36.3 development carbon Figure 30. Energy hierarchy 30. Figure Be lean: energy use less energy efficiently energy Be clean: supply supply clean: Be Be green: use use green: Be renewable energy Offset

in accordance with London Plan policy. Plan London with accordance in development ofthe lifetime the over management energy monitoring effective and on-going to equipment monitoring energy demonstrate appropriate to install developments major We expect Zero carbon target Zero carbon reduction carbon site 35% on target efficiency Energy Building RegulationsBuilding baseline

ENVIRONMENT 138

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

Figure 31: District energy centres and networks

139 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

Carbon reduction 36.6 / Applicants are strongly encouraged to Overheating engage with us through the pre-application advice 36.4 / The Mayor of London’s energy hierarchy 36.10 / Incorporating low energy and passive process to discuss how they are going to achieve sets out the criteria to maximise the sustainability design measures that manage the risk of a building the carbon reduction figure, especially when it is and efficiency of energy systems in developments. overheating is central to adapting to future climate a combination of physical and financial measures. Carbon emissions can be reduced via a range of changes. We want to ensure that all who live and measures, including the design and orientation of work in the city occupy buildings which are not Energy networks buildings, incorporation of green infrastructure, overheated as this can lead to detrimental health use of light and sustainable materials, as well as 36.7 / Decentralised energy generates power at effects. Applicants should perform internal active measures such as heating, cooling the point of use, increasing efficiencies by utilising temperature modelling as part of the cooling and energy efficient lighting systems. Where generated heat that would otherwise be wasted. strategy and prioritise low-energy measures developments and retrofitting projects do not Decentralised energy can be distributed to to mitigate overheating e.g. orientation, solar utilise standard construction methods and / buildings over a larger area via an underground shading and use of green infrastructure. or incorporate new and emerging technologies, network of pipes, avoiding the need for buildings applicants should discuss their proposal in our to have individual heating equipment. In areas pre-application process prior to the submission of high density and heat demand, such as of the planning application. Westminster, heat networks can provide a viable energy solution for new developments. 36.5 / Developments that are unable to achieve the carbon targets set out in policy on-site will 36.8 / Westminster contains one of the UK’s need to calculate their emissions shortfall in first heat networks at the Pimlico District Heat tonnes of carbon and offset via a cash in lieu Undertaking (PDHU) and there is opportunity for payment. The value of the payment will be new or expanded networks in locations including determined by multiplying the emissions shortfall Victoria, east of Oxford Street, Soho, Paddington by the local cost of carbon over a period of 30 Basin, Church Street and across the city border years. Carbon offset funding will then be allocated to South Kilburn in Brent. to projects that will reduce carbon emissions elsewhere in Westminster. Details of how the 36.9 / The Decentralised Energy Masterplan for Westminster Carbon Offset Fund contribution Westminster (DEM) explores the technical potential will be calculated and administered will be set of decentralised energy in the city and the out in the Planning Obligations and Affordable opportunity areas for future network development. Housing SPD. We will review this document to better reflect future network opportunities and the current policy context. In addition, we will publish a supplementary planning document to assist applicants in meeting the requirements of this policy.

140 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

to the study. We have the aspiration to join the 37. Waste management E. The council will continue to collaborate with Southeast London Joint Waste Planning Group to other Waste Planning Authorities in the plan for waste collectively. The London Borough of A. The council will promote the Circular management of its waste and monitor its Bexley is already part of that group. Economy and contribute to the London waste exports. Plan targets for recycling and for London’s 37.3 / We will contribute towards meeting London net self-sufficiency by 2026. Plan recycling targets. These include 65% for 37.1 / Waste management is one of the greatest ‘municipal’ waste by 2030, 95% for reuse/recycling/ B. All new developments (including extensions challenges for a growing city, which is also recovery for Construction and Demolition waste and change of use) must provide appropriate transitioning to a circular economy. Westminster and 95% beneficial use for excavation waste. These facilities for the storage of separate waste produces more than 180,000 tonnes of waste per are London-wide targets and Westminster will streams which are safe and convenient to year. Households, businesses, institutions and contribute in its capacity as a waste authority access for deposit and collection, with building projects all generate waste in by implementing the municipal waste strategy and sufficient capacity for current and projected Westminster and we have a duty to plan for the in its capacity as a planning authority by requiring future use. management of seven waste streams and to drive developers to meet the recycling and beneficial use waste up the waste hierarchy. The seven waste targets for construction, demolition and excavation C. Developers are required to demonstrate streams include Local Authority Collected Waste (CD&E) waste in the London Plan and provide through a Circular Economy Statement, Site (LACW), Commercial & Industrial (C&I) waste, sufficient space for segregating waste in new Environment Management Plan and/or Construction, Demolition and Excavation (CD&E) developments. Circular Economy Statements associated Site Waste Management Plan, waste, hazardous, agricultural, low level should be submitted for referable applications the recycling, re-use, and responsible radioactive waste and waste water. in line with London Plan policy SI7 to demonstrate disposal of Construction, Demolition and how CD&E recycling and beneficial use targets will Excavation waste in accordance with 37.2 / We will contribute to the London Plan target be met. The Government revoked the Site Waste London Plan targets and the council’s of net self-sufficiency by 2026 by planning for Management Plan Regulations 2008 requiring a site Code of Construction Practice (CoCP). Westminster’s apportionment targets. We have waste management plan (SWMP) for construction reached an agreement with the London Borough projects costing greater than £300,000 (exc VAT). D. Existing waste management facilities of Bexley to use part of its surplus capacity to meet However, given the very significant amounts of shown on Figure 32 will be protected. Westminster’s 2.3% waste apportionment targets construction and associated CD&E waste Any proposals for new waste management (LACW and C&I waste streams) as set out in the generated in the city, we continue to require facilities will be assessed against the London Plan5. This arrangement has been production of an SWMP for such projects and for all criteria set out in the London Plan and informed by a Waste Data Study (2020) which basement developments as specified in its CoCP national policy. provides an understanding of the city’s waste which includes management of CD&E waste, both need and has been formalised in a Statement of through on-site recycling and re-use and on-site Common Ground which is included in an appendix waste processing prior to disposal.

5 Table 9.2 in Policy SI8 of the London Plan

141 CONTENTS 6 2019) guide (April Requirements Storage Waste and Recycle Our for collection. and communal areas storage ready units individual for both scheme, ofthe design the into integrated are fully that facilities storage waste segregated 37.6 should provide adequate /Developments B. Appendix for Waste Policy Planning National and SI8 Policy Plan London in criteria set the out against be assessed will facilities Westminster. for proposals Any management waste for new sitesmonitor and research in opportunities and we to continue management will facilities waste existing protect therefore we will and for management facilities waste new strategic 37.5 land suitable has no industrial /Westminster are required for streams. waste these generated in Westminster, facilities so no additional is waste radioactive oflow-level amount small very Thames Tidewaythe Tunnel scheme a and only of Treatment part as Sewage Works Beckton of the Thames Water and expansion upgrade the through by addressed is treatment water Waste Hillingdon). London residents in all London Boroughs (except to HWCDS, Service, Disposal and Collection provides a HazardousCorporation Waste ofLondon City The waste. for such required is capacity from boroughs and other no additional imports waste agricultural Royal together with Parks city’s the in composted is waste 37.4 /Agricultural CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY applicants with guidance on how it expects this to this expects it how on guidance with applicants westminster.gov.uk/waste-storage-planning-advice 6 , provides provides , Westminster’s waste exports. waste Westminster’s of destination and type amount, the include Monitoring to indicators co-operate. duty the under authorities these and engage with exports waste to monitor continue We will are available. waste for CD&E destinations alternative that agree and to continue able be not may exports waste or continue can highlight anythis issues where to agree waste ofWestminster’s amount strategic a receive whom Authorities Planning Waste the with Ground ofCommon Statements agreed We have ofLondon. outside facilities in managed is waste Hazardous and waste Excavation and Demolition Construction, Westminster’s of Part Lewisham. and Southwark including London in to facilities going waste industrial and commercial and collected authority local the of all with ofwaste, exporter anet is Westminster that explains It exports. and imports waste on 37.7 detail (2020) provides Study Data Waste /The should on-site. be provided toappropriate types waste manage facilities these of waste, Where types uses generate specialist collection. waste to approach specific area an demand that in oflocations amalgamation facilities for requirements the the This also supports required. as development the within compactors and ofbalers installation the including done be ENVIRONMENT 142

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

Figure 32: Waste management facilities

143 CONTENTS DESIGN AND HERITAGE

A design for life

Westminster is a city of contrasts. A place where the historic heart of London stands shoulder to shoulder with the contemporary heart of business.

It’s a city that means different things to different people, but has to work for everyone.

For us, the only design that works is design that’s people-centred. Design that strives to enhance not just our environment, but the health and well-being of those in it. Design that adds to our heritage and character for generations to come. Design that brilliantly exemplifies the very best in sustainable, urban living.

By placing the people at the heart of the design process, we improve the quality of life for everyone. CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

38. Design principles PEOPLE-CENTRED DESIGN measures have been incorporated into designs, utilising environmental A. New development will incorporate C. All development will place people at performance standards as follows: exemplary standards of high quality, the heart of design, creating inclusive sustainable and inclusive urban design and accessible spaces and places, 1. Non-domestic developments of and architecture befitting Westminster’s introducing measures that reduce the 500 sq m of floorspace (GIA) or above world-class status, environment and opportunity for crime and anti-social will achieve at least BREEAM “Excellent” heritage and its diverse range of locally behaviour, promoting health, well-being or equivalent standard. distinctive neighbourhoods. and active lifestyles through design and 2. Residential conversions and extensions ensuring a good standard of amenity of 500 sq m (GIA) of residential RESPONDING TO WESTMINSTER’S CONTEXT for new and existing occupiers. floorspace or above, or five or more B. All development will positively contribute to dwellings will aim to achieve “Excellent” SUSTAINABLE DESIGN Westminster’s townscape and streetscape, in BREEAM domestic refurbishment or having regard to: D. Development will enable the extended equivalent standard. lifetime of buildings and spaces and respond 1. the character and appearance of the to the likely risks and consequences of PROMOTING EXCELLENCE IN existing area, adjacent buildings and climate change by incorporating principles CONTEMPORARY DESIGN heritage assets, the spaces around and of sustainable design, including: between them and the pattern and grain F. Imaginative approaches to of existing streets, squares, mews 1. use of high-quality durable materials contemporary architecture and use of and passageways; and detail; innovative modern building techniques and materials will be encouraged where 2. materials, building lines, scale, 2. providing flexible, high quality floorspace; they result in exemplary new buildings orientation, access, definition, surface 3. optimising resource and water efficiency; and public realm which incorporate the treatment, height and massing; highest standards of environmental 4. enabling the incorporation of, 3. the form, character and ecological sustainability, that respect and enhance or connection to, future services value of parks, gardens and other their surroundings and are integrated or facilities; and open spaces; with and better reveal Westminster’s 5. minimising the need for plant heritage and existing townscape. 4. Westminster’s waterways and and machinery. waterbodies; and 5. the preservation and enhancement E. Applicants will demonstrate how of the surrounding tree population. sustainable design principles and

146 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

38.1 / Central to delivering the right kind of 38.5 / Applicants should demonstrate that design 38.8 / Buildings and the spaces which adjoin growth that underpins this plan is ensuring that proposals are based on a thorough analysis and them should be fully accessible and inclusive new development embodies the highest quality understanding of the site, its setting, context and for all, including people of all ages and those of design that will deliver sustainable development character, taking account of the qualities of the with mobility and sensory impairment or other and a successful future for our city. built and natural environment, streetscape, open health concerns or disabilities. In addition to spaces, trees, green infrastructure and canal and physical access to buildings and places, this will 38.2 / Given the exceptional quality of riverside settings. This analysis should include include improving wayfinding, to making the public Westminster’s built environment, it is essential to the area’s physical form, its morphological and realm easier, more pleasant and safe. Access to ensure equally high-quality architecture and urban historical development, its uses, the nature existing buildings, especially historic buildings, may design in all new developments. Westminster’s and quality of the public realm, the relationship present additional challenges, but there will almost unique built environment, spacious parks and river between different parts of the city and the patterns always be scope to make improvements. In some frontage are known throughout the world and of movement and activities. locations this may not just be about physical access include some of central London’s best loved historic but should also consider the ways in which services areas, buildings and landmarks, as well as lesser People-centred design and information can be managed and provided to known residential areas; most are characterised by meet the needs of all users. In all cases, applicants 38.6 / We promote a city that works for everyone, their human scale. These qualities underpin the will be required to demonstrate that access a city for all. Placing people at the heart of the city’s attractiveness as a place to live, work and visit provision has been considered effectively. design process means that the users of the and contribute to a high quality of life for everyone. buildings and spaces are considered throughout To achieve our growth targets sustainably, we 38.9 / Well-designed environments can help to all design stages. We encourage applicants to expect a design-led approach which will optimise minimise the opportunities for crime, anti-social engage with local communities early in the design capacity of sites in the most appropriate way, based behaviour and reduce the fear of crime. New process and will support collaborative and on an understanding of context. developments should make every effort to participatory design approaches. contribute to increasing safety and security in 38.3 / We will prepare supplementary guidance the built environment through proactive design 38.7 / Architecture and urban design can help on the application of this and other design policies. solutions to reduce crime and anti-social promote good physical and mental health by behaviour (including counter-terrorism measures) creating streets, spaces and buildings which allow Responding to Westminster’s context providing active frontages, avoiding recesses, and encourage healthy lifestyles and take into promoting natural surveillance and defining private 38.4 / Design should always respond to account the amenity of occupiers, considering and public space to ensure a clear sense of local context and distinctiveness, including issues such as noise, access to open space and ownership and responsibility. These should be Westminster’s differing roles as a place to live, air quality. Applicants should demonstrate how integral to the design from the outset or where the heart of national life and government, as a development will contribute to improving health added to existing buildings, must be sensitively business and commercial centre and a tourist and well-being and refer to Sport England’s Active designed and sited. destination. It should show how it will improve Design Guidance for further information on the the quality of existing residential neighbourhoods principles of Active Design.1 and, where appropriate, provide a successful foundation for new communities. 1 Active Design Guidance, Sport England 147 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

Sustainable design efficiency requirement of 105 litres or less per person/day in line with Policy SI5 of the London 38.10 / We want to encourage durable buildings 39. Westminster’s heritage Plan. This will be secured by condition. to leave our generations’ mark for generations to A. Westminster’s unique historic environment come. Applicants should demonstrate that they will be valued and celebrated for its 38.12 / Connectivity to future services can have taken into account principles of sustainable contribution to the quality of life and include digital networks and sustainable energy design and that measures to improve character of the city. Public enjoyment of, or district energy networks. Connection to nearby environmental performance and mitigate and access to and awareness of the city’s energy networks or shared provision for plant adapt to climate change have been integrated into heritage will be promoted. and machinery should be explored to maximise the design. This may include strategic design efficiencies and minimise the need for new plant. considerations, such as the orientation of buildings B. Development must optimise the positive Consideration should be given to how buildings and spaces, design of façades to capitalise on role of the historic environment in and spaces will be managed by either private or solar gain, whilst minimising risks of overheating Westminster’s townscape, economy public owners and managers, to ensure they remain and other measures, for example incorporation of and sustainability, and will: of high quality over the lifetime of the development. green infrastructure, flood resilience and 1. ensure heritage assets and sustainable drainage measures. Excellence in 38.13 / BREEAM (Building Research their settings are conserved design quality and floorspace adaptability should Establishment’s Environmental Assessment and enhanced, in a manner support the lifespan of buildings. Method) is the most commonly used methodology appropriate to their significance; for assessing, rating and certifying the sustainable 38.11 / As new developments are large consumers 2. secure the conservation and continued design and construction of buildings. Applicants of resources and materials, the possibility of beneficial use of heritage assets will demonstrate how they will meet BREEAM or sensitively refurbishing or retrofitting buildings through their retention and sensitive equivalent standards. should also be considered prior to demolition adaptation which will avoid harm and proposals for substantial demolition and to their significance, while allowing Promoting excellence in contemporary design reconstruction should be fully justified on the basis them to meet changing needs and of whole-life carbon impact, resource and energy 38.14 / We welcome creative approaches to mitigate and adapt to climate change; use, when compared to the existing building. All contemporary, high quality architecture and 3. place heritage at the heart of development should ensure the reduction, reuse state of the art building technology in appropriate place making and good growth, or recycling of resources and materials, including locations, optimising densities and making the maintaining the unique character of water and waste and minimise energy use and most of the opportunities they present to our heritage assets and delivering emissions that contribute to climate change. As celebrate, enhance and reveal the existing high quality new buildings and spaces Westminster falls within an area classified as built and historic environment. which enhance their settings. “seriously” water stressed, all development should maximise water efficiency. Residential development should meet the optional water

148 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

WESTMINSTER WORLD HERITAGE SITE LISTED BUILDINGS L. There will be a presumption that unlisted buildings that make a positive contribution C. The Outstanding Universal Value G. Works to listed buildings will preserve to a conservation area will be conserved, (OUV), authenticity and integrity of the their special interest, relating sensitively unless it has been demonstrated that Westminster World Heritage Site will be to the period and architectural detail the relevant tests in national policy conserved and enhanced. The setting of of the building and protecting or, have been met. Buildings which make a the site will be protected and managed where appropriate, restoring original or negative or neutral contribution may be to support and enhance its OUV. significant detail and historic fabric. replaced or refurbished where this will result in a high quality building which D. Development will protect the skyline, H. Changes of use to listed buildings will improve their appearance in the prominence and iconic silhouettes of the will be consistent with their long-term context of the conservation area and Palace of Westminster and Westminster conservation and help to restore, retain their environmental performance. Abbey and will protect and enhance and maintain buildings, particularly those identified views out of, across and which have been identified as at risk. M. The contribution of existing uses to the towards the World Heritage Site. character, function and appearance of I. Development within the settings or conservation areas will be considered E. The council will work with partners to affecting views of listed buildings and changes of use supported where promote the use, management and will take opportunities to enhance or they make a positive contribution to interpretation of the site in ways that better reveal their significance. conservation areas and their settings. protect, enhance and better communicate its OUV. The council will commit to lead J. Demolition of listed buildings will be ARCHAEOLOGY the production and review of an updated regarded as substantial harm and will be World Heritage Site Management Plan. resisted in all but exceptional circumstances. N. Westminster’s Scheduled Monuments and their settings will be preserved, F. Applicants will be required to demonstrate CONSERVATION AREAS and opportunities taken to that any impacts of their proposals on enhance and communicate their K. Development will preserve or enhance the the World Heritage Site or its setting significance, where appropriate. character and appearance of Westminster’s have been fully assessed, informed by conservation areas. Features that contribute Heritage Impact Assessment methodology O. Applicants for development which positively to the significance of conservation and that any harm, including cumulative involves excavation or ground works in areas and their settings will be conserved and harm, has been avoided or justified. Westminster’s Archaeological Priority opportunities taken to enhance conservation Areas or other areas suspected of having areas and their settings, wherever possible.

149 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY R. NON-DESIGNATED HERITAGE ASSETS Q. PARKS AND GARDENS HISTORICREGISTERED P.

open spaces of interest within and outside spacesopen and outside of interest within and archaeology of buildings merit, local (including assets heritage Non-designated spaces. these towards and from views significant and settings their protect and and appearance,integrity, character safeguardwill interest, special historic their gardens and spaces open parks, historic registered Westminster’s Proposals affecting interpretation, where appropriate. and display public including required, be will archiving and of publication level appropriate an and recording be of significance,full lesser investigation, are considered or deposits toimpossible is situ in remains of archaeological conservation the that demonstrated been has it Where possible. wherever situ in be preserved will deposits Archaeological of proposals. for implications any archaeological of site and planned the and assessed archaeological potential and significance the evaluated haveproperly they that archaeological potential demonstrate will

scale and potential impact of proposals. andscale potential impact the and significance asset’s to the proportionate should be submitted Information assets. heritage requiredusually where development affect will is statement ofcircumstances case. A the heritage the and benefits) heritage include may (which benefits public any considered, been have which alternatives substantial), or than less substantial (whether caused ofharm degree the designation, its asset, the of significance the account into taking justification, full require will harm Any avoided. harm toinstance, significance beshould their first the In and understood. assessed fully been have ofproposals impact and assets heritage should ensure significance of the /Applicants 39.2 growth. ofgood part integral an as and significance to its appropriate ways in refurbished and maintained, environment is valued, historic the that vital is it city, ofour oflife quality and economy to character, the immense contribution its Given importance. international and are ofnational which of many assets, heritage ofits importance and concentration the from part large in derives city ofthe character unique The assets. greatest its 39.1 environment is one historic of /Westminster’s the benefit of thepropose of benefit the and asset ofthe loss or harm ofany scale be made will regardingjudgement the a balanced assets, heritage non-designated affecting proposals assessing When areas) be conserved. will conservation d development.

planning process. the in possible weight maximum and protection oflevel highest the afforded be must and ofsignificance level highest ofthe is it importance, asset ofdesignated international heritage a As Value (OUV). Universal Outstanding its recognises Site Heritage aWorld as Church, Abbey,and Westminster including St Margaret’s of Palace /The39.4 the inscription of Westminster Westminster World Heritage Site significance. where buildings enhance they historic their creative design approaches of to upgrading the guidance. and ourwill Retrofitting We encourage England’s Historic in out set advice and design visibility, siting, construction, traditional fabric, historic on to impacts regard having compromised, and ensuresis significance their not that differently function buildings and historic modern recognises which taken is specification and and tailoredwhere approach a to sensitive design supported be only will buildings historic retrofitting Proposals for performance. environmental and facilities environment and upgrade historic to the access to improve solutions sensitive to find scope be always almost also will There needs. changing to meet to adapt need also assets heritage future, to haveasustainable but construction, new with associated footprint carbon climate by change against higher avoiding the fight the in help can stock building historic our of reuse and regeneration retention, /The 39.3 DESIGN 150

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

Figure 33: Westminster World Heritage Site

151 CONTENTS the World Heritage Site steering group to update to update group steering Site Heritage World the with are working and site the within key buildings ofthe protection the to ensure Abbey Westminster plans for Palace the and of Westminster management of conservation production support encouraged and where initiated possible. We will measures experience, and visitor be will security approaches and ceremonial routes to site, the toincluding improvements public realm and site, to the adjacent immediately and within spaces is to realised. Enhancements the setting site and its enhancement of of and communication the OUV conservation, to the projects of such contribution toorganisations ensure potential for positive the Palace of Westminster. We partner work with will and Renewal Restoration the of the particular in period, Plan the during Site Heritage World the affect will projects of significant 39.6 /Anumber theplan. managementin identified OUV of the attributes key and significant site makes the ofwhat Value for asummary Universal should refer to Statement the of Outstanding 2 byICOMOS. out set methodology using the Assessment Impact a Heritage include will this statement, to heritage the addition and scale nature on the depending of in proposals have considered been and impacts demonstrate information should Sufficient be provided to enhance reveal OUV.conserve, or better its will proposals demonstrate will applicants setting, its or site the affect will development /Where 39.5 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY

World Heritage Properties, ICOMOS, 2011 ICOMOS, Properties, Heritage World for Cultural Assessments Impact Guidance on Heritage 2 Applicants Applicants

as well as patterns of openings, chimney breasts, breasts, chimney ofopenings, patterns as well as foundations), of (including building the structure the levels, floor historic ofrooms, hierarchy and location form, plan as such features internal include may This to which contribute special interest. elements those protect and should identify Applicants significance. to contribute which ofwork phases later any and building original ofthe style and materials detail, and relatefabric to architectural the sensitively or original to buildings listed safeguard important to extensions and alterations /We39.9 expect development. city’s ofthe record physical irreplaceable an provide these together furniture; of street items to small landmarks well-known from range structures and buildings listed 11,000 /Our 39.8 Listed buildings andunderstood managed. are setting its within ofdevelopment impacts and ensure cumulative the setting wider and its site the towards views to protect to work continue will We it. affect can ofWestminster, City the development at including some outside distance, means that prominence location and riverside Value. Universal The site’sOutstanding contribute significantly to its ofan understanding Palace the Abbey and of Westminster Westminster of views iconic and silhouettes 39.7 striking /The setting. its and site the of management sustainable long-term for the tool akey is which site, for the plan management the

Policy Framework (NPPF). Framework Policy Planning National the in out set as demonstrated, where exceptional have circumstances been be considered harm only will result in substantial will which buildings oflisted demolition substantial or total The building. ofthe conservation long-term the achieve to flexibly applied be may policies plan development other building, listed a use for viable optimum the finding In value. heritage their uses consistent with into active repair back buildings and bring works necessary development enable whichwill support will England’sHistoric at Risk Heritage Register, we on those including threats, other or decay neglect, through risk are at buildings 39.11 listed /Where and access. servicing loadings, issues such as fire protection, sound proofing, floor given to consideration particular with modifications, or extensions harmful newthe use without into converted ofbeing capable be possible, as far so should, building the proposed, is ofuse a change changes of use help can sensitive Where secure this. and and suitable long-term, in the conserved to be viable economically to remain need buildings However,listed most significance. ofits part be often very will this and built, was it for which that be will building for alisted use best the 39.10 general, /In we requirestolen, will reinstatement. their or are damaged features such If managed. be will shouldmarket consider how risk this and applicants buildings are undergoing vacant, work or on the when theft or damage of risk at be can fittings and fixtures Historic and roofstaircases structures. DESIGN 152

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

Figure 34: Archaeological Priority Areas and Scheduled Monuments in Westminster

153 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

39.12 / Even development at some distance which for example through the redevelopment or Archaeology doesn’t physically affect a listed building may harm its improvement of buildings or features which detract 39.18 / Westminster’s archaeology is an setting. Applicants should demonstrate they have from the area, reinstatement of original detail or irreplaceable and fragile asset. Investigation has assessed impacts upon setting and where it can be historic plot widths and original urban grain, revealed evidence of prehistoric, Roman, Saxon sustainably achieved, development within the setting where appropriate. medieval and post medieval archaeology. of a listed building should take opportunities to enhance or better reveal its significance. 39.16 / Demolition or substantial demolition of 39.19 / Westminster’s three Scheduled unlisted buildings that make a positive contribution Monuments (the Chapter House and Pyx Chamber Conservation areas to a conservation area will be resisted unless it can be next to the abbey cloisters, Westminster Abbey; demonstrated that the public benefits of the proposal, 39.13 / Westminster’s exceptional range of the Jewel Tower; and a subterranean commercial including the quality of the replacement building, conservation areas are designated for their special ice-well, Park Crescent West) will be afforded the outweigh the case for retention of the building. Any historic or architectural interest. Many have a high highest levels of protection. replacement buildings in a conservation area must proportion of listed buildings and some contain respect and seek to enhance its character and townscape of more than local significance. It is 39.20 / The Greater London Archaeological Advisory appearance. In some circumstances, demolition particularly important that development in Service (GLAAS) identify Archaeological Priority behind retained façades can provide a way to protect conservation areas is of the highest architectural Areas (APAs) based on evidence held in the Greater façades of townscape merit while allowing new quality and responds positively to their character London Historic Environmental Record (GLHER). accommodation to be developed behind this and and appearance. Each APA is assigned to a tier reflecting their may be acceptable where the overall integrity of archaeological sensitivity and significance. APAs unlisted buildings is maintained in street views 39.14 / We will not accept outline planning are non-designated heritage assets, but as set out retaining side or rear elevations or roofscapes of applications for development in, or affecting the in the NPPF (Footnote 63) where these are found to townscape value. In all cases, we will only allow setting of, conservation areas. Applicants should include sites or archaeology of national importance demolition where proposals for the future demonstrate a full understanding of the significance equivalent to Scheduled Monuments, these sites or redevelopment of the site have been approved and of the area, explaining how its key characteristics archaeological findings should be accorded the same their implementation assured by planning condition have informed proposals and identifying those weight as designated heritage assets. or agreement, to avoid harmful gaps occurring within elements which contribute positively to character the townscape as a result of empty plots. and appearance. These may include buildings, 39.21 / Applications for development which landmarks, views, trees, open spaces, historic plot involves ground works in APAs in Tiers 1-3 must 39.17 / Conservation area audits provide additional widths, street layouts and land use patterns or other be accompanied by an archaeological desk-based guidance for applicants and identify buildings and features of architectural or historic interest which assessment and, where appropriate, field features which contribute to or detract from contribute to local distinctiveness. evaluations to demonstrate that potential impacts individual areas across Westminster. We will review of proposed development on archaeological and update these where necessary and keep 39.15 / Opportunities should be taken to significance have been fully considered. All land conservation area boundaries under review. enhance conservation areas wherever possible, outside APAs is treated as being in Tier 4 but major

154 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

developments in these areas sometimes require local interest and contribute to the character and communities and other stakeholders to improve the same archaeological evidence as higher tiers. setting of conservation areas and listed buildings. understanding of local heritage of interest and develop criteria to ensure a consistent approach is 39.22 / The design of development should make 39.26 / Proposals affecting the layout, design, taken to the future identification and conservation provision for incorporation, safeguarding and character, use and function of historic parks and of our local heritage. preservation in situ of archaeological remains gardens should retain and enhance their significance wherever possible and there will always be a and should not prejudice their future restoration. presumption in favour of the retention of nationally- Features such as original planting layout, garden 40. Townscape and architecture important archaeology in situ. Where we agree that buildings, statuary, railings, steps and fountains should A. Development will be sensitively designed, conservation of archaeological remains in situ is be identified and protected. Views from and towards having regard to the prevailing scale, impossible or deposits are of lesser significance, historic open spaces can also be particularly significant heights, character, building lines and investigation, recording and an appropriate level and the impact of development on views and the plot widths, materials, architectural of publication and archiving will be required. setting of open spaces should be carefully managed to quality and degree of uniformity in maintain the character and enjoyment of these spaces. the surrounding townscape. Historic Parks and Gardens Non-designated heritage assets 39.23 / Westminster’s rich legacy of historic parks B. Spaces and features that form an and gardens are a cherished part of Westminster’s 39.27 / Although the highest level of protection will important element in Westminster’s heritage and an intrinsic part of the city’s character. be afforded to designated heritage assets, local townscapes or contribute to the These include garden squares, designed landscapes, non-designated heritage assets also contribute significance of a heritage asset will be public parks, churchyards and private gardens. positively to Westminster’s historic environment. conserved, enhanced and sensitively These may include local buildings of merit, parks and integrated within new development, 39.24 / The Royal Parks and several other parks, gardens, street furniture or archaeological deposits. including important architectural details, gardens and squares are included on Historic Unlisted buildings and other features and spaces of boundary walls and railings, historic roof England’s Register of Parks and Gardens of merit may be identified by us and local communities forms or structures, open lightwells, historic Special Historic Interest and as such are in conservation area audits, supplementary or characteristic shopfronts and street recognised as designated heritage assets. planning documents, specific studies or in made furniture, as well as squares, parks and Proposals that will have a harmful impact on their neighbourhood plans or any future local list. In gardens. Where possible, lost or damaged significance will be required to meet the relevant some circumstances, they may come to light as features will be reinstated or restored. tests set out in the NPPF. part of the development management process. EXTENSIVE DEVELOPMENTS 39.25 / Most London Squares in Westminster are 39.28 / Some non-designated heritage assets are C. Extensive development will maximise protected by the London Squares Preservation Act subject to other legislation and guidance, including opportunities to enhance the character, 1931 and many other gardens and open spaces, London Squares and Archaeological Priority although not designated heritage assets, are of Areas, as set out above. We will work with local

155 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

townscapes include highly uniform residential quality and functionality of the site and take a coordinated approach, adding terraces, squares and crescents which form its surroundings, including creating new roof extensions of consistent and architectural set-pieces, relatively modest workers’ compositions and points of interest, and appropriate design to each property housing and mews and in contrast, areas of varied high-quality new streets and spaces, across the terrace; townscape characterised by architecture from a linked to the surrounding townscape to wide variety of eras and in a variety of styles. 3. in other locations, be of appropriate maximise accessibility. design sympathetic to the architectural 40.3 / We recognise that there will be greater character of the existing building. ALTERATIONS AND EXTENSIONS potential for modern intervention, regeneration and change in certain areas of Westminster, where D. Alterations and extensions will respect WESTMINSTER VIEWS the quality of the existing built environment may the character of the existing and F. New development affecting strategic and be lower or character more varied. In other areas, adjoining buildings, avoid adverse visual local views (including local views of the quality and / or uniformity of existing and amenity impacts and will not obscure metropolitan importance) will contribute townscape demands a different architectural important architectural features or disrupt positively to their characteristics, response and a greater degree of integration with any uniformity, patterns, rhythms or composition and significance and will the existing context. In general, the more uniform groupings of buildings and spaces that remedy past damage to these views the townscape, the greater the degree of contribute positively to Westminster’s wherever possible. coherence with the original scale, form and distinctive townscape. materials of the existing townscape that should be shown by new development. ROOF EXTENSIONS 40.1 / The densely developed townscape and E. Roof extensions will be supported in concentration of heritage assets in Westminster 40.4 / A variety of distinctive spaces and features principle where they do not impact means that most development opportunities contribute to the character and appearance of adversely on heritage assets and should: involve the infilling of small sites or extensions townscapes across the city. The layout and pattern to existing buildings within areas of established of development in Westminster, much of which was 1. where part of a terrace or group already townscape. We will seek to ensure the design of developed in the Georgian and Victorian eras, gives characterised by roof additions or such development will respond positively to the rise to certain locally distinctive building forms, alterations, be of appropriate design which character of Westminster’s diverse and distinctive rhythms and patterns of architectural detail within the follows an established form and would neighbourhoods and celebrate and build upon townscape. Where such characteristic architectural help to unify the architectural character of the legacy of high-quality architecture in the city. detailing, features and spaces contribute to the the existing terrace or a group; townscape, these should be retained, enhanced and 2. where part of a terrace with an existing 40.2 / It is important that what makes different integrated within new designs, where appropriate. roof line unimpaired by roof extensions, parts of Westminster special and unique is not lost The protection and /or restoration of such features as our city grows and develops. Our varied and spaces is particularly important when heritage assets are affected.

156 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

Extensive developments should be subordinate to the host building, 40.11 / If properties affected form part of a group respecting the scale, detailing and materials of both or terrace that remain largely unaltered or have 40.5 / Extensive development covers a large site existing buildings and adjoining townscape. Care a historic or distinctive roofscape integral to the area and has some independence of character should always be taken not to disfigure buildings or architectural character of that building, further which differentiates it from the surrounding upset their proportions and to ensure good standards upward extension may be unacceptable, and the townscape. Such sites are relatively uncommon in of amenity as set out in Policy 7. design of development proposals will need to be Westminster and most are likely to be covered by especially carefully considered. Where a terrace site briefs or design guides providing further 40.8 / Roof extensions can be a practical way retains a uniform roofline with no roof extensions, guidance. Where they do exist or become to create additional floorspace but can also the addition of one roof extension or multiple roof available, their potential to improve the quality and have a significant impact on the character and extensions of different designs can cause harm functionality of the area must be fully realised. A appearance of buildings and the wider townscape, to the appearance of the roofscape. However, we comprehensive and integrated approach to urban and a sensitive approach and highest standards will consider applications which would take a design will be required, including consideration of of design will be required. coordinated approach, adding roof extensions of building layouts, creation of new public realm, consistent design to a complete terrace with a streets and spaces, incorporation of landscaping 40.9 / National and London Plan policy identifies the uniform roofline. This will typically be on Georgian and infrastructure to maximise the opportunities potential for building upwards to increase housing and Victorian terraces where mansard roof for positive change. Designs will build in capacity supply. Where upwards extensions will allow the extensions can be accommodated behind a for future needs, promoting legibility and ensuring creation of additional residential floorspace to parapet. In such cases we will require extensions good connections, while also taking into account provide family housing or new self-contained across the whole terrace group to be implemented the wider setting. residential units and they are sympathetic to the at one time and this may be secured by legal townscape context, they will be supported. agreement. Upwards extension will usually be Alterations and extensions inappropriate where a mansard or other later roof 40.6 / Given the densely developed character of 40.10 / Many of Westminster’s residential areas are extension already exists. the city, extensions to existing buildings (both characterised by terraced housing of consistent upwards and outwards) have an important role to design. On terraced houses of the Georgian and 40.12 / While one additional storey will often be most play in meeting the growth ambitions of this plan. Victorian eras, mansards will very often be the most appropriate, larger extensions of more than one They can provide room for expanding families, appropriate form of roof extension. However, this storey may be appropriate in certain locations, may provide additional housing units, and can will depend on the age and style of the building. particularly in commercial locations with more varied allow businesses to grow, as part of single or Where mansards or other roofs are an established townscape character including the Opportunity mixed-use development. feature within a group of buildings, roof extensions Areas, in the International Centres of the West End which follow the established pattern will usually be and Knightsbridge and the Queensway/ Westbourne 40.7 / Works to alter and extend existing buildings will considered acceptable, but they should respect Grove Major Centre, and in other commercial be supported where they are successfully integrated existing architectural features such as chimneys, locations on the Transport for London and Strategic with their surroundings. To achieve this, extensions party wall upstands, parapets and cornices. Road networks which are characterised by a larger

157 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

scale of townscape. In these locations more than one Westminster views metropolitan importance and prepare guidance on storey will be supported where it is demonstrated it their management. Other views are important at a 40.15 / Westminster’s unique townscape gives rise can be designed to minimise harm to townscape, local level and may be identified by us or local to some of the most familiar and cherished views amenity and heritage assets and will help fulfil growth communities in conservation area audits, made of London. These include views of the River targets. This will depend on townscape context. Not neighbourhood plans or other area-based studies. Thames and its frontages, the Royal Parks, as well all of the buildings within areas identified will be as many other ‘picture postcard’ views of famous suitable for roof extensions and there may be other 40.18 / New development should make a positive London landmarks. commercial locations across the city where larger contribution to the characteristics and composition roof extensions can be accommodated. of significant views, both strategic and local, 40.16 / There is a hierarchy of protected views in and improvement to significant views will be terms of their significance, sensitivity and status in 40.13 / The creation of larger extensions to encouraged. This may include a proactive the planning system. Strategic views are those existing buildings may also lead to additional approach to view enhancement by repairing which are considered to help define the character challenges and the capacity to support additional past damaging development. For example, of London and are identified in the London Plan – loading will be an important factor in determining opportunities should be taken to reduce the scale eighteen of these affect Westminster. Several of the feasibility of delivering such rooftop and impact of existing harmful buildings in the these are protected vistas and have geometrically development. Where substantial demolition of foreground or middle ground of protected vistas. defined viewing corridors, subject to specific existing buildings will be required to allow for Careful consideration of building materials and protection and height limits. Several designated additional height this will be considered having finishes can make proposals more sympathetic townscape views and river prospect views are regard to the criteria set out in heritage policy. in long distance views. A proportionate approach focused on the Palace of Westminster and protect to view protection will be taken, taking into its silhouette. Guidance on these views is set out 40.14 / Even small-scale alterations and additions account the significance of the view and in the London View Management Framework. can have a cumulative impact on townscape magnitude of impact of proposals. character. The design of new doors, windows or 40.17 / Local views are valued for their contribution shopfonts should be carefully considered to relate 40.19 / We will work with adjoining boroughs to to Westminster’s distinctive character areas. These sensitively to the existing building and adjoining ensure the impact of development in Westminster may contribute to the appreciation of important townscape. Additions such as plant, balustrades, on protected views in other boroughs (and vice- listed and other landmark buildings or distinctive fire escapes routes, telecommunications versa) is understood and managed carefully and skylines or groupings of buildings, historic parks equipment, cameras and alarms, micro-generation sensitively. Potential impacts on views should be and gardens, and views along or across the River equipment, any associated cables and fixings, as identified through visibility analysis, supported Thames and Westminster’s canals. Recognising the well as air conditioning units, flues and water tanks wherever possible by the use of accurate 3D national importance of Westminster’s heritage and should always be carefully designed, sited and digital modelling. townscape, we have also identified certain detailed or screened where appropriate. ‘metropolitan views’ of major landmarks and the most significant river views and areas of townscape in the city. We will publish a list of views of

158 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

Figure 35: Protected Vistas and Other Strategic Views

159 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

41. Building height and landscapes, or detracting from PADDINGTON OPPORTUNITY AREA important landmarks, heritage assets, A. Tall buildings are defined as buildings of There may be potential for further tall key views and other historic skylines twice the prevailing context height or buildings in this area that complement and and their settings; and higher or those which will result in a help to frame the setting of Paddington significant change to the skyline. In all 5. mitigate negative impacts on the Basin and contribute to the quality and locations proposals for tall buildings will microclimate and amenity of the site character of the existing cluster. need to satisfy both the general principles and surrounding area; and The prevailing context height for the wider in clause B and relevant locational 6. avoid unacceptable impacts on aviation Paddington area is identified as 6 residential principles in clauses C and D (and for and telecommunications; and storeys (20m) with a varied context. Tall Housing Renewal Areas, Policy 42). buildings within this area of 2 to 3 times this 7. provide publicly accessible viewing context height may be appropriate. GENERAL PRINCIPLES platforms at the roof of the building (for any exceptionally tall buildings). B. Proposals for tall buildings will be MARYLEBONE FLYOVER / required to: EDGWARE ROAD JUNCTION LOCATIONAL PRINCIPLES 1. be proportionate to the role, function Tall buildings may be appropriate at the C. Development of tall buildings may be and importance of the location in terms junction of the flyover and Edgware Road acceptable within the Paddington of height, scale, massing and form; and but must be designed to relate to and Opportunity Areas, Victoria Opportunity complement each other and help to frame 2. achieve exceptional architectural quality Areas, Marylebone flyover / Edgware Road this area as a gateway junction. and innovative and sustainable building junction and the Housing Renewal Areas. design from all viewpoints and Provided in the first instance they comply with The height of any tall building in this location directions; and the general principles under clause B. These must step down significantly from, and be principles need to be cross-referenced subordinate to, those in the Paddington 3. create an attractive and legible against the area specific design principles set Basin cluster. They must also be slender and streetscape that takes account of the out below, and for the Housing Renewal elegant in their form. The acceptability of a use of the public realm for a variety of Areas, policy 42 and with site-specific tall building proposed in this area depends uses and includes active uses at ground guidance set out in the forthcoming Site on the quality of its design, reflecting its role floor level; and Allocations Development Plan Document: as a local landmark. 4. enhance the character and The prevailing context height in this area is 6 distinctiveness of an area without residential storeys (20m) but as it sits within a negatively affecting valued townscapes

160 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

41.3 / The impact of a building’s height is varied context. Tall buildings of 2 to 3 times of civic or visual significance within the dependent on its context. An eight-storey building the context height may be appropriate. area; and may be perceived as tall in one area, but not in another. We therefore follow a context-based 2. will not undermine the prominence VICTORIA OPPORTUNITY AREA approach to tall buildings, which considers the and / or integrity of existing landmark prevailing height of the surrounding areas There may be potential for further tall buildings and tall building clusters. impacted by the development. The prevailing buildings in this area that complement and context height sets a baseline against which help to frame the setting of Victoria Station the impacts of any proposals for tall buildings and Victoria Street and contribute to the 41.1 / Westminster has a diverse and historic will be considered. quality and character of the existing cluster. townscape that is already densely developed. Height is mainly concentrated in the Victoria and Any tall buildings in this area must not 41.4 / It is necessary to define what a tall building is Paddington Opportunity Areas, but this does not cause harm to the Outstanding Universal as their impact is greater than that of other large- come close to the height of some of the tall Value of the World Heritage Site and its scale buildings, and they therefore require a buildings in neighbouring boroughs. The historic setting or breach its protected silhouette specific policy approach. A tall building can be position was, and remains, that Westminster is not and must be sensitive to the other listed created by constructing a new building or generally suitable for tall buildings. However, we buildings, conservation areas and extending an existing building upwards. also recognise that in some locations – and when registered parks and gardens. well-designed – tall buildings can make a positive General principles The prevailing context height in Victoria contribution to our townscape and can help deliver is 6 residential storeys (20m) with a the growth and regeneration objectives of this 41.5 / The appropriate height of a building is varied context. Tall buildings in this area plan. We therefore set a positive strategy for influenced by many factors. In addition, the height of 2 to 3 times the context height may building height in the city. of a building is not the only aspect that determines be appropriate. the impact or suitability of a tall building. The 41.2 / Building densely does not always mean general principles that all tall building applications D. Proposals for tall buildings outside of the building high. There are many ways to deliver will need to comply with make sure they are of areas identified in clause C will not on our growth targets with high density exceptional design and make a positive generally be acceptable, and will need to developments without adding significant height. contribution to our townscape, including by being demonstrate how they (in addition to the Outside the areas identified as having potential of appropriate height. general principles under clause B): to accommodate tall buildings, proposals incorporating buildings significantly higher than 1. significantly strengthen the legibility of their surroundings are likely to be resisted and a town centre or mark the location of a should therefore provide evidence that other transport interchange or other location options have been explored to make efficient use of the site without adding significant additional height.

161 CONTENTS principles in this policy have been met in full. in met havebeen policy this in principles general the demonstrating by justified robustly be ranges height must identified from the deviation Any impacts. to scheme its is subject individual ofeach height appropriate The (2019). Study Height Building Westminster ofthe part as tested havebeen ranges height The height. were ofuniform greater scope for increased areas the heightif than is there areas, these in height in ofvariation alot is relevant in proposals building tall the there areas. As ofany consideration for the abaseline set policy the /The prevailing41.8 in context identified heights locations. in those for buildings tall principles also informed design the The study well connected. are and regeneration and to growth a contribution make could city, ofthe parts other than constraints fewer have they as buildings tall additional for capacity have may that five areas identifies (2019) Study 41.7 Height Building /The Westminster Locational principles impacts. toneed potential adverse their mitigate the with balanced be will buildings tall of benefits potential The townscape. the in out standing require for are any that buildings exceptionally tall, we which platforms accessible viewing publicly suchas also can provide public benefits, buildings of and enhance an character area. the Talllegibility improve location, important an mark can They 41.6 /Tall function. a clear should fulfil buildings CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY

outside of the areas identified in the policy. the in identified areas ofthe outside buildings for tall proposals any to asses criteria We additional set therefore clusters. building tall or buildings tall other of function the affect not does and townscape the in place ofthe role the strengthens it as appropriate be may city the in elsewhere scale ofalocal building atall where areas.these However, there may be instances are therefore of acceptable not outside generally areas five the tall andbuildings outside buildings for tall opportunities further did(2019) not identify Study Height Building /The Westminster 41.9 A. renewal areas housing the in height Building 42. scheme is able to viably deliver. to viably able is scheme the public benefits wider the against beappropriate balanced height must an considered is what 41 B, Policy in to height building general principles the adhere and anyparamount scheme must for remainsprinciples estates these design the housing While requirement. and a higher residents affordable existing developments, such as of decanting challenges are that different toprivate viability comesregeneration with largeDelivering public estate scale

B. 2. 1. and: character enhanced and astrong with a place of creation to the contribute they where for here buildings taller opportunities for identified renewalthere and are been have Area Renewal Housing Estate Bridge Ebury and Area Renewal Housing Road /Edgware Street Church The

as part of a comprehensive approach. ofacomprehensive part as scheme of regeneration the heart in the are delivered area; and for the focus route commercial and the east-west main the are at Area Renewal Housing Road /Edgware Street Church On location. this from down stepping heights building with line, railway ofthe crossing the and Bridge Ebury marking area ofthe end element towards northern tallest the the have areas; conservation adjacent the within terraces Victorian and Georgian surrounding the from views and setting the respect Estate Bridge Ebury On DESIGN

162

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

Figure 36: Victoria Opportunity Area, Ebury Bridge Figure 37: Paddington Opportunity Area, Marylebone flyover / Estate Housing Renewal Area Edgware Road junction, Church Street Housing Renewal Area

163 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

42.1 / We are ambitious in our plans to deliver more affordable housing in Westminster; a significant 43. Public realm consistency of materials and have an opportunity to contribute to this delivery is on existing appropriately engineered surface that A. Development will contribute to a well- estates designated for renewal. The housing renewal is fit for purpose; designed, clutter-free public realm with use programme offers opportunities to deliver new high of high quality and durable materials capable 5. creating clear sight lines, improve quality homes for our residents, with new green open of easy maintenance and cleaning, and the lighting and following the principles space and community facilities. Housing estate integration of high-quality soft landscaping of designing out crime; renewal is inherently complicated, particularly in as part of the streetscape design. terms of viability because of the responsibilities to 6. creating new quiet routes; decant and return existing residents and the 50% AN INCLUSIVE AND 7. resisting the creation of gated affordable housing targets on public land set by the ACCESSIBLE PUBLIC REALM communities which do not promote London Plan. The Westminster Building Height Study socially inclusive and cohesive (2019) identified scope for taller buildings on the B. The public realm will be safe, attractive and neighbourhoods or connectivity Church Street / Edgware Road Housing Renewal accessible to all. Development should between places. Area and Ebury Bridge Estate Housing Renewal Area, contribute to improving connectivity, legibility however this policy does not direct appropriate and permeability of the public realm and the COMMERCE IN THE PUBLIC REALM heights for the estates. Prescriptively indicating network of public spaces in the city through: appropriate heights here may preclude the design C. Additional kiosks or other structures for 1. helping to provide a network of solutions necessary to facilitate the comprehensive the display and sale of goods outside of connected and defined frontages public benefits that large estate-wide development a market will be resisted. The replacement and spaces such as pocket parks; can deliver, including the significant contribution to and relocation of existing structures will the strategic priority for more affordable housing in 2. optimising active frontages towards public be designed and sited to: Westminster. This does not, however, mean that the streets and spaces particularly in areas 1. respect local context and not detract heights for housing renewal areas are limitless – we identified as appropriate for tall buildings; from any heritage asset; will expect new buildings to be of an appropriate 3. ensuring that soft landscaping is scale for their local context and applicants will 2. minimise obstruction to pedestrian maximised to soften the streetscape demonstrate how the proposal adheres to clauses movement and street cleansing and provide visual and environmental A and B of Policy 41. arrangements; relief from hard landscaping, buildings and traffic; 3. minimise energy consumption; 42.2 / At present only Church Street/Edgware Road Housing Renewal Area and Ebury Bridge Estate 4. using high quality new, or reinstated 4. ensure they are capable of Housing Renewal Area have been identified for paving materials whose colour and quick removal. housing renewal, however, other housing estates may texture underline a sense of place and be identified as suitable for renewal in future.

164 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

43.3 / The public realm should be distinctive and D. Proposals for trading from premises extending H. Pedestrian signage will be consistent with attractive and positively contribute to the City Plan into the street (including provision of tables Legible London or any subsequent objective of creating and enhancing successful and chairs on the highway) will be supported successor standards. places. It should offer opportunities to meet, where they would not: congregate and socialise, as well as provide opportunity for quiet enjoyment. Wherever 1. harm local amenity; 43.1 / The public realm refers to all the physically possible, development should make the most of and visually public, accessible space which form opportunities to green the urban realm through 2. compromise pedestrian movement the setting for human interaction, such as streets, new planting and vegetation in order to soften the or traffic conditions; pavements, forecourts, squares, parks, open townscape. Ongoing maintenance of the public 3. impede refuse storage and street spaces and building façades. The cross-cutting realm is a key consideration and will be secured cleansing arrangements. impacts of public realm on strategic permeability, through planning conditions and/or legal legibility and connectivity of the city’s public realm agreements where appropriate. PUBLIC ART, STATUES AND MONUMENTS means that it is intrinsically linked to the City Plan’s 10 objectives and contributes to the delivery of An inclusive and accessible public realm E. Applicants will be encouraged to provide other core policy strands such as sustainable high quality public art as an integral part 43.4 / Given the pressures on space in travel, design, green infrastructure and town of the design of new major developments, Westminster, in order to ensure an inclusive public centres. Addressing improvements to the public particularly around gateway locations and realm a particular priority must be given to the realm from a strategic viewpoint is essential, where they benefit legibility. needs of pedestrians, with a special focus on while placing public realm considerations at the disabled people, those with dementia, children heart of individual development schemes and F. New statues, monuments or memorials and others with particular mobility requirements. establishing the critical measures an applicant in the public realm will be directed outside needs to consider when going through the of the Monument Saturation Zone. 43.5 / To facilitate this objective whilst recognising planning process. that pedestrian movement will increase through SIGNS AND ADVERTISEMENTS new infrastructure projects, such as Crossrail, 43.2 / All such spaces must be carefully designed, pavement widening will be promoted. This G. Signs and advertisements will make a using high quality materials and detailing which approach and the need to connect with planned positive contribution to amenity or public respect and enhance the existing character of public realm and transport enhancement projects safety by being sensitively designed in areas within the city. The public realm will be may require the loss of some ground floor space terms of their size, location and degree carefully managed and maintained, with the within a development site’s red line boundary in of illumination, their impact on the building principle of decluttering advocated whilst order to make a scheme acceptable. on which they are displayed, local context, discouraging graffiti and deterring anti-social street-scene and wider townscape. behaviour and crime to ensure the amenity, well-being and health of residents and visitors.

165 CONTENTS those in alternative locations to the existing), they to existing), the locations in alternative those replacement are facilities (including proposed Where avoided. be will for dismantling) need the (i.e. cannot be removed that kiosks those without 43.10 /Therefore, in semi-permanent a net growth impacts. andadverse benefits nature be carefully managed to must balance its ofthis activity commercial movement, pedestrian safe to prioritise need the and kerb space, city’s intense the pressures /Given on much43.9 of the collection. refuse and cleansing street as such functions management residential amenity, and compromise city on nearby areas, result impacts in adverse of historic character the undermine congestion, traffic cause movement, hinder pedestrian However,economic development. also can it support and life ofcity vibrancy and diversity the to add can realm public the in /Commerce 43.8 realm public the in Commerce in public spaces gather. where people environment particularly built the to soften attempt an in are promoted ofWestminster parts green to help which treatments Boundary of ownership. aidingdelineation street scenewhilst and defined cohesive to create amore order in space public and private between to distinguish important is 43.7 /It realm. public ofthe enjoyment peaceful to the encouraged where appropriate and where adds it be will ofseating installation /The 43.6 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY trading hours, so as not to impede refuse storage storage refuse to impede not as so hours, trading of outside off-street furniture street temporary store be required will they toschemes are supported, Where residential of occupiers floors. upper todevelopment disturbance also can cause such with associated 43.13 noise /The users. highways other and of pedestrians to need the balanced movement facilitate against carefully to be needs However, this interaction. for social aspace as realm public ofthe utilisation such use of space outdoor also can enhance the offer. well-managed, Where to their by adding such businesses as caféssustain and restaurants help can seating, outdoor through including onto trading 43.12 street, the /Extending realm. public the in events for special works other or cleansing, street works, highways to facilitate necessary be may structures removal Quick of several separate functions. to house used be can it where preferable be may such as and stalls, ofsmaller clusters than impacts negative haveless could structure located and designed well asingle, that considered is 43.11 /It pavement. the onto spreading stock avoid to designed being includes This cleaning. street for and any arrangements buildings, and between movement an through area pedestrian impede should not Theirlocation goals. efficiency energy wider and setting proposed to their contribution makes apositive that amanner in constructed bybeing designed andshould deliver net benefits

public art is under-represented. public art encouraged in areas other of Westminster, where are strongly monuments and However, statues new areas central are most and the already saturated. past, the in as scale same the on Westminster in monuments and statues new to accommodate to continue possible not is It Parks. Royal the in and on centred area small relatively – of a Westminster and governmental heart royal the in are situated 47%, memorials, ofall half Almost right. own their in ofart works are major and day oftheir artists leading were bythe these of Many memorials. and statues 300 than of more heritage 43.15 has an outstanding /Westminster realm. public ofthe enjoyment to adds which public environment, stimulating avisually and ofplace asense to creating contributes It projects. development new in pride of affirmation a public and places public quality to high applicants and byus commitment a shared demonstrates 43.14 /Public art monuments and statues art, Public planning document. supplementary ofa form the in forthcoming be will issues these management of guidance effective on the Further to and chairs tables be monitored and re-assessed. ofthe impact the to allow order in period temporary for be granted only Permission generally a will and secure management arrangements. suitable of hours use,number of and chairs, tables to also planning alongside be powers used the limit will powers management City cleaning. street and

DESIGN 166

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

Figure 38: Monument saturation zones

167 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

Signs and advertisements 43.17 / Legible London provides a pedestrian 44.1 / Westminster attracts millions of visitors as an signage system that has been installed at more international tourist destination, the centre for the 43.16 / Signs and advertisements are common than 1,700 locations across the capital (450 UK government and the location for many other features in many parts of Westminster, in particular in within Westminster) to aid effective wayfinding. institutions, businesses as well as educational, the more commercial areas of the West End. Although The uniform nature of these signs is critical to medical and cultural venues. For these reasons it has they play a role in providing information, control of their successful interpretation (particularly places and uses that are terrorist targets – as shown signs and advertisements is important as they can across borough boundaries), and as such all by recent attacks. It is a priority to ensure and have significant impacts on the quality and future pedestrian signs should be consistent maintain a safe and secure environment for people appearance of the street scene and upon the building in design and quality. visiting, residing and working in Westminster. on which they are displayed. They may also affect amenity and public safety, including highway safety, 44.2 / Building and public realm schemes will and can damage the appearance of the streetscape be assessed as part of the planning application and the architectural integrity of our built 44. Security measures process to ensure their resilience against environment. On the other hand, properly planned, in the public realm emergencies including terrorism and related hazards. executed and managed, advertising can enhance A. Development will provide an integrated This assessment will be based on advice from the peoples’ experience of the public realm. We will work approach to the security of the site relevant authorities, in particular the Metropolitan with the industry to find ways of ensuring the most is including buildings and any associated Police. Applicants for major development should made of the positive aspects. Careful consideration public or private spaces. undertake a Security Considerations Assessment will be given to the size, location, materials, details, process. This will ensure that potential security- and method of illumination of proposed signs and B. Development and or public realm related vulnerabilities have been identified, assessed advertisements together with the impact they will improvement proposals will be required to and, where necessary, addressed in a manner that is have on the architectural features of the building incorporate appropriate counter terrorism appropriate and proportionate. Where there is a upon which they are fixed. It is recognised that measures advised by the Metropolitan clear threat from terrorism and to ensure security and commercial advertising on shrouds and hoardings Police and / or the council. Where counter-terrorism measures can be incorporated into along with high level and temporary advertisements appropriate, the retrofitting of existing higher risk developments and public spaces, may cause substantial injury to visual amenity and buildings and spaces may be required. applicants are encouraged to contact the can have a particularly detrimental effect on Metropolitan Police’s Designing Out Crime Officers surrounding townscape. C. All security measures will be designed who will make contact with Counter Terrorism and implemented to take account of the Security Advisors for further advice. Architects and functionality of the area and the needs of engineers are also encouraged to seek advice from its users, and will be sensitively designed the Metropolitan Police’s Counter Terrorism Security to respect the surrounding context and Advisors on appropriate counter-terrorism measures public realm. that can be incorporated in high risk developments and public spaces.

168 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

44.3 / Developments that achieve Secured by Design accreditation will help to make Westminster safe and 45. Basement developments of the garden land – on small sites sustainable, a place where people want to visit and where the garden is 8m or less at its A. Basement developments should: stay. Therefore, as a minimum the basic principles of longest point, basements may extend Secured By Design, including counter-terrorism, up to 4m from the original building in 1. incorporate measures recommended should be incorporated into new developments to that direction; in the structural statement or flood risk minimise potential physical risks, deter terrorism, assessment to safeguard structural 2. leave a margin of undeveloped garden detect terrorist activity and help mitigate its effects. stability, and address surface water land proportionate to the scale of the Incorporating security features can be costly if it is and sewerage flooding; development and the size of the garden thought about too late and have to be retrofitted into around the entire site boundary; schemes. They should therefore be considered at the 2. be designed and constructed to outset of the design process. minimise the impact at construction 3. not comprise more than one storey and occupation stages on the beneath the lowest original floor level 44.4 / Security measures and surveillance surrounding area; – exceptions may be made on large equipment must, wherever possible, be sensitively sites with high levels of accessibility 3. protect heritage assets, and in the designed and positioned to avoid detrimental for construction; case of listed buildings, not unbalance visual effects, as Westminster’s historic the building’s original hierarchy of 4. provide a minimum of one metre townscapes are sensitive to visual intrusion. spaces where this contributes to its of soil depth (plus minimum 200mm Measures should provide effective protection and significance; and drainage layer) and adequate overall embrace good design. soil volume above the top cover of 4. conserve the character and appearance the basement; and 44.5 / In light of a significant vulnerability to of the existing building, garden setting terrorism, we will use planning conditions where and the surrounding area, ensuring 5. not encroach more than 1.8m under any appropriate and request legal agreements to lightwells, plant, vents, skylights and part of the adjacent highway and retain ensure design and other measures required under means of escape are sensitively a minimum vertical depth below the this policy are incorporated and maintained, designed and discreetly located. footway or carriageway of 900mm including effective management of access to both between the highway surface and private space and spaces that are accessible to EXTENT AND DEPTH OF BASEMENTS vault structure. the public. Legal agreements may make provision B. Basement developments will be supported for long-term management and maintenance of where they: security measures at the expense of the applicant. 1. do not extend beneath more than 50%

169 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

45.1 / Basement extensions have become 45.3 / Given their nature, basements can be 45.5 / Westminster’s heritage may be sensitive an increasingly common form of development vulnerable to flooding from a number of sources to the impact of basement development. Listed in Westminster in recent years. Although often including the overflowing of drains and nearby buildings and archaeology can be especially hidden from public view, basement excavation watercourses, groundwater flooding and surface vulnerable to damage when excavation takes place. can have significant impacts on the amenity of water flooding. A site-specific Flood Risk The internal hierarchy of buildings could also be neighbouring occupiers and may affect ground Assessment (FRA) and a structural statement unbalanced by basement developments, negatively conditions, biodiversity, heritage assets, local will be required for basement developments impacting on the architectural and historic interest character and garden settings. This policy located in flood zone 2 or 3, or surface water flood and significance of historic buildings. seeks to make sure that basement developments risk hotspots. Flood risk considerations are also are appropriately designed and applies to addressed in the structural methodology 45.6 / When poorly designed, basements can new basements as well as extensions to statement required for all basement negatively affect the character and appearance existing basements. developments. Measures to be incorporated of buildings and the wider townscape. Private include Sustainable Drainage Systems (SuDS) gardens also make a significant contribution to Basement development principles and positive pumped devices or equivalent to Westminster’s character as an important part of address sewerage flooding, and other measures our green infrastructure network. A satisfactory 45.2 / Excavation in a dense urban environment recommended in the FRA. landscaping scheme should be provided that is more complex than many standard residential incorporates soft landscaping, planting and extensions and has the potential to damage 45.4 / The construction works associated permeable surfacing as appropriate. existing and neighbouring structures and with basement excavation can often have a infrastructure, and irreversibly alter ground serious impact on the quality of life of neighbours Extent and depth of basements conditions. Basement developments should and cause disruption. Applicants for basement therefore safeguard the structural stability of the 45.7 / Limiting the extent and depth of development must therefore demonstrate that existing building, nearby buildings and other basement development can help reduce both reasonable consideration has been given to infrastructure including highway and railway lines/ the risks associated with basement development potential impacts of construction in line with tunnels. Applications for basement development and mitigate negative environmental and our adopted Code of Construction Practice. should be accompanied by a structural amenity impacts. A signed pro forma Appendix A of the Code of methodology statement and appropriate self- Construction Practice should be submitted as certification from a suitably qualified engineer 45.8 / Standards for extent of the garden (site area part of basement development applications. to demonstrate the impacts of the proposed excluding the footprint of the original building) are Applicants for basement excavation works are development have been understood. intended to strike a balance between allowing strongly encouraged to consult with neighbouring development, while ensuring a substantial area occupiers prior to submitting an application. remains undeveloped (without any impermeable Evidence of engagement with neighbouring surfacing installed) to ensure adequate drainage occupiers, including a schedule and timetable and preserve the garden setting. of works may be requested as supporting information with planning applications.

170 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

45.9 / The most appropriate form of basement development will be no more than one storey (approximately 2.7m floor to ceiling height) below the lowest part of the original floor level. In some cases, an exception could be made for large sites when they are able to accommodate plant and machinery and include appropriate access (e.g. rear or side access) to enable construction without an adverse impact on neighbouring uses or occupiers. The definition of large sites will depend on individual circumstances.

45.10 / Sufficient soil depth will be required to support sustainable planting. In some circumstances a soil depth of up to 1.5m (plus drainage layer) may be required to support tree growth. Applicants should provide detail of soil profile and composition.

45.11 / Work to basement vaults can restrict the space available for services in the highway and may make it difficult to access cables, pipes, sewers, etc. for maintenance and to provide essential items of street furniture. In order to ensure that services and essential street furniture can be provided, adequate space must be available between the highway and any excavation proposed under the highway. Applications adjacent to or affecting the Transport for London Road Network (TLRN) or public transport infrastructure should seek advice from Transport for London.

171 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING CONTENTS CONTENTS

IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING

The City Plan, the London Plan and any made neighbourhood plans make up Westminster’s Development Plan. It is also supported by a suite of national planning policies and other local planning documents – illustrated by this diagram.

NPPF and National Statement of Community Authority Guidance Involvement Monitoring Report

City Plan 2019-2040 Policies Map

CIL Charging Schedule Westminster’s Development Plan Other council strategies

Forthcoming Site Allocations Development Plan Document

London Plan Neighbourhood Plans

Infrastructure Supplementary Delivery Plan Planning Documents

Figure 39: Westminster’s Development Plan

172 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING CONTENTS

Supplementary Planning Documents Neighbourhood planning Implementation We will prepare additional information including Neighbourhood plans are written by the local Westminster’s Development Plan policies and technical notes and Supplementary Planning community - they are an important tool that gives national planning policies will be implemented Documents (SPDs) to explain more detail on how Westminster’s communities statutory powers to through Westminster’s Development Management to implement the City Plan policies effectively, shape how their local area develops. process. Legal agreements including Section 106, support the efficient use of land and the delivery Community Infrastructure Levy (CIL), Carbon and of the right kind of growth in the city. These will Neighbourhood plans must have regard to Air Quality Offset funds will also be used to help be published on our website and provide more national policies and guidance and be in general deliver the City Plan. We will allocate council detailed guidance that should be taken into conformity with the strategic policies in this resources (including capital funding) and use funding account when designing developments and City Plan to ensure they directly contribute to from other sources e.g. Greater London Authority, determining planning applications. the delivery of the City Plan objectives. Appendix Department for Environment Food and Rural Affairs 2 sets out a schedule of which policies in this plan and lottery grants to implement the City Plan. We will The SPDs will cover the follow topic areas, are strategic to help guide neighbourhood forums only use compulsory purchase powers where it is among others: in developing their plans. Neighbourhood plan demonstrated that there is a compelling case that it policies and spatial designations can differ from will enable the acquisition of land to help deliver our – Planning Obligations and Affordable Housing the non-strategic policies, but they need to be in planning and regeneration objectives. – Heritage general conformity with strategic City Plan policies. General conformity is judged on the – Design and Public Realm neighbourhood plan as a whole, so absolute – North Bank conformity on every detail of strategic policy is not required. – Environment – Local Enforcement Westminster City Council offers bespoke guidance and support for the delivery of – West End. neighbourhood plans across the city - our website includes helpful guidance, information on data sources and contact details.1

1 westminster.gov.uk/neighbourhood-planning

173 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING CONTENTS CONTENTS

Viability 1. the sites are in the vicinity of each other; Transition of existing mixed-use credits Applicants should factor in the costs of delivering the 2. there is no net loss of floorspace which is Mixed use residential credits registered under the City Plan objectives when considering potential protected by other policies in the Plan across 2016 City Plan policy S1 may continue to be used development proposals or site purchases. Where the sites taken as a whole; to offset the affordable housing requirements of proposals meet the policies in this plan, it will be Policy 9 in the Central Activities Zone where the 3. the uses are appropriate within each area; assumed that they are viable.2 It is up to the applicant floorspace registered is affordable housing. to demonstrate whether particular circumstances 4. any residential accommodation is of a higher justify the need for a viability assessment at quality than could have been achieved without All conditions agreed at the time of registration of application stage. Such circumstances could include: the land use swap. the original credit regarding their drawdown will still apply, as will anything previously agreed in a – where further information on infrastructure The applications for all sites must be submitted at Section 106 legal agreement relating to the credit. or site costs is required; the same time and must be accompanied by a full schedule of the existing and proposed floorspace – where the type of development proposed is Early delivery of off-site affordable housing including the following: significantly different from standard models As set out in paragraph 9.13, the early delivery of of development e.g. build to rent; and a. the floorspace of each use (Gross Internal Area) affordable housing floorspace may in some – where economic circumstances have significantly proposed for each site, and for all of the sites circumstances count towards future requirements changed since the Plan was adopted. taken as a whole; for affordable housing triggered by Policy 9. This mechanism may only be used as part of wider b. in the case of residential floorspace, the Land use swaps estate regeneration proposals and any affordable breakdown of floorspace provided in housing delivered must be used in full for the The City Plan protects almost every land use in accordance with (a) by the tenure, unit estate on which it is delivered i.e. the affordable one way or another throughout the city. Floorspace floorspace, and the number of bedrooms of housing cannot be ‘banked’ or traded to offset can be better protected when it can be transferred each unit, and the total floorspace for all of the affordable housing requirements on other sites. to another site as part of estate management or sites taken as a whole; and dual site developments. This approach can avoid c. calculations of any floorspace shortfalls being Legal agreements will be used to: lengthy marketing exercises leaving floorspace met by a payment in lieu. vacant where it can accommodate a different use if – ensure that the intention to use the affordable the original land use is satisfactorily re-provided If agreed, the sites subject to the land use swap will housing as a contribution to another named site elsewhere. Therefore, a system of land use swaps be treated as though the development is on a single is agreed by the council at application stage for may be appropriate in the following circumstances site, including for consideration of viability (the sites the affordable housing; to enable better development outcomes: should be within sufficient proximity to one another that there is no significant differential in site value) and – ensure the market housing cannot be 2 The policies in this plan have been independently all elements of the scheme are to be completed occupied until the affordable housing is viability tested within a time frame agreed by the council. complete and transferred to a Registered Provider, where applicable.

174 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING CONTENTS

Enforcement Working with partners and stakeholders Review Planning enforcement is part of the end to end We will work with neighbouring authorities, agencies As required by national policy the City Plan will be process of development, from policy to the granting and partner organisations including the GLA and subject to a full review to ascertain if amendments of permission through to monitoring and achieving community groups to deliver a range of services and are required five years after adoption and every compliance with the development which our realise the benefits of an integrated approach to five years thereafter. policies seek to achieve. We will investigate all development and to ensure the realisation of shared reported breaches of planning control in a objectives. We will continue to utilise our Open The findings of the AMR will inform the review and transparent and proportionate manner and will Forum network to liaise with resident groups and the if the majority of policies are deemed to be pursue enforcement action where it is considered designated neighbourhood forums on planning performing well it may be the case that no action is expedient to do so. In determining whether it is issues, where appropriate. required. However, if key policy objectives are relevant to pursue enforcement action regard will failing e.g. housing delivery is lower than the be given to national, regional and local policy and Monitoring annual target or air quality objectives are not to any other material considerations. When pursuing achieved this may indicate amendments to policy We will monitor the implementation of City Plan enforcement action we give priority to prevention are required. policies to ensure that the objectives and targets and harm to residential amenity; the effective within the Plan (as well as the programme for functioning of lawful business premises; preventing infrastructure set out in the IDP) are met. Through the loss of permanent residential accommodation the Integrated Impact Assessment (IIA), the annual and other priority uses; and the preservation or Authority Monitoring Report (AMR) and enhancement of our heritage assets and any harm Westminster’s Monitoring Framework we will keep to visual amenity. All breaches of planning control economic, social and environmental trends and will be considered on their individual merits. We will risks under review. prosecute offenders under the relevant legislation where it is considered expedient and in the public The table overleaf sets out Westminster’s key interest to do so. monitoring indicators which will be used to monitor success towards meeting the objectives in this Infrastructure delivery plan. If the trigger points are reached this does The Infrastructure Delivery Plan (IDP) sets out the not necessarily mean the policy is failing. All key key locations, sites and infrastructure, which are Performance Indicators will be reviewed annually essential for the successful implementation through the Authority Monitoring Report (AMR) of the City Plan’s strategic policies. It also details to ascertain trends in how the policies are the timescales for delivery and funding operating and if the Plan and spatial objectives mechanisms. The Infrastructure Delivery are being achieved. Statement (IDS) will monitor delivery of the IDP and will be updated regularly.

175 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING CONTENTS CONTENTS

Monitoring Framework

Key Performance Indicators City Plan objectives Data source Trigger for review / review mechanism

1 Delivery of new homes (floorspace, units 1, 9 Westminster Delivery is 10% below target by size, type and tenure) against target of City Council for three consecutive years 985 new homes per year and 20,685 homes overall up to 2040 Review the SHMA for delivery of all accommodation types within five years

2 Delivery of affordable homes (floorspace, 1, 9 Westminster Total number of new affordable homes units and location of delivery) against target City Council does not meet target after three years of at least 35% of all new homes delivered

3 Delivery of homes through the Affordable 1, 9 Westminster Housing Fund (floorspace and units) City Council

4 Number of family sized homes delivered 1 Westminster Less than 25% across the city City Council

5 Net change in Class E floorspace across 2, 3, 9 Westminster CAZ, Opportunity Areas, and town centre City Council hierarchy

6 Delivery of C1 Hotel floorspace 2, 3, 9 Westminster Net reduction in floor space City Council

7 Loss of public houses 3, 4 Westminster 15% loss of current number over 5 years City Council

8 Hot food takeaways permitted within 200m 9 Westminster Any permissions granted of a school City Council

176 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING CONTENTS

Key Performance Indicators City Plan objectives Data source Trigger for review / review mechanism

9 Change in land uses in the Special Policy 3, 4, 6, 9 Westminster Areas (SPAs) City Council

10 Delivery of social and community 4, 6, 9 Westminster Review against IDP floorspace City Council

11 Change in number of jobs by sectors and 2, 3, 4 Westminster Net loss in total jobs and or increase in levels of worklessness City Council levels of worklessness

12 Employment, skills and training opportunities 2, 3, 4 Westminster Regular review with Westminster City secured through Section 106 contributions City Council Council employment service

13 Delivery of walking and cycling 5, 9 Westminster Review against IDP infrastructure schemes City Council

14 Installation of electric vehicle charging 5, 9 Westminster Review against IDP points by type City Council

15 Number of applications approved for 5, 9 Westminster residential development without on- or City Council off-site car parking in an area of existing high parking stress

16 Delivery of cycle parking spaces 5 Westminster City Council

17 Number of developments of thresholds set 6, 7, 8 Westminster out in policy achieving BREEAM excellent (or City Council equivalent) Standard

18 Noise complaints received 7, 8 Westminster City Council

177 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING CONTENTS CONTENTS

Key Performance Indicators City Plan objectives Data source Trigger for review / review mechanism

19 Applications that include renewable 7, 8 Westminster technologies City Council

20 Applications granted planning permission 7, 8 Environment No more than 1% of applications permitted against Environment Agency advice on Agency flood risk

21 Reduction of NOx and particulate matter 7 DEFRA (PM2.5 and PM10) concentration against national and regional Air Quality targets

22 Reduction of carbon dioxide emissions (total 3 Westminster Strategic net reduction end user and per capita) by local authority City Council area, as reported by Department of Business Environment and Industrial Strategy (BEIS)

23 Net change in Sites of Importance for 8 Westminster City Deterioration in quality or net loss Nature Conservation (SINCs) and Council & GLA designated open space

24 Delivery of play space in areas of play 6, 8, 9 Westminster space deficiency City Counci

25 Improvements to parks, play areas and 6, 8, 9 Westminster Review against IDP other open spaces City Counci

26 Number of open spaces awarded the 8 Green Flag Awards Green Flag Award Website

27 Applications incorporating living 8, 9 Westminster walls and roofs City Counci

178 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING CONTENTS

Key Performance Indicators City Plan objectives Data source Trigger for review / review mechanism

28 Capacity of new waste and 7, 8 Westminster recycling facilities City Council

29 Amount, type and destination of waste 6, 7, 9 Waste Data An increase in waste exports by the exported from Westminster interrogator. In line following amounts will trigger engagement with tables in with recipient waste planning authority: Appendix F of the Waste Data Study – 5,000 tpa non-hazardous waste (2020) and (LACW and C&I) thresholds agreed – 10,000 tpa inert waste (CD&E) by the London Waste Planning – 100 tpa hazardous waste Forum

30 Delivery of public realm schemes 5, 8, 9 Westminster Review against IDP City Council

31 Number of designated heritage assets 10 Westminster No loss completely demolished/lost City Council &

32 Number of planning applications approved 10 Westminster Database of applications impacting on the and refused with a Heritage Impact City Council World Heritage Site Assessment for development impacting on the Outstanding Universal Value of the World Heritage Site or its setting

33 Number of applications called in by the 10 Westminster Applications called in Secretary of State in relation to any City Council development that may have an impact on the Outstanding Universal Value of the World Heritage Site or its setting

179 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY 36 35 34 Key Indicators Performance and development improvements infrastructure Utility mechanism review regular with document’ Plan as ‘living of updated Management production through Site Heritage the World for policy Effective agreed solution with or register the from removed and risk at assets ofheritage Number

8, 9 8, 10 10 Plan objectives City City Council City Westminster Committee World Heritage EnglandHistoric Data source

Review against IDP against Review Committee Heritage World ofthe requirements reporting annual the from Site Heritage World ofthe removal and mechanism review regular with document’ ‘living as of updated Plan Management Production risk at as identified areas on registerbuildings and no conservation oflisted number oftotal 1% than Less Trigger mechanism /review for review IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING

180

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

APPENDICES Appendix 1: Westminster’s Housing Trajectory The following table sets out Westminster’s housing supply for years 2020-35. grouped by area. Individual developable sites will be assigned capacities Deliverable sites are named where over 50 net new homes will be provided. through the forthcoming Site Allocations DPD. Developable sites and locations for growth in years 6-10 and 11-15 are

Area Type Delivery Net housing Units Phase

Paddington Opportunity Deliverable 1-5 108 Area Includes development of the following site:

– North Wharf Road

Developable 6-10 501

11-15 400

Victoria Opportunity Area Deliverable 1-5 385 Includes development of the following sites:

– New – Stockley House

Developable 6-10 75

11-15 330

181 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

Area Type Delivery Net housing Units Phase

Tottenham Court Road Deliverable 1-5 87 Opportunity Area Includes development of the following site:

– Tottenham Court Road Elizabeth Line Station (Oxford Street/ Street)

North West Economic Deliverable 1-5 429 Development Area Includes development of the following sites:

– Warwick Community Hall, Harrow Road – Westmead, Tavistock Road – Jubilee Sports Centre, Caird Street

Developable 6-10 176

11-15 341

182 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

Area Type Delivery Net housing Units Phase

Church Street / Edgware Deliverable 1-5 1,216 Road Housing Renewal Area Includes development of the following sites:

– 283-329 Edgware Road (West End Gate) – Paddington Green – Capland Street, Bedlow Close and Luton Street – Parsons House – Lisson Arches

Developable 6-10 775

11-15 735

Ebury Bridge Estate Housing Deliverable 1-5 96 Renewal Area Developable 6-10 326

11-15

183 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

Area Type Delivery Net housing Units Phase

North Westminster Deliverable 1-5 1,089 Includes development of the following sites:

– St John’s Wood Road/ Lodge Road – Centre, Queensway – Dora House, St John’s Wood Road – St John’s Wood Barracks, Ordnance Hill – Bayswater Road/ Queensway/ Consort House/ Fosbury Mews – / Edgware Road/ Bryanston Street – Tollgate Gardens Estate

Developable 6-10 216

11-15 280

Central Westminster Deliverable 1-5 765 Includes development of the following sites:

– Park Crescent/ Portland Place – 22 Hanover Square – Aybrook Street Car Park – 87-89 Cleveland Street

Developable 6-10 29

11-15 70

184 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

Area Type Delivery Net housing Units Phase

South Westminster Deliverable 1-5 1,531 Includes development of the following sites:

– Old War Office, Whitehall – Ergon House, Horseferry Road and 9 Millbank – Millbank Complex – First House, Long Acre – Palace Street/ Buckingham Gate – Arundel Great Court, Street – Castle Lane/ Palace Street – Chelsea Barracks

Developable 6-10 388

11-15 420

Windfalls N/A 6-10 2,500

N/A 11-15 2,500

TOTAL DELIVERABLE HOUSING SUPPLY (2020-25) 1-5 5,706

TOTAL DEVELOPABLE HOUSING SUPPLY (2025-35) 6-10 4,986

11-15 5,076

TOTAL HOUSING SUPPLY (2020-2035) 1-15 15,768

185 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

Appendix 2: Schedule of strategic policies

Schedule of Strategic Policies The policies within the City Plan are made up of both strategic and non-strategic elements. Strategic policies are those policies which address the strategic priorities of the area and any relevant cross-boundary issues, whereas non-strategic policies deal more with more localised issues. Where neighbourhood plans are being prepared, neighbourhood forums should ensure policies within them are in general conformity with these strategic policies.

This table sets out which policies in the City Plan are considered strategic and non-strategic based on national guidance and will guide groups in the development of their neighbourhood plans.

Policy Number Policy clause

1 Westminster’s Spatial Strategy Whole policy – strategic

2 WERLSPA Whole policy – strategic

3 Paddington OA Whole policy – strategic

4 Victoria OA Whole policy – strategic

5 NWEDA Whole policy – strategic

6 Church Street / Edgware Road and Ebury Bridge Estate Housing Whole policy – strategic Renewal Areas

7 Managing development for Westminster’s people Whole policy – strategic

8 Housing delivery Whole policy – strategic

9 Affordable housing Whole policy – strategic

186 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

Policy Number Policy clause

10 Housing for specific groups Whole policy – strategic

11 Innovative housing Whole policy – non-strategic

12 Housing quality A, C – strategic B, D, E – non-strategic

13 Supporting economic growth A, B, D, E – strategic C – non-strategic

14 Town centres, high streets and the CAZ A, B, C, D, G, H, J – strategic E, F, I – non-strategic

15 Visitor economy Whole policy – strategic

16 Food, drink and entertainment Whole policy – strategic

17 Community Infrastructure & facilities Whole policy – strategic

18 Education & Skills A, B, D – strategic C – non-strategic

19 Digital infrastructure and information and communications technology A, B – strategic C, D – non-strategic

20 Soho Special Policy Area Whole policy – strategic

21 Mayfair & St James’s Special Policy Area Whole policy – strategic

22 Harley Street Special Policy Area Whole policy – strategic

187 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

Policy Number Policy clause

23 Savile Row Special Policy Area Whole policy – strategic

24 Sustainable Transport Whole policy – strategic

25 Walking and Cycling Whole policy – strategic

26 Public Transport and infrastructure Whole policy – strategic

27 Parking Whole policy – strategic

28 Highway access and management Whole policy – strategic

29 Freight and servicing Whole policy – strategic

30 Technological innovation in transport Whole policy – strategic

31 Waterways and waterbodies A,B,C,D – strategic E, F, G –non strategic

32 Air quality Whole policy – strategic

33 Local environmental impacts Whole policy – strategic

34 Green infrastructure Whole policy – strategic

35 Flood risk Whole policy – strategic

36 Energy Whole policy – strategic

37 Waste management Whole policy – strategic

188 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

Policy Number Policy clause

38 Design principles Whole policy – strategic

39 Westminster’s heritage A - Q – strategic R – non-strategic

40 Townscape & architecture Whole policy – strategic

41 Building height Whole policy – strategic

42 Building height in the housing renewal areas Whole policy – strategic

43 Public realm Whole policy – strategic

44 Security measures in the public realm Whole policy – strategic

45 Basement development A – strategic B – non-strategic

189 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

Appendix 3: Schedule of superseded policies

Table 1: Westminster City Plan (2016)

City Plan Strategic Policies (November 2016) Superseded by policy

S1 Mixed Use in The Central Activities Zone Deleted

Policy 21 Mayfair and St James SPA

S2 Special Policy Areas Policy 22 Harley St SPA

Policy 23 Savile Row SPA

CM2.1 Harley Street Special Policy Area Policy 22 Harley St SPA

CM2.2 Portland Place Special Policy Area Deleted

CM2.3 Savile Row Special Policy Area Policy 23 Savile Row SPA

CM2.4 St. James’s Special Policy Area Policy 21 Mayfair and St James SPA

CM2.5 Mayfair Special Policy Area Policy 21 Mayfair and St James SPA

S3 Paddington Opportunity Area Policy 3 Spatial Development Priorities: Paddington Opportunity Area

Policy 41 Building Height

S4 Victoria Opportunity Area Policy 4 Spatial Development Priorities: Victoria Opportunity Area

Policy 41 Building Height

190 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

City Plan Strategic Policies (November 2016) Superseded by policy

S5 Tottenham Court Road Opportunity Area Policy 2 Spatial Development Priorities: West End Retail and Leisure Special Policy Area and Tottenham Court Road Opportunity Area

S6 Core Central Activities Zone Deleted N.b. designation removed

S7 West End Special Retail Policy Area Policy 2 Spatial Development Priorities: West End Retail and Leisure Special Policy Area and Tottenham Court Road Opportunity Area

S8 Marylebone And Fitzrovia Policy 14 Town centres, high streets and the CAZ

Policy 16 Food, drink and entertainment

S9 Knightsbridge Policy 15 Visitor economy

S10 Pimlico Policy 14 Town centres, high streets and the CAZ

S11 Royal Parks Policy 34 Green infrastructure

Policy 40 Townscape and architecture

S12 North Westminster Economic Development Area Policy 5 Spatial Development Priorities: North West Economic Development Area

S13 Outside the CAZ And NWEDA Policy 14 Town centres, high streets and the CAZ

Policy 16 Food, drink and entertainment

S14 Optimising Housing Delivery Policy 8 Housing delivery

S15 Meeting Housing Needs Policy 10 Housing for specific groups

S16 Affordable Housing Policy 9 Affordable housing

191 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

City Plan Strategic Policies (November 2016) Superseded by policy

S17 Gypsies and Travellers Policy 10 Housing for specific groups

S18 Commercial Development Policy 13 Supporting economic growth

S19 Inclusive Local Economy and Employment Policy 18 Education and skills

S20 Offices and Other B1 Floorspace Policy 13 Supporting economic growth

S21 Retail Policy 14 Town centres, high streets and the CAZ

S22 Tourism, Arts and Culture Policy 15 Visitor economy

S23 Hotels and Conference Facilities Policy 15 Visitor economy

S24 Entertainment Uses Policy 16 Food, drink and entertainment

S25 Heritage Policy 39 Heritage

S26 Views Policy 40 Townscape and architecture

Policy 41 Building height

Policy 42 Building height in the housing renewal areas

S27 Buildings and Uses of International and National Importance Policy 1 Westminster's spatial strategy

S28 Design Policy 38 Design principles

CM28.1 Basement Development Policy 45 Basement developments

192 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

City Plan Strategic Policies (November 2016) Superseded by policy

S29 Health, Safety and Well Being Policy 7 Managing development for Westminster’s people

Policy 33 Local environmental impacts

Policy 38 Design principles

Policy 12 Housing quality

S30 Flood Risk Policy 35 Flood risk

S31 Air Quality Policy 32 Air quality

S32 Noise Policy 7 Managing development for Westminster’s people

Policy 33 Local environmental effects

S33 Delivering Infrastructure and Planning Obligations Implementation and monitoring chapter

S34 Social and Community Infrastructure Policy 17 Community infrastructure and facilities

S35 Open Space Policy 34 Green infrastructure

S36 Sites of Importance for Nature Conservation Policy 34 Green infrastructure

S37 Westminster’s Blue Ribbon Network Policy 31 Waterways and waterbodies

S38 Biodiversity and Green Infrastructure Policy 34 Green infrastructure

S39 Decentralised Energy Networks Policy 36 Energy

S40 Renewable Energy Policy 36 Energy

193 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

City Plan Strategic Policies (November 2016) Superseded by policy

S41 Pedestrian Movement and Sustainable Transport Policy 24 Sustainable transport

Policy 25 Walking and cycling

S42 Servicing and Deliveries Policy 29 Freight and servicing

S43 Major Transport Infrastructure Policy 26 Public transport and infrastructure

S44 Sustainable Waste Management Policy 37 Waste management

S45 Flood Related Infrastructure Policy 35 Flood risk

S46 Thames Tunnel Policy 35 Flood risk

S47 Presumption in Favour of Sustainable Development Deleted

CM47.1 Land Use Swaps and Packages Implementation and monitoring chapter

CM47.2 Credits Implementation and monitoring chapter

194 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

Table 2: Unitary Development Plan (2007) (saved policies)

UDP Policies (January 2007) Superseded by policy (in whole or part)

STRA25 Parking control Policy 27 Parking

STRA34 Pollution: Air, water and land Policy 32 Air quality

Policy 33 Local environmental impacts

COM7 Diplomatic and allied uses Deleted

COM8 Retention of light industrial uses in creative Industries SPA Deleted N.b. Creative Industries SPA deleted

COM9 Provision of new light industrial floorspace Policy 13 Supporting economic growth

Policy 21 Mayfair and St James SPA

COM10 Retention of small-scale industrial uses Policy 13 Supporting economic growth

Policy 20 Soho Special Policy Area

COM11 Provision for general industry and commercial warehouse storage and distribution Policy 29 Freight and servicing

COM12 Retention of wholesale showrooms Deleted N.b. East Marylebone SPA deleted

H2 Preventing the use of housing by non-permanent residents Policy 8 Housing delivery

H3 To encourage the provision of more housing Policy 8 Housing delivery

H4 Provision of affordable housing Policy 9 Affordable housing

H5 Providing a range of housing sizes Policy 10 Housing for specific groups

H6 Hostels and Special Needs Housing Policy 10 Housing for specific groups

195 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

UDP Policies (January 2007) Superseded by policy (in whole or part)

H7 To protect Houses in Multiple Occupation Policy 8 Housing delivery

Policy 10 Housing for specific groups

H8 Provision of homes for long term needs Policy 12 Housing quality

Policy 11 Housing for specific groups

H10 Provision of gardens and community facilities Policy 12 Housing quality

Policy 17 Community infrastructure and facilities

Policy 34 Green infrastructure

H11 Controlling housing density Policy 8 Housing delivery

TRANS1 Protecting the environment from the effects of transport activities Policy 24 Sustainable transport

TRANS2 Road safety Policy 24 Sustainable transport

Policy 28 Highway access & management

TRANS3 Pedestrians Policy 25 Walking and cycling

TRANS4 Bus service provision and improvement Policy 26 Public transport and infrastructure

TRANS5 Surface, Underground railways and trams Policy 26 Public transport and infrastructure

TRANS6 Coaches Policy 26 Public transport and infrastructure

TRANS7 Taxis and mini-cabs Policy 26 Public transport and infrastructure

Policy 28 Highway access & management

196 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

UDP Policies (January 2007) Superseded by policy (in whole or part)

TRANS8 Improved public transport access Policy 26 Public Transport and infrastructure

TRANS9 Cycling Policy 25 Walking and cycling

TRANS10 Cycle parking standards Policy 25 Walking and cycling

Policy 27 Parking

TRANS11 Motorcycles (including all powered two-wheelers) Deleted

TRANS12 Water-based transport Policy 31 Waterways and waterbodies

Policy 24 Sustainable transport

TRANS13 Helicopters Policy 41 Building height

TRANS14 Transport assessments Policy 24 Sustainable transport

TRANS15 Traffic reduction Policy 24 Sustainable transport

Policy 25 Walking and cycling

TRANS16 The road hierarchy Policy 28 Highway access and management

TRANS17 Protecting filling stations Policy 30 Technological innovation in transport

TRANS18 Road improvements Policy 28 Highway access and management

TRANS19 Development under the highway Policy 45 Basement developments

TRANS20 Off-street servicing, deliveries and collection Policy 29 Freight and servicing

TRANS21 Off-street parking Policy 27 Parking

197 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

UDP Policies (January 2007) Superseded by policy (in whole or part)

TRANS22 Off-street parking: non- residential development Policy 27 Parking

TRANS23 Off-street parking: residential development Policy 27 Parking

TRANS24 Off-street parking: mixed development Policy 27 Parking

TRANS25 Off-street parking: public off-street parking Policy 27 Parking

TRANS26 Off-street parking in forecourts and front gardens Policy 27 Parking

TRANS27 Disabled access to buildings Policy 38 Design principles

PSPA4 Controlling new hotel and conference facilities Policy 3 Spatial Development Priorities: Paddington Opportunity Area

Policy 15 Visitor economy

NWW1 Small scale business development Policy 5 Spatial Development Priorities: North West Economic Development Area

NWW2 Large-scale mixed-use development Deleted

NWW3 Townscape and public realm enhancements Deleted

SOC1 Community facilities in general Policy 17 Community infrastructure and facilities

SOC2 Childcare facilities Policy 17 Community infrastructure and facilities

SOC3 Education facilities - Part A Education facilities - Part B Policy 18 Education and skills

Policy 10 Housing for specific groups

198 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

UDP Policies (January 2007) Superseded by policy (in whole or part)

SOC4 Health care facilities Policy 17 Community infrastructure and facilities

SOC6 Children’s play provision Policy 34 Green infrastructure

SOC7 Indoor leisure and libraries Policy 17 Community infrastructure and facilities

SOC8 Public toilets Policy 15 Visitor economy

SOC9 Telecommunications equipment Policy 19 Digital infrastructure, information and communications technology;

SS3 Enhancing shopping in the International Centres’ Primary Shopping Frontages Policy 14 Town centres, high Streets and the CAZ

SS4 New retail floorspace in the CAZ and the CAZ Frontages Policy 14 Town centres, high Streets and the CAZ

SS5 Seeking an appropriate balance of town centre uses in the West End International Policy 14 Town centres, high Streets and the CAZ Centre and elsewhere in the CAZ and CAZ Frontages – outside the Primary Shopping Frontages

SS6 District Centres Policy 14 Town centres, high Streets and the CAZ

SS7 Local Centres Policy 14 Town centres, high Streets and the CAZ

SS8 Shops and services outside the District and Local Centres Policy 14 Town centres, high Streets and the CAZ

SS9 Long-term vacant shop units in peripheral locations Policy 14 Town centres, high Streets and the CAZ

SS10 New retail floorspace in development schemes Policy 14 Town centres, high Streets and the CAZ

SS11 Superstores, Supermarkets and other major retail developments Policy 14 Town centres, high Streets and the CAZ

SS12 The location of minicab and motorcycle courier offices Deleted

199 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

UDP Policies (January 2007) Superseded by policy (in whole or part)

SS13 Street markets and individual trading pitches Policy 14 Town centres, high Streets and the CAZ

Policy 43 Public realm

SS14 (Clause 1) Character and appearance of conservation areas Policy 39 Westminster's heritage

SS14 (Clause 2) Convenience and safety of pedestrians Policy 25 Walking and cycling

Policy 43 Public realm

SS14 (Clause 3) Residential amenity Policy 7 Managing development for Westminster’s people

SS14 (Clause 4) Traffic circulation in the street and neighbouring streets Deleted

SS14 (Clause 5) Increase in number of people using the street Policy 25 Walking and cycling

SS14 (Clause 6) Creating a positive social environment Deleted

SS14 (Clause 7) Access requirements of emergency and refuse vehicles and bus services Policy 26 Public transport and infrastructure

Policy 28 Highway access and management

Policy 29 Freight and servicing (Refuse vehicles);

Policy 27 Parking (Emergency vehicles)

SS14 (Clause 8) The Servicing needs of local businesses Policy 29 Freight and servicing

SS14 (Clause 9) The needs of cyclists Policy 25 Walking and cycling

SS14 (Clause 10) Recycling facilities Policy 37 Waste management

200 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

UDP Policies (January 2007) Superseded by policy (in whole or part)

SS16 Pavement shops Policy 43 Public realm

SS17 Window displays Deleted

TACE 1 Existing hotels Policy 15 Visitor economy

TACE 2 New hotels and extensions to existing hotels Policy 15 Visitor economy

TACE 3 Temporary sleeping accommodation and permanent residential use Policy 8 Housing delivery

TACE 4 Conference and related facilities Policy 15 Visitor economy

TACE 5 Arts and cultural uses Policy 15 Visitor economy

TACE 6 Theatres Policy 15 Visitor economy

TACE 7 Arts, Culture and Education Special Policy Area Policy 15 Visitor economy

TACE 8 Entertainment uses which will generally be permissible Policy 16 Food, drink and entertainment

TACE 9 Entertainment uses which may be permissible

TACE 10 Entertainment uses which will only be permissible inexceptional circumstances

TACE 11 Tables and chairs on the footway Policy 43 Public realm

TACE 12 Amusement arcades and Centres Policy 16 Food, drink and entertainment

TACE 13 Sex-related uses Policy 16 Food, drink and entertainment

201 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

UDP Policies (January 2007) Superseded by policy (in whole or part)

ENV2 Environmental appraisal Policy 32 Air quality

Policy 33 Local environmental impacts

ENV3 Vacant and under-used land Deleted

ENV4 Planting around and on buildings Policy 34 Green infrastructure

ENV5 Air pollution Policy 32 Air quality

ENV6 Noise pollution Policy 33 Local environmental effects

ENV7 Controlling noise from plant, machinery and internal activity Policy 33 Local environmental effects

ENV8 Contaminated land Policy 33 Local environmental effects

ENV10 Light pollution Policy 33 Local environmental effects

ENV12 Waste and recycling storage Policy 37 Waste management

ENV13 Protecting amenities, daylight, sunlight and environmental quality Policy 7 Managing development for Westminster's people

Policy 12 Housing quality

Policy 34 Green infrastructure

ENV14 Metropolitan Open Land Policy 34 Green infrastructure

202 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

UDP Policies (January 2007) Superseded by policy (in whole or part)

ENV15 Public and private open space Policy 34 Green infrastructure

ENV16 Trees and shrub cover Policy 34 Green infrastructure

ENV17 Nature conservation and biodiversity Policy 34 Green infrastructure

DES1 Principles of Urban Design and Conservation Policy 38 Design principles

DES3 High buildings Policy 41 Building height

Policy 42 Building height in the housing renewal areas

DES4 Infill development Policy 40 Townscape and architecture

DES5 Alterations and extensions Policy 40 Townscape and architecture

DES6 Roof level alterations and Extensions Policy 40 Townscape and architecture

DES7 Townscape Management Part (a) Public Art Policy 43 Public realm

DES7 Townscape Management Part (b) Street Furniture and flood lighting Policy 43 Public realm

Policy 40 Townscape and architecture

DES7 Townscape Management Part (c) Boundary walls and railings Policy 40 Townscape and architecture

DES7 Townscape Management Part (d) Off street parking and hard standing Policy 27 Parking

203 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

UDP Policies (January 2007) Superseded by policy (in whole or part)

DES7 Townscape Management Part (e) Paving Policy 43 Public realm

DES8 Signs and advertisements Policy 43 Public realm

DES9 Conservation areas Policy 39 Heritage

Policy 40 Townscape and architecture

DES10 Listed buildings Policy 39 Heritage

DES11 Scheduled Ancient Monuments; Areas of archaeological priority and potential Policy 39 Heritage

DES12 Parks, gardens and squares Policy 39 Heritage

Policy 34 Green infrastructure

DES13 Canals Policy 31 Waterways and waterbodies

DES14 Strategic views Policy 40 Townscape and architecture

DES15 Metropolitan and local views Policy 40 Townscape and architecture

DES16 World Heritage Site Policy 39 Heritage

RIV1 The design of development Policy 38 Design principles

Policy 31 Waterways and waterbodies

RIV2 Views Policy 40 Townscape and architecture

204 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

UDP Policies (January 2007) Superseded by policy (in whole or part)

RIV3 Environment, open space and wildlife Policy 34 Green infrastructure

RIV4 Promoting activity Policy 31 Waterways and waterbodies

RIV5 Development built into or over the river Policy 31 Waterways and waterbodies

RIV6 River crossings Policy 31 Waterways and waterbodies

RIV7 Piers Policy 31 Waterways and waterbodies

RIV8 Permanently moored vessels Policy 31 Waterways and waterbodies

RIV9 The Thames Path Policy 31 Waterways and waterbodies

RIV10 Encouraging access to the river and its foreshore Policy 31 Waterways and waterbodies

RIV11 Safety issues Policy 31 Waterways and waterbodies

RIV12 Flood defences Policy 35 Flood risk

205 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 GLOSSARY CONTENTS CONTENTS

GLOSSARY

Unless provided in the table below, definitions Air Quality Neutral applies only to the completed conditions, as certified by an appropriately detailed in the National Planning Policy Framework development and does not include impacts arising qualified professional, independently verified and the London Plan apply. from construction, which should be separately by the council at the applicant’s expense. assessed in the Air Quality Assessment Accessibility Carbon Neutral / Zero Carbon The ability of all people, including elderly and Ambient noise Activity that causes no net release of carbon disabled people, those with young children and Ongoing sound in the environment such as from dioxide and other greenhouse gas emissions into those carrying luggage and shopping, to reach, transport and industry, as distinct from individual the atmosphere. move around and use places and facilities. events, such as a noisy all-night party. Unless stated otherwise, noise includes vibration. Central Activities Zone (CAZ) Active frontages A diverse area covering much of central London and A ground floor frontage which generates passing Amenity spaces extending across 10 London boroughs, as designated trade and provides a ‘shop-type’ window display Private, communal or public external spaces that by an indicative boundary in the London Plan. with interest at street level. provide opportunities for informal activities which contribute to the appearance of developments or CAZ retail clusters Affordable housing localities. Private external amenity space is Clusters of retail activity within the CAZ that have Housing for sale or rent, for those whose needs exclusively used by a single household; common been designated through the London Plan or the are not met by the market. In Westminster this is forms are balconies and gardens. Communal City Plan. split into ‘social’ and ‘intermediate’ types. external amenity space is exclusively used by the residents of a residential development; common Character Air Quality Neutral forms are communal gardens, terraces and roof The distinctive or typical quality of a building or An Air Quality Neutral development is one that gardens. Public amenity spaces are normally small area, as described by historic fabric, appearance, meets, or improves upon, the air quality neutral spaces where workers or visitors can relax, are townscape and land uses. benchmarks published in guidance from the GLA. used for dog walking, play, rest or quiet enjoyment, The benchmarks set out the maximum allowable or merely to provide visual amenity in densely Civic amenity spaces emissions of NOx and Particulate Matter based on built-up developments. Includes civic and market squares and other hard the size and use class of the proposed surfaced community areas designed for pedestrians development. Separate benchmarks are set out Appropriate marketing with the primary purpose of providing a setting for for emissions arising from the development and Where a use has been prominently marketed civic buildings, and urban spaces for public from transport associated with the development. for the existing use, with reasonable terms and congregation and public events.

206 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 GLOSSARY CONTENTS

Combined Heat and Power Convenience goods their time and intellectual property e.g. The combined production of electricity and usable Basic goods or services which people may need architects, advertising agencies, graphic heat is known as Combined Heat and Power on a weekly, if not daily, basis. Convenience goods design, new media design and post production. (CHP). Steam or hot water, which would otherwise retailers include grocers and newsagents and fall be rejected when electricity alone is produced, is within A1 Retail use class. Custom build used for space or process heating. Custom build homes are where an individual or Creative industries group work with a specialist developer to help Commercial use / development / floorspace Generic term for the following sub-groups: deliver their homes and they can input in the design Comprises all Class E uses and commercial sui of their home or customise elements of it. The – Creative Content: includes enterprises that generis uses in accordance with the Town and developer may help to find a plot, manage the produce intellectual property, usually copyright Country Planning (Use Classes) Order and its construction and arrange the finance for the project. protected, distributed to customers and subsequent amendments. audiences through sales, advertising or Designing out crime subscription to earn revenue e.g. broadcasters, Community facilities / infrastructure Using the design of the built environment to record companies, and all kinds of publishers Facilities / infrastructure available to the local minimise opportunities for criminal and anti-social including software, computer games and community. These consist of buildings and external behaviour, through matters such as provision of electronic publishing. spaces and can be publicly or privately run. They appropriate layout, active frontages, suitable include health facilities, education facilities, social – Creative Experience: includes enterprises lighting etc. services uses, sports and recreation facilities, whose core business model is based around community meeting halls, youth centres, local arts selling the right for consumers to witness or District Heating Network (DHN) facilities, and public toilets. experience specific activities, performances A network of pipes that connects energy or locations e.g. live theatre, music, opera production equipment with energy customers. Comparison goods and dance. They can range from several metres to several Predominantly durable goods and services where kilometres in length. – Creative Originals: includes enterprises based customers may wish to compare prices / quality / on the manufacture, production or sale of type of product sold, with other similar products District centre physical artefacts, the value of which derive sold in other shops. Comparison goods retail use Service centre, usually with up to one hundred from their perceived creative or cultural value falls within A1 Retail use class. commercial premises of various kinds, with a and exclusivity e.g. designer fashion, bespoke predominantly retail function. tailoring, craft-based activities such as jewellery Context height and arts and antiques. Context height has been taken as the typical or Entertainment uses prevailing height within an area, with high and tall – Creative Services: includes enterprises based Uses predominantly or partly used for buildings considered as an exception to the around providing Creative Services for clients entertainment purposes: it includes D2 uses context rather than defining the context itself. earning revenues in exchange for giving up including live music venues and sui generis uses

207 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 GLOSSARY CONTENTS CONTENTS

including nightclubs, casinos, amusement arcades Freight consolidation centre Highway and shisha premises. The entertainment uses that A facility for the collection of goods from a number An area of land to allow the public to move along a are not considered within this definition are sports of recipients, that are then sorted into fewer route. Includes the carriageway (for vehicles) and halls, swimming baths, gymnasiums, skating rinks, vehicles for the final leg of the journey, in order to the footway (for pedestrians). The council (and in other indoor or outdoor sports or recreation areas, reduce the overall number of freight movements. places the Royal Parks and Transport for London) concert halls, cinemas and theatres. are the highway authority, responsible for Greenfield run off rates maintaining the highway. Essential infrastructure The runoff (due to rainfall) that would occur from a Essential transport and utility infrastructure site in its undeveloped and undisturbed states. Historic fabric (including mass evacuation routes, electricity Surviving original and historic fabric in the form of generating power stations and water treatment Gross floorspace buildings, their structure, details and decoration. works) and wind turbines. As set out in the Method of assessing the extent of building (or Technical Guidance to the National Planning land) occupied by a use. This should be measured Host scheme Policy Framework. as Gross Internal Area in accordance with the RICS The development is the one which forms the Code of Measuring Practice, or subsequent original application which triggers a requirement Evening economy replacement professional guidance. for affordable housing and which is first assessed Economic activity where main business hours are for whether it can provide on-site affordable between 6pm and midnight (e.g. restaurants, Highly vulnerable uses housing in whole or part. theatres, public houses). Relating to flood risk. Uses include: Human scale development – police stations, ambulance stations and fire Family housing Development of a scale and form suitable for stations and command centres and A housing unit with between three and five people to interact with and where pedestrians feel telecommunications; bedrooms. For affordable housing, units with two comfortable by the scale and massing of buildings bedrooms may be considered suitable for families, – installations required to be operational during and open spaces making up the public realm. but this will be at the discretion of the council flooding; based on need on the council’s waiting lists and Idling – emergency dispersal points; the size of the unit. Unnecessarily running a motor vehicles engine – basement dwellings; when the vehicle is not in motion. Flood-related infrastructure – caravans, mobile homes and park homes Includes infrastructure to defend against and Infill development intended for permanent residential use; and manage flooding from a number of sources The insertion of one or more new buildings within including tidal, fluvial and surface water flooding, – installations requiring hazardous substances a continuous street façade or frontage. such as the Embankment Wall and Thames consent as set out in the Technical Guidance to Tideway Tunnel. the National Planning Policy Framework.

208 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 GLOSSARY CONTENTS

Intermediate housing recreation. Often characterised by features or Meanwhile use Homes for private rent provided at a cost at least attractive areas which are not fully accessible to the Short-term use of temporarily empty buildings 20% below market rents (including service charges public but contribute to the enjoyment of the space. such as shops until they can be brought back into where applicable) or low-cost homes for sale as commercial use. defined in the NPPF, provided to households who Local distinctiveness meet the council’s income thresholds. The positive features of a place and its Metropolitan Open Land communities which contribute to its special Strategically important open space defined in the International centre character and sense of place. London Plan. In Westminster, this comprises the Town centre at the top of London’s town centre Royal Parks – St James’s Park, Hyde Park, hierarchy of international reputation and attracting Local service provider , Green Park and Regent’s global visitors. Westminster City Council, the National Health Park. Metropolitan Open Land is afforded the Service or related organisations such as a Primary same protection as green belt land. In-vessel composting Care Trust, the Metropolitan Police, Registered An industrial form of composting biodegradable Provider and other public sector services such as Modular homes waste within an enclosed container, where job centres and courts, and voluntary sector Pre-engineered building units that are delivered conditions such as air flow, temperature and organisations operating within the city. These are and assembled as large or volumetric components emissions are controlled. public social and community uses. or as substantial parts of a building. These can include whole rooms, parts of rooms, or separate Land use swaps and packages Local centre highly serviced units such as toilets or lifts. Off-site Where two (land use swap) or more (land use Small town centre, usually containing convenience construction refers to buildings, structures or parts package) sites are considered as a single goods shops, local service uses, restaurants, cafés manufactured (and wholly or partially assembled) application for the purposes of determining a and pubs, mainly providing facilities for people away from the site before installation in their planning application. These are used to meet the living or working nearby. final position. policy objectives required over more than one site. Major development Neighbourhood forum Legibility Development greater than or equal to: A community group of residents and / or The degree to which a place can be easily businesses that has been established to prepare – 10 residential units; or understood and moved through. a neighbourhood plan for their designated area. – 0.5 hectares site area (residential) or 1 hectare Linear open spaces (non-residential); or Night-time economy Open spaces and towpaths alongside the Thames, Economic activity that occurs between midnight – gross floorspace of 1,000 sq m (GIA). canals and other waterways, paths, disused and 7am, e.g. late-night bars, casinos, night-clubs. railways, nature conservation areas, and other Major centre routes that provide opportunities for informal Predominantly retail centre providing a range of services to a wide catchment area.

209 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 GLOSSARY CONTENTS CONTENTS

Noise sensitive receptors Opportunity Areas but may need to be greater when foot traffic is Comprises residential use, educational Areas defined in the London Plan with good public more intense. In intensely used locations it may establishments, hospitals, hotels, hostels, concert transport accessibility that provide London’s have to be the full width available, even if this is halls, theatres, law courts, and broadcasting and principle opportunities for accommodating large- less than the desirable width for the peak time foot recording studios. scale development. The areas will provide traffic if it were being designed today. substantial numbers of new employment and Non-self-contained homes housing opportunities. Platform based delivery A home with some shared space or facilities Delivery of goods ordered via the internet or e.g. with a private bedroom but shared bathroom, Original building mobile applications; e.g. Just Eat, Deliveroo etc. kitchen and / or living room. In relation to a building existing on 1 July 1948, as existing on that date and in relation to a building Pocket parks Off-street parking built on or after 1st July 1948, as so built. Small areas of open space that provide natural Dedicated parking that is provided away from the surfaces and shaded areas for informal play and street, which can include garages, driveways, surface Parking stress area passive recreation that sometimes have seating level and multi-storey or basement car parks. Area where annual parking surveys indicate 80% and play equipment, with a size guide of under and higher usage throughout the day / night, in 0.4 hectares. On-street parking compliance with any restrictions that exist. Parking Parking that is permitted on the street as opposed surveys address daytime and weekday overnight Predominantly commercial neighbourhoods to within a designated car park. parking, and include bays that residents’ permits Areas of the Central Activities Zone where the can be used during the day (i.e. residents’ and majority of ground floor uses comprise of a range Open space shared use bays only) and all other spaces that of commercial activity. All land in Westminster that is predominantly can be parked in without paying overnight (i.e. all undeveloped other than by buildings or structures visitor bays and single yellow lines that are not Protected species that are ancillary to the open space use. It includes otherwise restricted). Certain plant and animal species protected to a broad range of types of open space within the various degrees in law, particularly the Wildlife and city, in public or private ownership and whether Pedestrian clear zone Countryside Act, 1981 (as amended). public access is unrestricted, limited or restricted. The area available for the pedestrians (including Includes all parks and gardens, regardless of size users of wheelchairs, prams and buggies) to walk Public realm (whether public or private); the River Thames and without obstruction. Also known as the ‘clear The parts of the city in either public or private the canals and their towpaths; civic spaces; footway width’. The useable zone accommodates ownerships which are available free for everyone children’s playgrounds, including school the flow of pedestrians between the street to use or see, including streets, squares and parks. playgrounds; ballcourts and other outdoor sports furniture zones (and space to use the street facilities; amenity green spaces, such as open furniture) at the back of footway (if any) and that Rapid inundation zone spaces on housing estates; churchyards; and placed adjacent to the kerb (if any). The minimum Low-lying areas close to the River Thames which community gardens. width for any new design should be two metres would rapidly inundate (flood) to significant levels if the Embankment Wall was breached.

210 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 GLOSSARY CONTENTS

Registered providers Sites of Importance for Nature Soundscape Registered Providers are owners and managers of Conservation (SINCs) The overall quality of an acoustic environment as a affordable housing whom are regulated by The Greater London Authority designated SINCs place for human experience. Soundscape design Government. Most operate on a not-for-profit basis to highlight areas of ecological value that are rich might include preserving, reducing or eliminating and use any trading surplus to maintain existing in wildlife within the city. The sites are graded as certain sounds or combining and balancing homes and to help finance new ones. Registered being of Metropolitan, Borough or Local sounds to create or enhance an attractive and Providers can include the council, housing Importance. Sites of Metropolitan Importance are stimulating acoustic environment. associations, housing trusts and cooperatives, those which contain the best examples of registered charities, or non-profit making provident London’s habitats and rare species that are of Specialist housing societies or companies. significance to London. Sites of Borough Affordable housing, hostels, Houses in Multiple Importance are those identified to have an Occupation, housing for those with special needs Retail frontage importance to Westminster and any damage would including elderly people, students, people with A street level frontage characterised by a mean a significant loss to the city. A site of Local learning or physical disabilities, or mental health predominance of shop-type premises. Importance is identified because of its value to the problems, or other supported accommodation. nearby community, especially in areas that are These fall within the C2 and C3 Use Classes, or Self-build deficient in wildlife sites. are classified as sui generis uses. Self-build projects are defined as those where someone directly organises the design and Small open spaces Specialist housing for older people construction of their own home. This covers a wide Gardens, sitting-out areas, children’s play spaces Housing that is intended specifically for occupation range of projects from a traditional DIY self-build or other areas of a specialist nature, including by older people. It may not necessarily fall into the home to projects where the self-builder employs nature conservation areas, with a size guide of C3 Use Class and can include sheltered someone to build their home for them. Community- under two hectares. accommodation where the occupants have no, or a led projects can also be defined as self-build. low level of support; extra-care catering for old or Social housing vulnerable people who have an existing or Sense of place This includes housing owned by local authorities foreseeable physical, sensory, cognitive or mental The unique perception of a place created by its and other registered providers for which the rent is health impairment – a range of facilities may be local buildings, streets, open spaces and activities. set in accordance with the Government’s rent provided e.g. 24-hour access to emergency The more distinctive the place the greater the policy for social rent or London Living Rent (as support, resident’s lounge, a guest room, laundry sense of it being special. A character which is defined in the London Plan). It may also be owned room, day centre activities, a restaurant or some greater than the sum of the constituent parts. by other persons and provided under equivalent kind of meal provision, fitness facilities and classes rental arrangements to the above, as agreed with and a base for health care workers, domiciliary care; Shoulder hours the local authority or with Homes England. residential / nursing care providing non-self- Those hours that book-end peak times e.g. contained residential accommodation for people 6am–7am or 10am–11am for the morning peak. who by reason of age or illness have physical,

211 CONTENTS Risk Assessment. been modelled in Westminster’s Strategic Flood breachdefence flood tidal in the These havewalk. occur a for will flooding to which depth Predicted Tidal breach level flood skyline. the higher whichmake or those change a significant to or height context prevailing the oftwice Buildings Tall building vehicles. and electric occupancy and licensedlight rail / tram cabs; and high underground, ferry, coaches, passenger buses, including rail, public transport movement; means of non-vehicular andWalking, other cycling modes transport Sustainable sewers. and drains into directly runs that water ratesurface of and flow volume, total the reduces that away in hardstandings and from buildings water manage run-off that surface drainage techniques and measuresSustainable drainage systems Sustainable package. accommodation ofthe part care or nursing is and a personal critical residents to provided are all routinely services personal team provide a consistent presence, meals and care Aof scheme manager dementia. and in-house including high levels impairment, or mental sensory – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY carbon dioxide greenhouse orcarbon other gases. and pollutants ofair release no causes that Activity Zero emissions or harm exploitation. significant against themselves after to look unable be may or is, and illness; or age ofdisability, byreason support or / and ofcare need in be may or is who Someone Vulnerable people road. main the on pedestrians and vehicles cyclists, to see road aminor on traffic allows that junction or access ofan Feature splays Visibility trajectory. housing the in included not is for and planned been not has that Development Windfall development and visitors. talent businesses, tocontinues attract West in the End, so it investment secure further sector, to and seeks resident that communities, private and public the between A partnership (WEP) West Partnership End facilities. watersports and piers moorings, boat e.g. to function location awaterside require that Uses Water related uses galleries and parks. cafés, museums, waterside e.g. restaurants, to the people attract can that but location, require doUses that not necessarily a waterfront Waterfront enhancing uses

GLOSSARY 212

CONTENTS APPENDICES CONTENTS

213 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

W

S ) ) S a t 8 r ) t l 1 9 S a k a 1 9 1 t t 0 t i 1 1 S a e e n 0 2 0 ) t t g S 0 a e m g 2 4 W ) ( 2 t m i 1 WESTMINSTER’S e e c F ) e 2 y ( n 2 0 4 m e n t 2 g 5 ( a 1 s r 2 S t o l n l a 2 ) a t e o 0 e 0 m t t o t 1 ( f n 0 2 2 o e 2 t P 1 e i n A a 3 n t o r 2 H r W d R g – n 0 f L t 0 y ( o s – e 2 4 l t y 2 8 2 g A l f C 1 2 u e ff 5 e i m – e C A s c f 1 – i t e ( r C o 0 s S s s l i r L i e t e 6 9 n o 0 0 a 1 t o o t r k A 2 1 r p y STRATEGIES e g f g S m m n d t g) c i 1 0 o 0 a f a t s a 7 k in o y i y ( e n y C m r n 2 t l F i – n g r i t n b s y 2 s g a g S r r a E u 2 a y 2 A C l a t g P l s l n r P g e c o e e H e t o n e g i l M e 0 t l e e g) A o o r P u t m n l n i s e c d d R g t 2 a r M l a e i n o n P t r o y D y I s r y g 7 ( e a t r m a c o t o l m t r C 9 ( i r i i i t r O 1 e Westminster’s City Plan C ic D s t l S n c u t a s S 0 m o k M i n v y ( e 2 o 5 r s r S c s e m e e o t S 2 t i n 0 m e c r n e y f e y 2 0 r l t n 9 ( v a s 2 t 2 n t a v g P 1 e W g g 1 u e n i s y A e s will contribute to the delivery o h t e 0 7 e 0 n l a e t c e s t i o n o i n i t 0 - 2 2 ) t g p S m 0 i a m a W y C p g f a le r t 2 2 e 1 o t n e m i e 1 r e r 0 g) m t e s m f T c P ) l 6 ( r C e n o e t n i t u g i of the council’s suite tm h e r c m y S m y 2 n e a g r a t ( s g r i e t F n i o g s n a t l e 2 n n g S r s e e s t S a e t S t s i v e 2 f a n H e e m te o r e g n 2 s ( 0 e i s ra e r N n Re a t 0 a s n s t m r l S y 2 1 e r 4 ( of other strategies. H 1 r u E o e a 2 6 2 ) o e W u t t 0 4 D e M o k A le S 0 9 is p w e 0 ) G t 1 s a 0 1 ) v s ic 2 0 in e S o o g t 7 i s i h – 2 g S r r y 2 e 1 1 t t H 9 t t ( k ( 7 – 7 a e 1 m c s t ra 2 – 2 i d R 0 ng) ( ra t 2 ) l o i t e 0 0 e 2 0 A a ic V rg e g 1 0 1 n 0 l W i lo tr an 2 e g y 2 8 1 7 2 a c c l 5 C y ( ) 5 – t ( 2 0 ( m 2 h D 2 p e c F le e 0 ur r 0 ) 2 0 ( i p i E on P y ( ch S a 10 0 0 c g i g 1 - 2 ft 2 2 i S e t te 2 t ) ( – 1 2 0 t c a 0 re 2 20 2 ( 5 0 n ra tr y 2 et M 0 1 ) 1 1 u t ty A g 15 5 ( 2 7 7 S li ty S te a ) 0 ) M a ni ra ng) ste 2 1 ) u tu t rgi A P r P 01 7 r Q or al S e a la 0 ) Ai p tur em rtne n ( ) p ul 21 ( rsh 20 ic O C 0 g) ip A 18 m lan 2 gin p ) no n P er pro co tio em ach to O E c lan ( ncy A es P Wes p ge iliti g) tmin en S er ac rgin ste pa m ball F eme r Cit ces a ate E ot gy ( y Co n lim l Fo trate unc d B C oca s S il A iod L ilitie ir Q ive ac ualit rsi uilt F H y Ac ty i B ealth a tion P n W rging) nd W la est eme ellb n 20 min tegy ( eing S 13– ste tra trate 201 r ( itch S gy fo 8 (2 201 ying P r We 013 9) Pla 0) stmin ) n (202 ster 2 ntia Pla L 017–2 Deme ocal Imp 022 ( lementa 2017) tion Plan 3 : Deliver ) y Plan 2 ing) (2019 019/20– gy (emerg 2021/22 ( ting Strate 2018) Ligh Decent ing) ralised Energy M 20 – 24 (emerg asterplan for t tor Strategy 20 he City of Wes ate Rented Sec tminster (2014) Priv 214 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

W

S ) ) S a t 8 r ) t l 1 9 S a k a 1 9 1 t t 0 t i 1 1 S a e e n 0 2 0 ) t t g S 0 a e m g 2 4 W ) ( 2 t m i 1 e e c F ) e 2 y ( n 2 0 4 m e n t 2 g 5 ( a 1 s r 2 S t o l n l a 2 ) a t e o 0 e 0 m t t o t 1 ( f n 0 2 2 o e 2 t P 1 e i n A a 3 n t o r 2 H r W d R g – n 0 f L t 0 y ( o s – e 2 4 l t y 2 8 2 g A l f C 1 2 u e ff 5 e i m – e C A s c f 1 – i t e ( r C o 0 s S s s l i r L i e t e 6 9 n o 0 0 a 1 t o o t r k A 2 1 r p y f g S m m n d e g t g) c i 1 0 o 0 a f a t s a 7 k in o y i y ( e n y C m r n 2 t l F i – n g r i t n b s y 2 s g a g S r r a E u 2 a y 2 A C l a t g P l s l n r P g e c o e e H e t o n e g i l M e 0 t l e e g) A o o r P u t m n l n i s e c d d R g t 2 a r M l a e i n o n P t r o y D y I s r y g 7 ( e a t r m a c o t o l m t r C 9 ( i r i i i t r O 1 e C ic D s t l S n c u t a s S 0 m o k M i n v y ( e 2 o 5 r s r S c s e m e e o t S 2 t i n 0 m e c r n e y f e y 2 0 r l t n 9 ( v a s 2 t 2 n t a v g P 1 e W g g 1 u e n i s y A s o h t e 0 7 e e 0 n l a e t c e s t i o n o i n i t 0 - 2 2 ) t g p S m 0 i a m a W y C p g f a le r t 2 2 e 1 o t n e m i e 1 r e r 0 g) m t e s m f T c P ) l 6 ( r C e n o t u g t e t n i m y 2 i m h n e r c e a y S m g r a t ( s g r i e t F n i o g s n a t l e 2 n n g S r s e e s t S a e t S t s i v e 2 f a n H e e m te o r e g n 2 s ( 0 e i s ra e r N n Re a t 0 a s n s t m r l S y 2 1 e r 4 ( H 1 r u E o e a 2 6 2 ) o e W u t t 0 4 D e M o k A le S 0 9 is p w e 0 ) G t 1 s a 0 1 ) v s ic 2 0 in e S o o g t 7 i s i h – 2 g S r r y 2 e 1 1 t t H 9 t t ( k ( 7 – 7 a e 1 m c s t ra 2 – 2 i d R 0 ng) ( ra t 2 ) l o i t e 0 0 e 2 0 A a ic V rg e g 1 0 1 n 0 l W i lo tr an 2 e g y 2 8 1 7 2 a c c l 5 C y ( ) 5 – t ( 2 0 ( m 2 h D 2 p e c F le e 0 ur r 0 ) 2 0 ( i p i E on P y ( ch S a 10 0 0 c g i g 1 - 2 ft 2 2 i S e t te 2 t ) ( – 1 2 0 t c a 0 re 2 20 2 ( 5 0 n ra tr y 2 et M 0 1 ) 1 1 u t ty A g 15 5 ( 2 7 7 S li ty S te a ) 0 ) M a ni ra ng) ste 2 1 ) u tu t rgi A P r P 01 7 r Q or al S e a la 0 ) Ai p tur em rtne n ( ) p ul 21 ( rsh 20 ic O C 0 g) ip A 18 m lan 2 gin p ) no n P er pro co tio em ach to O E c lan ( ncy A es P Wes p ge iliti g) tmin en S er ac rgin ste pa m ball F eme r Cit ces a ate E ot gy ( y Co n lim l Fo trate unc d B C oca s S il A iod L ilitie ir Q ive ac ualit rsi uilt F H y Ac ty i B ealth a tion P n W rging) nd W la est eme ellb n 20 min tegy ( eing S 13– ste tra trate 201 r ( itch S gy fo 8 (2 201 ying P r We 013 9) Pla 0) stmin ) n (202 ster 2 ntia Pla L 017–2 Deme ocal Imp 022 ( lementa 2017) tion Plan 3 : Deliver ) y Plan 2 ing) (2019 019/20– gy (emerg 2021/22 ( ting Strate 2018) Ligh Decent ing) ralised Energy M 20 – 24 (emerg asterplan for t tor Strategy 20 he City of Wes ate Rented Sec tminster (2014) Priv 215

Top View